User Guide
DS8000-R Series Digital
Oscilloscope
Nov. 2020
RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD.
RIGOL
DS8000-R User Guide I
Guaranty and Declaration
Copyright
© 2020 RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All Rights Reserved.
Trademark
Information
RIGOL
®
is the trademark of RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD.
Publication
Number
UGA27101-1110
Software
Version
00.01.01.00.00
Software upgrade might change or add product features. Please acquire the latest
version of the manual from RIGOL website or contact RIGOL to upgrade the
software.
Notices
⚫ RIGOL products are covered by P.R.C. and foreign patents, issued and pending.
⚫ RIGOL reserves the right to modify or change parts of or all the specifications
and pricing policies at the company’s sole decision.
⚫ Information in this publication replaces all previously released materials.
⚫ Information in this publication is subject to change without notice.
⚫ RIGOL shall not be liable for either incidental or consequential losses in
connection with the furnishing, use, or performance of this manual, as well as
any information contained.
⚫ Any part of this document is forbidden to be copied, photocopied, or rearranged
without prior written approval of RIGOL.
Product
Certification
RIGOL guarantees that this product conforms to the national and industrial
standards in China as well as the ISO9001:2015 standard and the ISO14001:2015
standard. Other international standard conformance certifications are in progress.
Contact
Us
If you have any problem or requirement when using our products or this manual,
please contact RIGOL.
E-mail: service@rigol.com
Website: www.rigol.com
RIGOL
II DS8000-R User Guide
Safety Requirement
General Safety Summary
Please review the following safety precautions carefully before putting the
instrument into operation so as to avoid any personal injury or damage to the
instrument and any product connected to it. To prevent potential hazards, please
follow the instructions specified in this manual to use the instrument properly.
Use Proper Power Cord.
Only the exclusive power cord designed for the instrument and authorized for use
within the local country could be used.
Ground the Instrument.
The instrument is grounded through the Protective Earth lead of the power cord. To
avoid electric shock, connect the earth terminal of the power cord to the Protective
Earth terminal before connecting any input or output terminals.
Connect the Probe Correctly.
If a probe is used, the probe ground lead must be connected to earth ground. Do not
connect the ground lead to high voltage. Improper way of connection could result in
dangerous voltages being present on the connectors, controls or other surfaces of
the oscilloscope and probes, which will cause potential hazards for operators.
Observe All Terminal Ratings.
To avoid fire or shock hazard, observe all ratings and markers on the instrument and
check your manual for more information about ratings before connecting the
instrument.
Use Proper Overvoltage Protection.
Ensure that no overvoltage (such as that caused by a bolt of lightning) can reach the
product. Otherwise, the operator might be exposed to the danger of an electric
shock.
Do Not Operate Without Covers.
Do not operate the instrument with covers or panels removed.
Do Not Insert Objects into the Air Outlet.
Do not insert anything into the holes of the fan to avoid damaging the instrument.
Use Proper Fuse.
Please use the specified fuses.
RIGOL
DS8000-R User Guide III
Avoid Circuit or Wire Exposure.
Do not touch exposed junctions and components when the unit is powered on.
Do Not Operate with Suspected Failures.
If you suspect that any damage may occur to the instrument, have it inspected by
RIGOL authorized personnel before further operations. Any maintenance,
adjustment or replacement especially to circuits or accessories must be performed
by RIGOL authorized personnel.
Provide Adequate Ventilation.
Inadequate ventilation may cause an increase of temperature in the instrument,
which would cause damage to the instrument. So please keep the instrument well
ventilated and inspect the air outlet and the fan regularly.
Do Not Operate in Wet Conditions.
To avoid short circuit inside the instrument or electric shock, never operate the
instrument in a humid environment.
Do Not Operate in an Explosive Atmosphere.
To avoid personal injuries or damage to the instrument, never operate the
instrument in an explosive atmosphere.
Keep Product Surfaces Clean and Dry.
To avoid dust or moisture from affecting the performance of the instrument, keep the
surfaces of the instrument clean and dry.
Prevent Electrostatic Impact.
Operate the instrument in an electrostatic discharge protective environment to avoid
damage induced by static discharges. Always ground both the internal and external
conductors of cables to release static before making connections.
Use the Battery Properly.
Do not expose the battery (if available) to high temperature or fire. Keep it out of the
reach of children. Improper change of a battery (lithium battery) may cause an
explosion. Use the RIGOL specified battery only.
Handle with Caution.
Please handle with care during transportation to avoid damage to keys, interfaces,
and other parts on the panels.
RIGOL
IV DS8000-R User Guide
Safety Notices and Symbols
Safety Notices in this Manual:
WARNING
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation or practice which, if not
avoided, will result in serious injury or death.
CAUTION
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation or practice which, if not
avoided, could result in damage to the product or loss of important data.
Safety Terms on the Product:
DANGER
It calls attention to an operation, if not correctly performed, could
result in injury or hazard immediately.
WARNING
It calls attention to an operation, if not correctly performed, could
result in potential injury or hazard.
CAUTION
It calls attention to an operation, if not correctly performed, could
result in damage to the product or other devices connected to the
product.
Safety Symbols on the Product:
Hazardous
Voltage
Safety Warning
Protective Earth
Terminal
Chassis Ground
Test Ground
RIGOL
DS8000-R User Guide V
Measurement Category
Measurement Category
DS8000-R series digital oscilloscopes can make measurements in Measurement
Category I.
WARNING
This oscilloscope can only be used for measurements within its specified
measurement categories.
Measurement Category Definitions
Measurement category I is for measurements performed on circuits not directly
connected to MAINS. Examples are measurements on circuits not derived from
MAINS, and specially protected (internal) MAINS derived circuits. In the latter case,
transient stresses are variable. Thus, you must know the transient withstand
capability of the equipment.
Measurement category II is for measurements performed on circuits directly
connected to low voltage installation. Examples are measurements on household
appliances, portable tools and similar equipment.
Measurement category III is for measurements performed in the building installation.
Examples are measurements on distribution boards, circuit-breakers, wiring
(including cables, bus-bars, junction boxes, switches and socket-outlets) in the fixed
installation, and equipment for industrial use and some other equipment. For
example, stationary motors with permanent connection to a fixed installation.
Measurement category IV is for measurements performed at the source of a
low-voltage installation. Examples are electricity meters and measurements on
primary overcurrent protection devices and ripple control units.
Ventilation Requirement
This oscilloscope uses a fan to force cooling. Please make sure that the air intake and
exhaust areas are free from obstructions and have free air. When using the
oscilloscope in a bench-top, allow at least 30 cm clearance from both sides of the
instruments; when using it in rack setting, keep at least 1 m clearance from the
surroundings of the cabinet. When running in the cabinet, keep it run in the room
temperature below 30°C.
WARNING
Inadequate ventilation may cause an increase of temperature in the
instrument, which would cause damage to the instrument. So please
keep the instrument well ventilated and inspect the air outlet and the fan
regularly.
RIGOL
VI DS8000-R User Guide
Working Environment
Temperature
Operating: -40℃ to +50℃ (for a single instrument)
-40℃ to +30℃ (for instruments in the cabinet)
Non-operating: -50℃ to +70℃
Humidity
Operating:
Below +30℃: ≤90%RH (without condensation)
+30℃ to +40℃: ≤75%RH (without condensation)
+40℃ to +50℃: ≤45%RH (without condensation)
Non-operating:
Below 65℃: ≤90% RH (without condensation)
WARNING
To avoid short circuit inside the instrument or electric shock, never
operate the instrument in a humid environment.
Altitude
Operating: below 3 km
Non-operating: below 15 km
Installation (Overvoltage) Category
This product is powered by mains conforming to installation (overvoltage) category
II.
WARNING
Ensure that no overvoltage (such as that caused by a bolt of lightning)
can reach the product. Otherwise, the operator might be exposed to the
danger of an electric shock.
Installation (Overvoltage) Category Definitions
Installation (overvoltage) category I refers to signal level which is applicable to
equipment measurement terminals connected to the source circuit. Among these
terminals, precautions are done to limit the transient voltage to a low level.
Installation (overvoltage) category II refers to the local power distribution level
which is applicable to equipment connected to the AC line (AC power).
Pollution Degree
Pollution Degree 2
RIGOL
DS8000-R User Guide VII
Pollution Degree Definition
Pollution Degree 1: No pollution or only dry, nonconductive pollution occurs. The
pollution has no effect. For example, a clean room or air-conditioned office
environment.
Pollution Degree 2: Normally only nonconductive pollution occurs. Temporary
conductivity caused by condensation is to be expected. For example, indoor
environment.
Pollution Degree 3: Conductive pollution or dry nonconductive pollution that
becomes conductive due to condensation occurs. To be found in industrial
environment or construction sites (harsh environments). For example, sheltered
outdoor environment.
Pollution Degree 4: The pollution generates persistent conductivity caused by
conductive dust, rain, or snow.
For example, outdoor areas.
Safety Class
Class 1 – Grounded Product
Care and Cleaning
Care
Do not store or leave the instrument where it may be exposed to direct sunlight for
long periods of time.
Cleaning
Clean the instrument regularly according to its operating conditions.
1. Disconnect the instrument from all power sources.
2. Clean the external surfaces of the instrument with a soft cloth dampened with
mild detergent or water. Avoid having any water or other objects into the chassis
via the heat dissipation hole. When cleaning the LCD, take care to avoid
scarifying it.
CAUTION
To avoid damage to the instrument, do not expose it to caustic liquids.
WARNING
To avoid short-circuit resulting from moisture or personal injuries, ensure
that the instrument is completely dry before connecting it to the power
supply.
RIGOL
VIII DS8000-R User Guide
Environmental Considerations
The following symbol indicates that this product complies with the WEEE Directive
2002/96/EC.
Product End-of-Life Handling
The equipment may contain substances that could be harmful to the environment or
human health. To avoid the release of such substances into the environment and
avoid harm to human health, we recommend you to recycle this product
appropriately to ensure that most materials are reused or recycled properly. Please
contact your local authorities for disposal or recycling information.
You can click on the following link https://int.rigol.com/services/declaration.html to
download the latest version of the RoHS&WEEE certification file.
RIGOL
DS8000-R User Guide IX
DS8000-R Series Overview
DS8000-R series is a medium and high-end digital oscilloscope with a compact size
designed on the basis of the ASIC chip (RIGOL self-owns its intellectual property
right) and UltraVision II technical platform developed by RIGOL. It is compact and
thin in design. It supports system integration of multiple devices, rack mount
installation, and remote system operation to meet the system requirements for
industrial automation test system. DS8000-R series oscilloscope has an analog
bandwidth of up to 2 GHz, supporting multi-device synchronous triggering, available
to be extended to 512 channels. It provides an excellent solution for users to meet
their middle and high-speed requirement for the system integration test and
synchronization requirement for multi-channel data acquisition.
Main Features:
⚫ Analog channel bandwidth: 350 MHz, 1 GHz, and 2 GHz
⚫ Up to 10 GSa/s real-time sample rate (for DS8104-R/DS8204-R), 5 GSa/s (for
DS8034-R)
⚫ 4 analog channels, 1 EXT input channel
⚫ Standard memory depth up to 500 Mpts
⚫ High waveform capture rate (over 600,000 wfm/s)
⚫ Low jitter, multiple-device synchronization (<200 ps
RMS
, typical)
⚫ High-speed data communication interface (10 GE SFP+), ensuring the reliable
transmission of massive data
⚫ Integrates 6 independent instruments into 1, including digital oscilloscope,
spectrum analyzer, AWG (option), digital voltmeter, 6-digit counter and totalizer,
and protocol analyzer (option)
⚫ Available to be extended to 512 channels, supporting synchronous acquisition
(with the multi-channel synchronization module)
⚫ Real-time eye diagram and jitter analysis software (option for
DS8104-R/DS8204-R, but unavailable for DS8034-R)
⚫ Built-in advanced power analysis software (option)
⚫ Operating temperature low below -40℃, available to be used for signal
monitoring in some special conditions
⚫ Multiple interfaces available: USB HOST&DEVICE, LAN(LXI), 10 GE SFP+, HDMI,
TRIG OUT, 10 MHz In, and 10 MHz Out
⚫ Web Control remote command
⚫ Compact and thin design, save rack space, 1U rack mount kit (standard)
⚫ Software development kit available for users to meet their customized
development according to their specific scenarios
⚫ Easy-to-use on-site multi-channel synchronization calibration kit, enabling you
to view multiple channels synchronously
RIGOL
X DS8000-R User Guide
Document Overview
Main Topics of this Manual:
Chapter 1 Quick Start
Introduces the preparations before using the oscilloscope and provides a basic
introduction of the instrument.
Chapter 2 To Set the Vertical System
Introduces the vertical system functions of the oscilloscope.
Chapter 3 To Set the Horizontal System
Introduces the horizontal system functions of the oscilloscope.
Chapter 4 To Set the Sample System
Introduces the sample system functions of the oscilloscope.
Chapter 5 To Trigger the Oscilloscope
Introduces the trigger mode, trigger coupling, trigger holdoff, external trigger, and
various trigger types of the oscilloscope.
Chapter 6 Operations and Measurements
Introduces how to make math operation, auto measurement, and cursor
measurement.
Chapter 7 Digital Voltmeter (DVM) and Frequency Counter
Introduces how to use the digital voltmeter and the frequency counter.
Chapter 8 Power Analysis (Option)
Introduces the power analysis function, analyzes the power quality and output ripple
noise of the input power.
Chapter 9 Histogram Analysis
Introduces the histogram analysis function.
Chapter 10 Real-time Eye Diagram and Jitter Analysis (Option)
Introduces the real-time eye diagram and jitter analysis function.
Chapter 11 Protocol Decoding
Introduces how to decode the input signal by using those common protocols.
Chapter 12 Reference Waveform
Introduces how to compare the input waveform with the reference waveform.
RIGOL
DS8000-R User Guide XI
Chapter 13 Pass/Fail Test
Introduces how to monitor the input signal by using the Pass/Fail test.
Chapter 14 Waveform Recording & Playing
Introduces the waveform recording & playing function.
Chapter 15 Search and Navigation Function
Introduces the navigation function and how to quickly search the relevant events.
Chapter 16 Display Control
Introduces how to control the display of the oscilloscope.
Chapter 17 Function/Arbitrary Waveform Generator (Option)
Introduces how to use the built-in Function/Arbitrary Waveform Generator option.
Chapter 18 Store and Load
Introduces how to store and load; how to carry out disk management.
Chapter 19 System Utility Function Setting
Introduces how to set the remote interfaces and system-related functions.
Chapter 20 Remote Control
Introduces how to control the oscilloscope remotely.
Chapter 21 Troubleshooting
Introduces how to deal with the common failures of the oscilloscope.
Chapter 22 Appendix
Provides the basic information for the options and accessories.
RIGOL
XII DS8000-R User Guide
Format Conventions in this Manual:
1. Key
The key on the front panel is denoted by the format of "Key Name (Bold) + Text
Box" in the manual. For example, RUN/STOP denotes the "RUN/STOP" key.
2. Menu
The menu items are denoted by the format of "Menu Word (Bold) + Character
Shading". For example, System denotes the "System" menu item under
"Utility" function.
3. Operation Procedures
→ denotes the next step of operation. For example, Utility → System denotes
clicking on the navigation function icon to enter the "Utility" menu first, and then
clicking the System menu item.
4. Connector
The connectors on the front or rear panel are usually denoted by the format of
"Connector Name (Bold) + Square Brackets (Bold)". For example, [TRIG OUT].
Content Conventions in this Manual:
DS8000-R series includes the following models. Unless otherwise specified, this
manual takes DS8204-R as an example to illustrate the functions and operation
methods of DS8000-R series digital oscilloscope.
Model
Analog
Bandwidth
No. of
Analog
Channels
No. of Function/Arbitrary
Waveform Generator
Channels
DS8104-R
1 GHz
4
1, Opt
DS8204-R
2 GHz
4
1, Opt
DS8034-R
350 MHz
4
1, Opt
Manuals of this Product:
Quick Guide, User Guide, Programming Guide, Data sheet, etc. For the latest version
of this manual, download it from the official website of RIGOL (www.rigol.com).
Contents RIGOL
DS8000-R User Guide XIII
Contents
Guaranty and Declaration ......................................................................... I
Safety Requirement ................................................................................ II
General Safety Summary ........................................................................... II
Safety Notices and Symbols ...................................................................... IV
Measurement Category ............................................................................. V
Ventilation Requirement ............................................................................ V
Working Environment .............................................................................. VI
Care and Cleaning .................................................................................. VII
Environmental Considerations ................................................................. VIII
DS8000-R Series Overview .................................................................... IX
Document Overview ................................................................................. X
Chapter 1 Quick Start ......................................................................... 1-1
General Inspection ................................................................................ 1-2
Appearance and Dimensions ................................................................... 1-3
To Prepare for Use ................................................................................. 1-4
To Connect to AC Power .................................................................. 1-4
To Connect to the Display and the Control Device .............................. 1-4
Turn-on Checkout ........................................................................... 1-5
To Replace the Fuse ........................................................................ 1-6
To Connect the Probe ...................................................................... 1-6
Function Inspection ......................................................................... 1-8
Probe Compensation ....................................................................... 1-9
Front Panel Overview ............................................................................ 1-10
Rear Panel Overview ............................................................................. 1-10
User Interface ...................................................................................... 1-14
Common Operation .............................................................................. 1-17
Click Operation .............................................................................. 1-17
Drag Operation .............................................................................. 1-18
Scroll Operation ............................................................................. 1-18
Rectangle Drawing ......................................................................... 1-18
Parameter Setting Method .............................................................. 1-21
To Use the Built-in Help System ............................................................. 1-22
To View the Option Information and the Option Installation ...................... 1-23
Chapter 2 To Set the Vertical System ................................................. 2-1
To Enable or Disable the Analog Channel ................................................. 2-2
To Adjust the Vertical Scale .................................................................... 2-2
Vertical Expansion ................................................................................. 2-3
To Adjust the Vertical Offset ................................................................... 2-3
Channel Coupling .................................................................................. 2-4
Bandwidth Limit .................................................................................... 2-5
RIGOL Contents
XIV DS8000-R User Guide
Probe Ratio ........................................................................................... 2-5
Input Impedance ................................................................................... 2-6
Waveform Invert .................................................................................... 2-7
To Set the Probe .................................................................................... 2-7
Passive Probe .................................................................................. 2-8
Active Probe .................................................................................... 2-8
Amplitude Unit ....................................................................................... 2-9
Channel Delay ....................................................................................... 2-9
Offset Cal ............................................................................................ 2-10
Channel Label ...................................................................................... 2-11
Chapter 3 To Set the Horizontal System ............................................ 3-1
To Adjust the Horizontal Time Base .......................................................... 3-2
To Adjust the Horizontal Position.............................................................. 3-2
Delayed Sweep ...................................................................................... 3-3
Chapter 4 To Set the Sample System ................................................. 4-1
Timebase Mode ..................................................................................... 4-2
YT Mode ......................................................................................... 4-2
XY Mode ......................................................................................... 4-2
ROLL Mode ..................................................................................... 4-4
Acquisition Mode .................................................................................... 4-5
Normal ........................................................................................... 4-5
Average .......................................................................................... 4-5
Peak ............................................................................................... 4-6
High Resolution ............................................................................... 4-6
Sampling Mode ...................................................................................... 4-7
Sample Rate .......................................................................................... 4-7
Memory Depth ....................................................................................... 4-9
Anti-Aliasing ........................................................................................ 4-10
Horizontal Expansion ............................................................................ 4-10
Chapter 5 To Trigger the Oscilloscope ................................................ 5-1
Trigger Source ....................................................................................... 5-2
Trigger Level .......................................................................................... 5-3
Trigger Mode ......................................................................................... 5-4
Trigger Coupling..................................................................................... 5-5
Trigger Holdoff ....................................................................................... 5-5
Noise Rejection ...................................................................................... 5-6
Trigger Type .......................................................................................... 5-7
Edge Trigger ................................................................................... 5-8
Pulse Trigger ................................................................................... 5-9
Slope Trigger ................................................................................. 5-11
Video Trigger................................................................................. 5-14
Pattern Trigger .............................................................................. 5-16
Duration Trigger ............................................................................ 5-18
Timeout Trigger ............................................................................. 5-20
Contents RIGOL
DS8000-R User Guide XV
Runt Trigger .................................................................................. 5-22
Window Trigger ............................................................................. 5-24
Delay Trigger ................................................................................. 5-26
Setup/Hold Trigger ......................................................................... 5-28
Nth Edge Trigger............................................................................ 5-30
RS232 Trigger (Option) ................................................................... 5-32
I2C Trigger (Option) ....................................................................... 5-34
SPI Trigger (Option) ....................................................................... 5-37
CAN Trigger (Option) ...................................................................... 5-39
FlexRay Trigger (Option) ................................................................. 5-42
LIN Trigger (Option) ....................................................................... 5-44
I2S Trigger (Option) ....................................................................... 5-46
MIL-STD-1553 Trigger (Option) ....................................................... 5-49
Zone Trigger ........................................................................................ 5-52
Trigger Output Connector ...................................................................... 5-54
Chapter 6 Operations and Measurements ........................................... 6-1
Math Operation ..................................................................................... 6-2
Addition ......................................................................................... 6-2
Subtraction .................................................................................... 6-3
Multiplication .................................................................................. 6-4
Division .......................................................................................... 6-5
FFT ............................................................................................... 6-6
"AND" Operation ............................................................................. 6-9
"OR" Operation .............................................................................. 6-10
"XOR" Operation ............................................................................ 6-11
"NOT" Operation ............................................................................ 6-12
Intg .............................................................................................. 6-13
Diff ............................................................................................... 6-14
Sqrt .............................................................................................. 6-14
Lg (Base 10 Exponential) ................................................................ 6-15
Ln ................................................................................................ 6-16
Exp .............................................................................................. 6-17
Abs .............................................................................................. 6-17
Low Pass ....................................................................................... 6-18
High Pass ...................................................................................... 6-19
Band Pass ..................................................................................... 6-20
Band Stop ..................................................................................... 6-21
AX+B ............................................................................................ 6-22
Math Operation Label ..................................................................... 6-22
Auto Measurement ............................................................................... 6-24
Quick Measurement after AUTO....................................................... 6-24
Measurement Parameter ................................................................. 6-26
Measurement Settings .................................................................... 6-32
Remove the Measurement Result ..................................................... 6-35
Statistical Function ......................................................................... 6-35
RIGOL Contents
XVI DS8000-R User Guide
All Measurement ............................................................................ 6-36
Cursor Measurement ............................................................................ 6-36
Manual Mode ................................................................................ 6-37
Track Mode ................................................................................... 6-41
XY Mode ....................................................................................... 6-43
Measure Mode ............................................................................... 6-44
Chapter 7 Digital Voltmeter (DVM) and Frequency Counter ............... 7-1
Digital Voltmeter (DVM) .......................................................................... 7-2
To Enable or Disable DVM Measurement ............................................ 7-2
To Select the Measurement Source .................................................... 7-3
To Select Measurement Mode ........................................................... 7-3
To Set the Limits ............................................................................. 7-3
Frequency Counter ................................................................................. 7-4
To Enable or Disable the Frequency Counter ....................................... 7-4
To Select the Measurement Source .................................................... 7-4
To Select the Measurement Item ....................................................... 7-4
To Set Resolution ............................................................................. 7-5
To Clear Count ................................................................................ 7-5
To Enable or Disable the Statistical Function ....................................... 7-5
Chapter 8 Power Analysis (Option) .................................................... 8-1
Power Quality ........................................................................................ 8-2
To Select the Analysis Type ............................................................... 8-2
To Set the Power Quality Analysis Source ........................................... 8-2
To Set the Reference Level ............................................................... 8-2
To Set Count ................................................................................... 8-3
To Reset ......................................................................................... 8-3
To Open or Close the Results Display Window .................................... 8-3
To View the Connection Diagram ....................................................... 8-3
Ripple ................................................................................................... 8-4
To Select the Analysis Type ............................................................... 8-4
To Set the Ripple Analysis Source ...................................................... 8-4
To Set Count ................................................................................... 8-4
To Reset ......................................................................................... 8-4
To Open or Close the Results Display Window .................................... 8-5
To View the Connection Diagram ....................................................... 8-5
Chapter 9 Histogram Analysis ............................................................ 9-1
To Enable or Disable the Histogram Function ............................................ 9-2
To Select the Histogram Type .................................................................. 9-2
To Select the Histogram Source ............................................................... 9-3
To Select the Measurement Item ............................................................. 9-3
To Set the Histogram Height ................................................................... 9-3
To Set the Histogram Range .................................................................... 9-3
To Enable or Disable the Statistical Function ............................................. 9-4
To Reset ................................................................................................ 9-4
Contents RIGOL
DS8000-R User Guide XVII
Chapter 10 Real-time Eye Diagram and Jitter Analysis (Option) ........ 10-1
Real-time Eye Analysis .......................................................................... 10-2
To Enable or Disable the Eye Analysis Function ................................. 10-2
To Select the Eye Source ................................................................ 10-2
To Set the Threshold ...................................................................... 10-2
To Set Clock Recovery .................................................................... 10-3
To Enable or Disable the Eye Measurement Result ............................. 10-4
To Reset Color ............................................................................... 10-5
Persistence .................................................................................... 10-5
Jitter Analysis ....................................................................................... 10-6
To Enable or Disable the Jitter Analysis Function ............................... 10-6
To Select the Jitter Source .............................................................. 10-6
To Set the Threshold ...................................................................... 10-7
To Set Clock Recovery .................................................................... 10-7
To Set the Jitter Measurement ......................................................... 10-7
To Enable or Disable the Jitter Measurement Result ........................... 10-9
To Reset ..................................................................................... 10-10
Chapter 11 Protocol Decoding ............................................................ 11-1
Parallel Decoding .................................................................................. 11-2
RS232 Decoding (Option) ...................................................................... 11-6
I2C Decoding (Option) ........................................................................ 11-12
SPI Decoding (Option) ........................................................................ 11-16
LIN Decoding (Option) ........................................................................ 11-20
CAN Decoding (Option) ....................................................................... 11-25
FlexRay Decoding (Option) .................................................................. 11-29
I2S Decoding (Option) ........................................................................ 11-33
1553B Decoding (Option) .................................................................... 11-36
Chapter 12 Reference Waveform ........................................................ 12-1
To Enable Ref Function ......................................................................... 12-2
To Select the Reference Channel ............................................................ 12-2
To Select the Ref Source ....................................................................... 12-2
To Adjust the Ref Waveform Display ....................................................... 12-2
To Save to Internal Memory .................................................................. 12-3
To Clear the Display of the Reference Waveform ...................................... 12-3
To View Details of the Reference Waveform ............................................ 12-3
To Reset the Reference Waveform .......................................................... 12-3
Color Setting ........................................................................................ 12-4
Label Setting ........................................................................................ 12-4
To Export to Internal or External Memory ............................................... 12-4
To Import from Internal or External Memory ........................................... 12-5
Binary Data Format (.bin) ...................................................................... 12-5
Binary Header Format .................................................................... 12-5
Chapter 13 Pass/Fail Test ................................................................... 13-1
To Enable or Disable the Pass/Fail Test Function ...................................... 13-2
RIGOL Contents
XVIII DS8000-R User Guide
To Start or Stop the Pass/Fail Test Operation ........................................... 13-2
To Select the Source ............................................................................. 13-2
To Create a Mask ................................................................................. 13-3
To Save a Mask .................................................................................... 13-3
To Load a Mask .................................................................................... 13-3
To Set the Output Form of the Test Results ............................................. 13-4
To Enable or Disable the Display of the Statistics of the Test Results ......... 13-4
Statistics Reset .................................................................................... 13-5
Chapter 14 Waveform Recording & Playing ....................................... 14-1
Common Settings ................................................................................. 14-2
Record Options .................................................................................... 14-3
Play Options ........................................................................................ 14-4
Chapter 15 Search and Navigation Function ...................................... 15-1
Search Function ................................................................................... 15-2
To Enable or Disable the Search Function ......................................... 15-2
To Select the Search Type and Set the Parameters ............................ 15-2
To Copy Trigger ............................................................................. 15-3
To Open or Close the Mark Table ..................................................... 15-3
To Navigate ................................................................................... 15-4
To Save ........................................................................................ 15-4
Navigation Function .............................................................................. 15-4
Chapter 16 Display Control ................................................................ 16-1
To Select the Display Type .................................................................... 16-2
To Set the Persistence Time .................................................................. 16-2
To Set the Waveform Intensity .............................................................. 16-2
To Set the Screen Grid .......................................................................... 16-3
To Set the Grid Brightness..................................................................... 16-3
Scale .................................................................................................. 16-3
Color Grade ......................................................................................... 16-4
Waveform Freeze ................................................................................. 16-4
Chapter 17 Function/Arbitrary Waveform Generator (Option) .......... 17-1
To Output Basic Waveforms .................................................................. 17-2
To Output Sine .............................................................................. 17-2
To Output Square .......................................................................... 17-3
To Output Ramp ............................................................................ 17-3
To Output Pulse ............................................................................. 17-4
To Output DC ................................................................................ 17-4
To Output Noise ............................................................................ 17-5
Sinc .............................................................................................. 17-5
Exp.Rise ....................................................................................... 17-5
Exp.Fall......................................................................................... 17-6
ECG ............................................................................................. 17-6
Gauss ........................................................................................... 17-6
Lorentz ......................................................................................... 17-7
Contents RIGOL
DS8000-R User Guide XIX
Haversine ...................................................................................... 17-7
To Output the Arbitrary Waveform .......................................................... 17-8
To Load the Channel and Waveform ................................................. 17-8
To Create the Waveform ................................................................. 17-9
To Edit Waveforms ....................................................................... 17-10
Modulation ........................................................................................ 17-11
AM ............................................................................................. 17-12
FM ............................................................................................. 17-13
FSK ............................................................................................ 17-14
Sweep ............................................................................................... 17-14
Burst ................................................................................................. 17-16
Chapter 18 Store and Load ................................................................. 18-1
Storage System .................................................................................... 18-2
Storage Type ....................................................................................... 18-2
Load Type ............................................................................................ 18-4
Internal Storage and Load ..................................................................... 18-4
External Storage and Load .................................................................... 18-6
Disk Management ................................................................................. 18-6
To Select a File Type ...................................................................... 18-7
To Create a Folder.......................................................................... 18-7
To Delete a File or Folder .............................................................. 18-11
To Copy and Paste a File or Folder ................................................. 18-11
To Rename a File or Folder ........................................................... 18-12
To Clear the Internal Memory Safely .............................................. 18-12
Export ........................................................................................ 18-12
Factory Settings ................................................................................. 18-12
Chapter 19 System Utility Function Setting ........................................ 19-1
Remote Interface Configuration ............................................................. 19-2
LAN Configuration .......................................................................... 19-2
To Set mDNS ................................................................................. 19-5
To Set Host Name .......................................................................... 19-5
To Set the GPIB Address ................................................................. 19-5
To Set HDMI .................................................................................. 19-6
SFP+ Configuration ........................................................................ 19-6
USB Connection ............................................................................. 19-7
System-related ..................................................................................... 19-8
Beeper .......................................................................................... 19-8
Language ...................................................................................... 19-8
System Information ........................................................................ 19-8
Power On ...................................................................................... 19-8
Power Status ................................................................................. 19-9
Aux Output ................................................................................... 19-9
Ref Clock ...................................................................................... 19-9
Help ........................................................................................... 19-10
Self-calibration ............................................................................. 19-10
RIGOL Contents
XX DS8000-R User Guide
Auto Config ................................................................................. 19-11
Print Setting ................................................................................ 19-11
Email .......................................................................................... 19-13
Key Locker .................................................................................. 19-14
Quick Operation .......................................................................... 19-14
Screen Saver ............................................................................... 19-17
Self-check ................................................................................... 19-17
System Time ............................................................................... 19-18
Default Option ............................................................................. 19-18
Chapter 20 Remote Control ............................................................... 20-1
Remote Control via USB ........................................................................ 20-2
Remote Control via LAN ........................................................................ 20-6
Remote Control via GPIB ....................................................................... 20-7
Chapter 21 Troubleshooting .............................................................. 21-1
Chapter 22 Appendix ......................................................................... 22-1
Appendix A: Accessories and Options ..................................................... 22-1
Appendix B: Warranty ........................................................................... 22-3
Index ................................................................................... 1
Chapter 1 Quick Start RIGOL
DS8000-R User Guide 1-1
Chapter 1 Quick Start
This chapter introduces the precautions when using the oscilloscope for the first time,
the user interface, and how to use the built-in help system.
Contents in this chapter:
◼ General Inspection
◼ Appearance and Dimensions
◼ To Prepare for Use
◼ Front Panel Overview
◼ Rear Panel Overview
◼ User Interface
◼ Common Operation
◼ To Use the Built-in Help System
◼ To View the Option Information and the Option Installation
RIGOL Chapter 1 Quick Start
1-2 DS8000-R User Guide
General Inspection
1
． Inspect the packaging
If the packaging has been damaged, do not dispose the damaged packaging or
cushioning materials until the shipment has been checked for completeness and
has passed both electrical and mechanical tests.
The consigner or carrier shall be liable for the damage to the instrument
resulting from shipment. RIGOL would not be responsible for free
maintenance/rework or replacement of the instrument.
2
． Inspect the instrument
In case of any mechanical damage, missing parts, or failure in passing the
electrical and mechanical tests, contact your RIGOL sales representative.
3． Check the accessories
Please check the accessories according to the packing lists. If the accessories
are damaged or incomplete, please contact your RIGOL sales representative.
RIGOL Chapter 1 Quick Start
1-4 DS8000-R User Guide
To Prepare for Use
To Connect to AC Power
The input AC power requirements of the oscilloscope are 100~240 V, 45~440 Hz.
Please use the power cord provided in the accessories to connect the oscilloscope to
the AC power source via the power cord connector, as shown in Figure 1-3.
Figure 1-3 To Connect to AC Power
CAUTION
To avoid electric shock, ensure that the instrument is correctly grounded.
To Connect to the Display and the Control Device
DS8000-R series does not have an LCD display or monitor. To set the parameters and
view the measurement results, you need to connect it to an external control and
display device. You can use the externally connected monitor, mouse, or keyboard to
control the DS8000-R series oscilloscope. Also, you can use the Web Control remote
control method to control the oscilloscope.
⚫ To control with the externally connected display device, mouse, and
keypad board
You can configure the parameters for the function menu, observe acquired
waveforms, measurement results, and other information on the user interface
through the display device (e.g. LCD, TV, projector, etc.) externally connected
via the rear-panel HDMI interface. The keyboard and mouse can be connected
to the oscilloscope via the USB interface. In this way, you can input values or
strings with the externally connected keypad and mouse; scroll with the mouse
to select the desired parameter and adjust the parameter value; drag the mouse
cursor to make dragging operation on the screen.
Note:
The operations for controlling the DS8000-R series oscilloscope in this manual
are, by default, described based on the externally connected mouse and keypad
board operation. The screen mentioned in this manual refers to the externally
Power Cord Connector
Chapter 1 Quick Start RIGOL
DS8000-R User Guide 1-5
connected display device that is connected via the HDMI interface.
⚫ Web Control remote operation
Connect the oscilloscope to the network, then input the IP address of the
oscilloscope into the address bar of the browser of your PC or any mobile
devices. The RIGOL web control interface is displayed. Click Web Control at
the left section to enter the web control page. Then you can view the display of
the real-time interface of oscilloscope. Through the Web Control method, you
can migrant the device control and waveform analysis to the control terminals
(e.g. PC, Mobile, iPad, and other smart terminals) to realize remote control of
instruments. For methods on how to realize Web Control for the instrument,
refer to "Remote Control".
When you first log in to the Web Control page, the user name is "admin" and the
password is "rigol".
Turn-on Checkout
When the oscilloscope is connected to power, press the Power key at the lower-left
corner of the front panel to start the oscilloscope. During the start-up process, the
oscilloscope performs a series of self-tests. If the oscilloscope has been connected to
an external display device, after the self-test, the splash screen is displayed.
Tip
Restart and Shutdown:
1. Operate the oscilloscope with the externally connected mouse. Click on the
function navigation icon
at the lower-left corner of the screen to enable
the function navigation.
2. Click on the "Restart" icon
, and then the "Restart" selection menu is
displayed, as shown in the figure below:
3. If you click on the "Restart" icon
, the oscilloscope will be powered off
and then automatically restart again. If you click on the "Shutdown" icon
, the oscilloscope is powered off (you can also press the Power key at the
lower-left corner of the front panel to turn off the oscilloscope).
RIGOL Chapter 1 Quick Start
1-6 DS8000-R User Guide
To Replace the Fuse
If you need to replace the fuse, use only the specified fuse (AC 250 V, T3.15 A; 5.2
mm×20 mm) and perform the following operations (as shown in Figure 1-4):
1． Turn off the instrument, cut off the power and remove the power cord.
2． Insert a slotted screwdriver into the slot of the fuse holder to pry it out.
3． Take out the fuse.
4． Replace the old fuse with a specified fuse.
5． Install the fuse holder.
Figure 1-4 To Replace the Fuse
WARNING
To avoid electric shock, please ensure that the instrument has been turned
off, the power source has been cut off, and the fuse to be used conforms
to the fuse rating.
To Connect the Probe
RIGOL provides the passive probe and the active probe (required to be purchased
by yourself if necessary) for DS8000-R series. For specific probe models, please refer
to
DS8000-R Series Datasheet
. For detailed technical information of the probes,
please refer to the specified Probe User Guide.
Connect the passive probe:
1. Connect the BNC terminal of the probe to an analog channel input terminal of
the oscilloscope on the front panel, as shown in Figure 1-5.
2. Connect the ground alligator clip or spring of the probe to the circuit ground
terminal, and then connect the probe tip to the circuit point to be tested.
Fuse Holder
Fuse
Chapter 1 Quick Start RIGOL
DS8000-R User Guide 1-7
Figure 1-5 To Connect the Passive Probe
After you connect the passive probe, check the probe function and probe
compensation adjustment before making measurements. For detailed procedures,
refer to "Function Inspection" and "Probe Compensation".
Connect the active probe:
Take RP7150 (active differential probe head) as an example.
1. Connect the probe head to the preamp of the active probe, as shown in Figure
1-6.
Figure 1-6 To Connect the Probe Head to the Preamp of the Active Probe
2. Connect the other end of the preamp to an analog channel input terminal of the
oscilloscope on the front panel, as shown in Figure 1-7. Note that you should
push the probe to the end to ensure that it is tightly connected.
Figure 1-7 To Connect the Active Probe
3. Use the probe auxiliary equipment to connect the probe head to the circuit
under test. For details about the probes, refer to
RP7000 Series Active Probe
User Guide
.
After connecting the active probe, you can perform probe calibration and offset
RIGOL Chapter 1 Quick Start
1-8 DS8000-R User Guide
voltage adjustment if necessary. For detailed procedures, refer to the "Active
Probe" section.
Function Inspection
This section takes RP3500A passive high-impedance probe as an example to
illustrate the steps of function inspection for the oscilloscope.
1. Click on the function navigation icon
at the lower-left corner of the screen
to open the function navigation. Then click on the "Storage" icon to enter
the storage and loading setting menu. Click More → Default, then a prompt
message "Restore default settings?" is displayed. Click OK to restore the
instrument to its factory default settings.
2. Connect the ground alligator clip of the probe to the "Ground Terminal" as
shown in Figure 1-8 below.
3. Use the probe to connect the input terminal of CH1 of the oscilloscope and the
"Compensation Signal Output Terminal" of the probe, as shown in Figure 1-8.
Figure 1-8 To Use the Compensation Signal
4. Set the probe attenuation to 10X, and then click the Auto key in the Web
Control page.
5. Observe the waveform on the display. In normal condition, the square waveform
as shown in Figure 1-9 should be displayed.
Figure 1-9 Square Waveform Signal
Compensation Signal Output Terminal
Ground Terminal
Chapter 1 Quick Start RIGOL
DS8000-R User Guide 1-9
6. Use the same method to test the other channels. If the square waveforms
actually shown do not match that in the figure above, please perform "Probe
Compensation" introduced in the next section.
WARNING
To avoid electric shock when using the probe, please make sure that the
insulated wire of the probe is in good condition. Do not touch the
metallic part of the probe when the probe is connected to high voltage
source.
Probe Compensation
When the probes are used for the first time, you should compensate the probes to
make them match the input channels of the oscilloscope. Non-compensated or
poorly compensated probes may cause measurement inaccuracy or errors. The
probe compensation procedures are as follows:
1. Perform Step 1, 2, 3 and 4 specified in "Function Inspection".
2. Check the displayed waveforms and compare them with Figure 1-10.
Figure 1-10 Probe Compensation
3. Use a nonmetallic screwdriver to adjust the low-frequency compensation
adjustment hole on the probe until the waveform is displayed as "Perfectly
compensated" in the figure above.
Tip
The signal output from the probe compensation connector can only be used for
making compensation adjustment for the 10X high-impedance probe and cannot
be used for calibration.
Over compensated Perfectly compensated Under compensated
RIGOL Chapter 1 Quick Start
1-10 DS8000-R User Guide
Front Panel Overview
Figure 1-11 Front Panel
Table 1-1 Front Panel Description
No.
Description
No.
Description
1
RUN/STOP Key
2
LAN Interface Indicator
3
Acq Indicator
4
50 Ω Indicator
5
USB HOST Interface
6
Probe Compensation Signal Output
Terminal/Ground Terminal
7
1 MΩ Indicator
8
Analog Channel Input Terminals
9
Power Key
10
Force Key (used to initiate a trigger
forcibly)
Rear Panel Overview
Figure 1-12 Rear Panel
2 1 8 9 10 11
3 4 5 6 7
1 2 3 4 5
10 9 8 7 6
Chapter 1 Quick Start RIGOL
DS8000-R User Guide 1-11
1. LAN Interface
Connect the instrument to network via this interface. The instrument is in
compliance with the standards specified in LXI Device Specification 2011. It can
be used to set up a test system.
When you access to the Internet, you can use the Web Control, PC software
Ultra Scope, or use the user-defined programming to control the instrument.
When update is available, you can perform online upgrading for the system
software of the instrument via the LAN interface. After it is connected to the
network, you can print the waveform displayed on the screen through the
network printer.
2. USB HOST Interface
You can connect the storage device that is compatible with the USB to the
instrument via the USB HOST interface.
Connecting the storage device can save or recall the waveform files and setup
files; as well as save the data and screen image. When update is available, you
can perform local upgrading for the system software of the instrument via the
USB HOST interface.
Tip
After the oscilloscope is connected to network (if you do not have the access
to the Internet, please ask the administrator to open the specified network
authority), you can perform online upgrading for the system software:
1) Click on the function navigation icon
at the lower-left corner of the
externally connected screen to enable the function navigation.
2) Click on the "Help" icon , and then the "Help" menu is displayed on
the screen.
3) Click Online upgrade, then a "System Update Information" window is
displayed, requesting you whether to accept or cancel "RIGOL
PRODUCT ONLINE UPGRADE SERVICE TERMS". Click "Accept" to start
online upgrade. Click "Cancel" to cancel the online upgrade.
Tip
Perform local upgrading for the system software:
1) Insert the USB storage device (stored with upgrading files under its root
directory) into the USB HOST interface.
2) Click on the function navigation icon
at the lower-left corner of the
externally connected screen to enable the function navigation. Then
click on the "Help" icon , and then the "Help" menu is displayed on
the screen. Click Local upgrade, then a dialog box "Upgrade system
firmware?" is displayed.
3) Click OK to start local upgrade for the oscilloscope. If you click
"Cancel", the local upgrade will be cancelled.
RIGOL Chapter 1 Quick Start
1-12 DS8000-R User Guide
3. SFP+ Interface
SFP (Small Form-factor Pluggable) module electrical interface. It is an
optical transceiver and supports hot plugging. Through this interface, the
oscilloscope can support 10 Gbit/s data transmission rate.
4. HDMI Video Output
Through this interface, you can connect the instrument to an external
display (e.g. monitor or projector) equipped with the HDMI interface to
better observe the waveform display clearly.
5. USB DEVICE Interface
You can connect the instrument to the PC via this interface. Then you can
use the PC software Ultra Scope to send the SCPI commands, or use the
user-defined programming to control the instrument.
6. 10 M In/Out
Indicates the reference clock. It can provide accurate sample clock signal
for the oscilloscope, and can be used to synchronize the clock of two or
multiple oscilloscopes.
7. EXT
Inputs the external signal via the external input terminal.
8. GEN
Outputs the built-in signal output from the function/arbitrary waveform
generator via this GEN connector. This function is only available for the
model installed with the DS8000-R-AWG option.
9. Trigger Out and Pass/Fail
⚫ TRIG OUT
The oscilloscope can output a signal that can reflect the current
capture rate of the oscilloscope at each trigger via this interface.
Connect the signal to a waveform display device and measure the
frequency of the signal. The measurement result is the same as the
current capture rate.
⚫ Pass/Fail
The instrument can output a pulse from the [TRIG OUT] connector
when a pass/failed event is detected during the pass/fail test.
10. Fuse
If you need to replace the fuse, use only the specified fuse. For details, refer
to descriptions in "To Replace the Fuse".
11. AC Power Cord Connector
Indicates the input terminal where AC power source is connected. The
power supply requirements of the instrument are: 100 V~240 V; 45
RIGOL Chapter 1 Quick Start
1-14 DS8000-R User Guide
User Interface
DS8000-R series does not have an LCD display. You can operate the oscilloscope and
configure parameters with the externally connected mouse via the USB interface on
the oscilloscope; observe acquired waveforms, the setting information, and the
measurement results on the user interface through the monitor externally connected
via the HDMI interface.
Note: The screen mentioned in this manual refers to the externally connected
display device that is connected via the HDMI interface.
Figure 1-13 User Interface
1. Analog Channel Label/Waveform
Different channels are marked with different colors. The color of the channel
label is the same as that of the waveform.
2. Operating Status
Available states include RUN, STOP, T’D (triggered), WAIT, and AUTO.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13
Chapter 1 Quick Start RIGOL
DS8000-R User Guide 1-15
3. Horizontal Time Base
Represents the time length per grid in the horizontal axis of the screen.
4. Sample Rate/Memory Depth
⚫ Displays the current sample rate and memory depth of the analog channel.
⚫ The sample rate and the memory depth will change along with the
horizontal time base.
5. Auto Measurement Label
Click the label, and up to 41 waveform parameters are available for auto
measurement. It also offers full-memory hardware measurement function.
6. Waveform Memory
Provides a diagram of the position of the screen waveform in the memory.
7. Trigger Position
Displays the trigger position of the screen waveform and that of the waveform in
the memory.
8. Run/Stop Label
In the run state, the label is displayed in green; while in the stop state, it is
displayed in red. You can click the label "STOP/RUN" to control its operating
status.
9. Horizontal Position
Displays the horizontal position. Click this label, and you can adjust the
horizontal position.
10. Trigger Type
Displays the currently selected trigger type and trigger condition setting. When
you select different trigger types, different labels are displayed. For example,
represents triggering on the rising edge in "Edge" trigger.
11. Trigger Source
Displays the currently selected trigger source (CH1-CH4, AC Line, or EXT). When
you select different trigger sources, different labels are displayed. For example,
denotes that CH1 is selected as the trigger source.
12. Trigger Level
⚫ When CH1-CH4 or EXT is selected as the trigger source, you need to set a
proper trigger level.
screen waveform
waveform in the memory
RIGOL Chapter 1 Quick Start
1-16 DS8000-R User Guide
⚫ The trigger level label is displayed at the left section of the screen, and
the trigger level value is displayed at the upper-right corner of the screen.
⚫ When you modify the trigger level, the trigger level value will change with
the up and down of
.
Note: In Slope Trigger, Runt Trigger, and Window trigger, you need to set the
upper and lower limits of the trigger level, and two trigger level labels (
and
) are displayed.
13. Operation Menu
Click the function navigation icon
at the lower-left corner of the externally
connected screen to open the function navigation. Click any icon in the
navigation menu to open the corresponding menu.
14. Notification Area
Displays the beeper icon, the USB storage device icon, time, and the LAN
connection icon.
⚫ Beeper icon: open the function navigation men, click Utility → Beeper to
turn on or off the beeper. When the beeper is turned on,
will be
displayed; when off,
will be displayed.
⚫ USB storage device icon: When a USB storage device is detected, will be
displayed.
⚫ Time: displays the system time. For the system time setting, refer to
descriptions in "System Time".
⚫ LAN connection icon: When the LAN interface is successfully connected,
will be displayed.
15. AWG
⚫ Displays the on/off status of AWG.
⚫ Displays the waveform type set for the current AWG.
⚫ It is only available for the model installed with the DS8000-R-AWG option.
16. CH4 Status Label
⚫ Displays the status of CH4.
⚫ Displays the vertical scale of CH4. That is, the voltage value per grid of CH4
in the vertical axis.
⚫ Displays the offset of CH4, i.g. the vertical offset of CH4 waveform.
⚫ Different labels will be displayed according to the current channel setting.
For example, if you select "DC" for channel coupling,
is displayed; if you
enable the bandwidth limit,
is displayed; if you select "50 Ω" for
impedance, is displayed.
17. Message Box
Displays the prompt messages.
18. CH3 Status Label
Chapter 1 Quick Start RIGOL
DS8000-R User Guide 1-17
⚫ Displays the status of CH3.
⚫ Displays the vertical scale of CH3. That is, the voltage value per grid of CH3
in the vertical axis.
⚫ Displays the offset of CH3, i.g. the vertical offset of CH3 waveform.
⚫ Different labels will be displayed according to the current channel setting.
For example, if you select "DC" for channel coupling, is displayed; if you
enable the bandwidth limit, is displayed; if you select "50 Ω" for
impedance,
is displayed.
19. CH2 Status Label
⚫ Displays the status of CH2.
⚫ Displays the vertical scale of CH2. That is, the voltage value per grid of CH2
in the vertical axis.
⚫ Displays the offset of CH2, i.g. the vertical offset of CH2 waveform.
⚫ Different labels will be displayed according to the current channel setting.
For example, if you select "DC" for channel coupling, is displayed; if you
enable the bandwidth limit, is displayed; if you select "50 Ω" for
impedance,
is displayed.
20. CH1 Status Label
⚫ Displays the status of CH1.
⚫ Displays the vertical scale of CH1. That is, the voltage value per grid of CH1
in the vertical axis.
⚫ Displays the offset of CH1, i.g. the vertical offset of CH1 waveform.
⚫ Different labels will be displayed according to the current channel setting.
For example, if you select "DC" for channel coupling,
is displayed; if you
enable the bandwidth limit, is displayed; if you select "50 Ω" for
impedance,
is displayed.
21. Function Navigation
Click the function navigation icon
at the lower-left corner of the externally
connected screen to open the function navigation.
Common Operation
Click Operation
⚫ Click the menu displayed on the externally connected screen to operate on the
menu.
⚫ Click the function navigation icon
at the lower-left corner of the externally
connected screen to open the function navigation.
⚫ Click the displayed numeric keypad to set the parameters.
⚫ Click the virtual keypad to set the label name, the filename, and other character
strings.
RIGOL Chapter 1 Quick Start
1-18 DS8000-R User Guide
⚫ Click the close button at the upper-right corner of the message box to close
the prompt window.
⚫ Click other windows on the externally connected screen and operate on the
windows.
⚫ Double-click the left mouse button to stop the recording/playing of the
waveforms or stop the self-calibration.
Drag Operation
Click to select the menu and then drag the mouse to change the position of the
waveforms or the cursor on the screen.
Scroll Operation
For the menu with the icon
on it, click to select the parameter item, then scroll
up and down with the mouse to adjust the parameter value. You can also set it with
the pop-up numeric keypad. For the menu with the icon
, click the menu and
scroll up and down with the mouse to adjust the parameter.
For example, to adjust the waveform brightness, first click on the function navigation
icon to open the function navigation. Then click on the "Display" icon
to
enter the "Display" setting menu. Click Intensity to adjust the intensity. The
adjustable range of the intensity is from 1% to 100%. Scroll up with the mouse to
increase the brightness, and scroll down with the mouse to decrease the brightness.
Rectangle Drawing
Click on the function navigation icon
at the lower-left corner of the externally
connected screen to open the function navigation. Then click on the "Draw rect" icon
to switch to the rectangle drawing mode. Drag the mouse cursor from upper left
to lower right across the screen to draw a rectangle on the screen, and then a menu
is displayed on the screen. At this time, you can click to select "Trigger zone A",
"Trigger zone B", "Histogram", "Horizontal zoom in", "Vertical zoom in", or
"Waveform zoom in". Drag the mouse cursor from lower right to upper left across the
screen to draw a rectangle on the screen. Move your cursor away from the screen,
and then a menu is displayed on the screen. At this time, you can click to select
"Trigger zone A", "Trigger zone B", "Histogram", "Horizontal zoom out", "Vertical
zoom out", or "Waveform zoom out".
Chapter 1 Quick Start RIGOL
DS8000-R User Guide 1-19
⚫ Select "Trigger zone A":
➢ Draw the region for Trigger zone A;
➢ Open Trigger zone A;
➢ Open the "Zone Trigger" menu.
⚫ Select "Trigger zone B":
➢ Draw the region for Trigger zone B;
➢ Open Trigger zone B;
➢ Open the "Zone Trigger" menu.
⚫ Select "Histogram":
➢ Draw the region for the histogram;
➢ Open the "Histogram" menu.
⚫ Select "Horizontal zoom in": expands the waveforms in the horizontal direction.
Select "Horizontal zoom out": compresses the waveforms in the horizontal
direction.
⚫ Select "Vertical zoom in": expands the waveforms in the vertical direction. Select
"Vertical zoom out": compresses the waveforms in the vertical direction.
⚫ Select "Waveform zoom in": expands the waveforms both in the horizontal and
vertical direction. Select "Waveform zoom out": compresses the waveforms both
in the horizontal and vertical direction.
Note: The menu displayed on the externally connected screen or the icon available
to be enabled on the screen can all be operated by Web Control. However, Web
Control does not support the following operations:
⚫ Double-click the mouse left button to stop recording/playing of the waveforms;
or stop the self-calibration.
Tip
Click on the "Draw rect" icon to switch between the rectangle drawing and
waveform operation modes.
Click on the "Draw rect" icon, if is displayed, it indicates that the rectangle
drawing mode is enabled. Click on the "Draw rect" icon, if is displayed, it
indicates that the waveform operation mode is enabled. By default, the waveform
operation mode is enabled.
RIGOL Chapter 1 Quick Start
1-20 DS8000-R User Guide
⚫ All the mouse dragging operation.
⚫ All the mouse scrolling operation.
⚫ Rectangle drawing operation.
In this manual, descriptions on menu operation through externally connected screen
are illustrated in details. For details about menu operation through Web Control, we
will illustrate it in relevant chapters if necessary.
Chapter 1 Quick Start RIGOL
DS8000-R User Guide 1-21
Parameter Setting Method
You can set the parameters of DS8000-R series through the Web Control or the
externally connected display device/mouse/keyboard. The common parameter
setting method is shown as follows:
Figure 1-14 Numeric Keypad
In the numeric keypad, click to select the value or the unit in the numeric keypad.
You can also use the externally connected keyboard to input the parameter value.
After you input all the values and select the desired units, the numeric keypad is
turned off automatically. This indicates that you have completed parameter setting.
Besides, after you have input the values, you can also click OK directly to close the
numeric keypad. At this time, the unit of the parameter is the default unit. In the
numeric keypad, you can also perform the following operations:
⚫ Delete the parameter value that has been input.
⚫ Set the parameter to a maximum or minimum value (sometimes, the maximum
or minimum value are the specified one for the current state).
⚫ Set the parameter to a default value.
⚫ Clear the parameter input field.
Tip
The above method is commonly used for the parameter settings of the
oscilloscope. For other methods of parameter settings, refer to details in relevant
chapters.
Parameter
Input Field
Delete key
Max. value
Min. value
Default
Clear key
RIGOL Chapter 1 Quick Start
1-22 DS8000-R User Guide
To Use the Built-in Help System
The help system of this oscilloscope provides instructions for all the function keys
and their corresponding menu keys. The steps for viewing the help information are
as follows:
1. Click the function navigation icon
at the lower-left corner of the screen to
open the function navigation. Click the "Help" icon
to enter the "Help"
menu.
2. Click Content, and then the help information is displayed on the screen, as
shown in Figure 1-15. The help interface mainly consists of two sections. The
left section lists "Help Options", and the right section is the "Help Display Area".
Figure 1-15 Help Information
After opening the help interface, you can click the desired help option to get its help
information in the "Help Display Area".
Help Options Help Display Area
Chapter 1 Quick Start RIGOL
DS8000-R User Guide 1-23
To View the Option Information and the Option
Installation
DS8000-R series oscilloscope provides multiple options to fulfill your measurement
requirements. If you need any of these options, order them according to the Order
No. available in "Appendix A: Accessories and Options", and then install the
options according to this section. Besides, you can also view the options currently
installed on the oscilloscope or activate the newly purchased option.
1. View the installed option
The instrument is installed with the trial versions of the options before leaving
factory. When you power on the instrument for the first time, the trial time is
about 2,160 minutes. If your instrument has currently installed the option,
perform the following operations to view the name of the installed option and
other detailed information about the option from the option list.
(1) Click the function navigation icon
at the lower-left corner of the screen
to open the function navigation. Click the "Help" icon
to enter the
"Help" menu.
(2) Click the Option list menu item, and then a list of the options installed is
displayed on the screen for users to view.
2. Install the option
The option license is a string of fixed characters. Each instrument has one
unique license. The license file should be in specific format, with the filename
extension ".lic". After you purchase an option, you will obtain a key (used for
obtaining the license). Then, you can install the option according to the
following steps.
1) Obtain an option license
(1) Log in to the RIGOL official website (www.rigol.com), click License
Activation to enter the "Registered product license code" interface.
(2) In the software license registration interface, input the correct key,
serial number (Click the function navigation icon at the lower-left
corner of the screen to open the function navigation. Click the "Help"
icon to enter the "Help" menu. Click About to obtain the serial
number), and the verification code. Click Generate to obtain the
download link of the option license file. If you need to use the option
license file, please click the link to download the file to the root
directory of the USB storage device.
2) Install the option
(1) Confirm that the option license file is located in the root directory of the
USB storage device, and connect the USB storage device to the
oscilloscope properly.
RIGOL Chapter 1 Quick Start
1-24 DS8000-R User Guide
(2) The Option install key is activated, and click this menu item to start
installing the option.
(3) After installation, a prompt message "Option activated successfully" is
displayed.
Note: After the option has been installed, you are recommended to
restart the instrument.
Tip
⚫ Only 1 option license file of one instrument is allowed to be stored in the
same USB storage device, but the USB storage device can store the option
license file of several different instruments. You are not allowed to modify
the licensed filename.
⚫ During the installation process, you are not allowed to power off the
instrument or pull out the USB storage device.
⚫ Sending the SCPI commands (:SYSTem:OPTion:INSTall <license>) to install
options is supported. Installing options by inputting the license code
manually is not supported.
Chapter 2 To Set the Vertical System RIGOL
DS8000-R User Guide 2-1
Chapter 2 To Set the Vertical System
DS8000-R series provides four analog input channels (CH1-CH4), and each channel
is equipped with an independent vertical control system. The setting methods for the
vertical systems of the four channels are the same. This chapter takes CH1 as an
example to introduce the setting method for the vertical system. For this oscilloscope,
only CH1 is enabled by default.
Contents in this chapter:
◼ To Enable or Disable the Analog Channel
◼ To Adjust the Vertical Scale
◼ Vertical Expansion
◼ To Adjust the Vertical Offset
◼ Channel Coupling
◼ Bandwidth Limit
◼ Probe Ratio
◼ Input Impedance
◼ Waveform Invert
◼ To Set the Probe
◼ Amplitude Unit
◼ Channel Delay
◼ Offset Cal
◼ Channel Label
RIGOL Chapter 2 To Set the Vertical System
2-2 DS8000-R User Guide
To Enable or Disable the Analog Channel
Enable the analog channel:
Connect a signal to the channel connector of CH1, and then click the CH1 label at the
bottom part of the screen to enable CH1. Then, CH1 label is illuminated in yellow. At
this point, the channel setting menu is displayed at the right section of the screen
and the channel is activated. The channel status label at the bottom of the screen is
shown in the figure below.
The information displayed in the channel status label is related to the current channel
setting but irrelevant with the on/off status of the channel. After the channel is
turned on, modify the parameters such as the vertical scale, horizontal time base,
trigger mode, and trigger level according to the input signal for easy observation and
measurement of the waveform.
If CH1 is enabled but not activated, the channel status label is shown in the following
figure. To activate the channel, click the channel number in the channel status label
or the channel label at the left side of the screen.
Disable the analog channel:
If the setting menu of the channel that needs to be disabled (the current channel is
activated) is displayed at the right section of the screen, click the channel status label
to disable the channel. If the setting menu of the channel that needs to be disabled is
not displayed at the right section of the screen, first open the setting menu of the
channel to be disabled (activate the channel), then click the channel status label to
disable the channel. For example, if CH1 and CH2 are enabled, and CH2 channel
setting menu is displayed on the screen, then if you need to disable CH1, first
activate CH1, and then click the CH1 channel status label displayed on the externally
connected screen to disable CH1. If CH1 is disabled, the channel status label is
shown in the following figure.
To Adjust the Vertical Scale
Vertical scale indicates the voltage value per grid in the vertical axis of the screen. It
is often expressed in V/div. While you adjust the vertical scale, the display amplitude
of the waveform would enlarge or reduce. The scale information of the channel
status label (e.g. as shown in the following figure) at the lower section of the screen
Chapter 2 To Set the Vertical System RIGOL
DS8000-R User Guide 2-3
would change accordingly.
The adjustable range of the vertical scale is related to the currently set probe ratio
and input impedance. By default, the probe ratio is 1X and the input impedance is 1
MΩ. In this case, the adjustable range of the vertical scale is from 1 mV/div to 10
V/div.
When CH1 is turned on, you can adjust the vertical scale with the following method:
Click the channel status label at the bottom of the screen. The following window is
displayed. Click on the
icon at the right side of the Scale input field to
decrease or increase (i.g. compress or enlarge the waveforms). You can also click the
Scale input field to input a specific value with the displayed numeric keypad.
Vertical Expansion
Click the channel status label at the bottom of the screen. In the channel menu, click
More, then click Expand continuously to select "Center" or "GND".
⚫ Center: when the vertical scale is changed, the waveform will be expanded or
compressed around the screen center.
⚫ GND: when the vertical scale is changed, the waveform will be expanded or
compressed around the signal ground level position.
To Adjust the Vertical Offset
Vertical offset indicates the offset of the signal ground level position of the waveform
from the screen center in the vertical direction. Its unit is consistent with the
currently selected amplitude unit (refer to "Amplitude Unit"). When adjusting the
vertical offset, the waveforms of the corresponding channel moves up and down.
The vertical offset information (as shown in the following figure) in the channel
status label at the bottom of the screen will change accordingly.
Vertical Offset
Vertical Scale
Value Input Field Decrease Increase
RIGOL Chapter 2 To Set the Vertical System
2-4 DS8000-R User Guide
The adjustable range of the vertical offset is related to the current input impedance,
probe ratio, and vertical scale.
When CH1 is turned on, you can adjust the vertical offset with the following method:
Click the channel status label at the bottom of the screen. The following window is
displayed. Click on the
icon at the right side of the Offset input field to
decrease or increase the offset. You can also click the Offset input field to input a
specific value with the displayed numeric keypad.
Channel Coupling
The undesired signals can be filtered out by setting the coupling mode. For example,
the signal under test is a square waveform with DC offset.
⚫ When the coupling mode is "DC": the DC and AC components of the signal under
test can both pass the channel.
⚫ When the coupling mode is "AC": the DC components of the signal under test
are blocked.
⚫ When the coupling mode is "GND", the DC and AC components of the signal
under test are both blocked.
Click Coupling in the channel setting menu to select the coupling mode. The
available coupling modes include DC, AC, and GND. The current coupling mode is
displayed in the channel status label at the bottom of the screen, as shown in the
figure below.
DC AC GND
Note:
⚫ When the input impedance is set to "50 Ω", the channel coupling is set to DC
coupling by force, and the Coupling menu is grayed out and cannot be
modified.
⚫ When the coupling mode is "AC", the input impedance is set to 1 MΩ by force,
Value Input Field Decrease Increase
Chapter 2 To Set the Vertical System RIGOL
DS8000-R User Guide 2-5
and the Impedance menu is grayed out and cannot be modified.
Bandwidth Limit
DS8000-R series supports the bandwidth limit function. Setting the bandwidth limit
can reduce the noises in the displayed waveforms. For example, the signal under test
is a pulse with high frequency oscillation.
⚫ When the bandwidth limit is disabled, the high frequency components of the
signal under test can pass the channel.
⚫ When you enable the bandwidth limit and limit it to 20 MHz, 250 MHz, or 500
MHz, the high frequency components found in the signal under test that are
greater than 20 MHz, 250 MHz, or 500 MHz are attenuated.
Note: The bandwidth limit is different for different models.
Click the channel status label and select the desired bandwidth limit in the CH1
setting menu. When the bandwidth limit is enabled, the character "B" will be
displayed in the channel status label at the bottom of the screen, as shown in the
figure below.
The bandwidth limit that you select is based on the input impedance of your
oscilloscope model, as shown in Table 2-1.
Table 2-1 Bandwidth Limit
Input Impedance of
the Oscilloscope
Available Bandwidth Limit
50 Ω
DS8104-R/DS8204-R: 20 M
DS8034-R: 20 MHz, 250 MHz
1 MΩ
DS8104-R/DS8204-R: 20 MHz, 250 MHz, 500 MHz;
DS8034-R: 20 MHz, 250 MHz
Note: Bandwidth limit can not only reduce the noise, but also can attenuate or
eliminate the high frequency components of the signal.
Probe Ratio
DS8000-R series allows you to set the probe attenuation manually. To obtain the
correct measurement results, you must set the probe ratio properly. By default, the
probe ratio is 1X.
Click the CH1 channel status label to open the setting menu of CH1. Then, click
Attenuation to select the desired probe ratio. The probe ratio values available are
RIGOL Chapter 2 To Set the Vertical System
2-6 DS8000-R User Guide
as shown in Table 2-2.
Table 2-2 Probe Ratio
Menu
Attenuation Ratio
(display amplitude of the signal: actual amplitude
of the signal)
0.0001X
0.0002X
0.0005X
0.001X
0.002X
0.005X
0.01X
0.02X
0.05X
0.1X
0.2X
0.5X
1X (default)
2X
5X
10X
20X
50X
100X
200X
500X
1000X
2000X
5000X
10000X
20000X
50000X
0.0001:1
0.0002:1
0.0005:1
0.001:1
0.002:1
0.005:1
0.01:1
0.02:1
0.05:1
0.1:1
0.2:1
0.5:1
1:1
2:1
5:1
10:1
20:1
50:1
100:1
200:1
500:1
1000:1
2000:1
5000:1
10000:1
20000:1
50000:1
Note: After the oscilloscope auto-recognized certain probes with a fixed attenuation
ratio, the probe ratio will also be auto recognized. You do not have to set it
manually.
Input Impedance
To reduce the circuit load between the oscilloscope and the circuit under test, this
oscilloscope provides two input impedance modes: 1 MΩ (default) and 50 Ω.
⚫ 1 MΩ: The input impedance of the oscilloscope is very high, and the current
flowed from the circuit under test can be ignored.
⚫ 50 Ω: makes the oscilloscope match the device whose input impedance is 50 Ω.
Chapter 2 To Set the Vertical System RIGOL
DS8000-R User Guide 2-7
Click the CH1 channel status label to open the setting menu of CH1. Then, click
Impedance continuously to select the input impedance of the oscilloscope. If you
select "50 Ω", the channel status label at the bottom of the screen will display the
icon
.
Note:
⚫ After the oscilloscope recognizes the probe automatically, the input impedance
will also be auto recognized. You do not have to set it manually.
⚫ The setting of the input impedance will affect the ranges of channel vertical
scale and offset.
Waveform Invert
Click the CH1 channel status label to open the setting menu of CH1. Then, click
Invert continuously to enable or disable the waveform invert. When enabled, the
channel label is displayed, as shown in the following figure.
When disabled, the waveform is displayed normally; when enabled, the voltage
values of the displayed waveform are inverted (as shown in Figure 2-1). Enabling the
waveform invert will also change the result of math function and waveform
measurement.
(a) "Invert" Off
(b) "Invert" On
Figure 2-1 Waveform Invert
Note: When the waveform invert is enabled, the trigger edge or the trigger polarity
will change (e.g. Edge trigger, Pulse trigger, or Slope trigger).
To Set the Probe
The analog channel of this oscilloscope not only supports the common passive probe,
but also the active probe. It can automatically recognize the currently connected
RIGOL Chapter 2 To Set the Vertical System
2-8 DS8000-R User Guide
probe type and its probe ratio. For detailed technical information of the probes,
please refer to the corresponding Probe User Guide.
Click the CH1 channel status label to open the setting menu of CH1. Then, click
Probe to open the probe menu. If different probes are connected to the oscilloscope,
different information about the probe will be displayed, and you can perform the
different operations on the menu.
Passive Probe
If a passive probe is connected, for example, when RIGOL's RP3500A probe model
is connected to the oscilloscope, click Probe to open the probe menu. Its sub-menus
are grayed out and disabled.
Active Probe
If an active probe is connected, for example, when RIGOL's RP7150 probe model is
connected to the oscilloscope, click Probe to open the probe menu, and you can
operate on the menu item.
⚫ Probe Delay
To avoid measurement result errors arising from the transmission delay of the
probe cable, the oscilloscope provides the probe delay adjustment function for
the active probe. Click Skew, and use the pop-up numeric keypad or scroll with
the mouse to set the probe delay time.
⚫ Bias Voltage
The oscilloscope provides the bias voltage adjustment function for active probes.
This function is used to adjust the signal under test that exceeds the input
dynamic range of the probe amplifier to an appropriate range to ensure the
Tip
For some of the ordinary passive probes, the oscilloscope can recognize their
probe ratio automatically. If not recognized, please refer to "Probe Ratio" to set
the probe ratio.
Tip
⚫ When a 50 Ω active probe is connected, the input impedance (refer to "Input
Impedance") of the channel will be automatically set to "50 Ω".
⚫ For the active probe, the oscilloscope can recognize the probe ratio
automatically. If the currently connected probe supports a variety of probe
ratios, please refer to "Probe Ratio" to set the probe ratio.
Chapter 2 To Set the Vertical System RIGOL
DS8000-R User Guide 2-9
integrity of the signal under test. Click Bias, and use the pop-up numeric keypad
or scroll with the mouse to set the DC bias voltage.
⚫ Probe Information
Click About to view information about the probe currently connected, such as
the manufacturer, model, serial number, and the last calibration date.
⚫ Probe Calibration
Click Calibration to start zero calibration automatically for the probe.
⚫ Demagnetization
Click Demagnetize to perform demagnetization automatically for the probe.
Note: This function is only available when the specified probe is connected. For
details about the probe demagnetization operation, refer to
PCA1030/PCA2030/PCA1150 User Guide
.
Amplitude Unit
Select the amplitude display unit for the current channel. The available units are W, A,
V, and U. When the unit is changed, the unit related to the relevant functions of the
channel will change accordingly.
Click the CH1 channel status label to open the CH1 setting menu. Click More → Unit
to select a unit. The default unit for the value is V.
Channel Delay
When using an oscilloscope for actual measurement, the transmission delay of the
probe cable may bring relatively greater errors (zero offset). DS8000-R allows you to
set a delay time for calibrating the zero offset of the corresponding channel. Zero
offset is defined as the offset of the crossing point of the waveform and trigger level
line relative to the trigger position, as shown in Figure 2-2.
RIGOL Chapter 2 To Set the Vertical System
2-10 DS8000-R User Guide
Figure 2-2 Zero Offset
Click the CH1 channel status label to open the CH1 setting menu. Click More →
Ch-Ch Skew, then use the pop-up numeric keypad or scroll with the mouse to set
the desired delay calibration time. The available range of the delay calibration time is
from -100 ns to 100 ns.
Note: This parameter is related to the instrument model and the current horizontal
time base setting. The larger the horizontal time base is, the larger the setting
step will be.
Offset Cal
When you use an oscilloscope to make actual measurements, a small offset that
arises from the temperature drift of the component or external environment
disturbance may occur on the zero-cross voltage of the channel, which will affect the
measurement results of the vertical parameters. DS8000-R allows you to set an
offset calibration voltage for calibrating the zero point of the corresponding channel,
so as to improve the accuracy of the measurement results.
Note: If the zero-cross voltage of the channel has a larger amplitude offset that
exceeds the adjustable offset calibration range, please perform self-calibration
for the instrument manually to ensure the measurement accuracy. For details,
refer to descriptions in "Self-calibration".
Click the CH1 channel status label to enter the CH1 setting menu. Click More →
Offset Cal, then use the pop-up numeric keypad or scroll with the mouse to set the
offset calibration value.
Chapter 2 To Set the Vertical System RIGOL
DS8000-R User Guide 2-11
Channel Label
The instrument uses the channel number to mark the corresponding channel by
default. For ease of use, you can also set a label for each channel. For example,
"
".
Click the CH1 channel status label to enter the CH1 setting menu. Click More →
Label to enter the label setting menu. You can use the built-in label or manually
input a label. Three input methods are available for you to input a label name,
including Chinese, English, and Traditional Chinese.
The label setting menu includes the following menu items.
⚫ Click Display to turn on or off the display of the channel label. If it is enabled,
the label will be displayed at the left side of the waveform. When on, CH1 is, by
default, displayed to be the channel label.
⚫ Click Library to select the preset labels such as CH1, ACK, ADDR, BIT, CLK, CS,
DATA, IN, MISO, MOSI, OUT, RX and TX.
⚫ Click Label and the label editing interface is automatically displayed, as shown in
Figure 2-3. You can input the label manually. For the label input method, refer to
"To Create a Folder".
Figure 2-3 Label Editing Interface
For example, set the label to "
". In the virtual keypad, click "Caps" (only available
to be selected for English input method) to switch the uppercase or lowercase mode.
Select "C" and click it to complete inputting C. Use the same method to input "hn1".
After finishing the input, click OK to finish the editing. If Display is enabled, the
label
will be displayed at the left of CH1 waveform.
To delete or modify the input characters, move the cursor to the right side of the
character required to be deleted or modified, and then click the delete key to delete
the character. To modify the characters, input the desired character again.
Label Input Area Input Selection Area Virtual Keypad Delete Key
Upper/Lower
Case Switch
RIGOL Chapter 3 To Set the Horizontal System
3-2 DS8000-R User Guide
To Adjust the Horizontal Time Base
Horizontal time base, also called the horizontal scale, refers to the time of each grid
in the horizontal direction of the screen. It is usually expressed in s/div. The
adjustable range of the horizontal time base is from 200 ps/div to 1 ks/div.
While you change the horizontal time base, the displayed waveforms of all channels
are expanded or compressed horizontally relative to the current selected horizontal
reference baseline (refer to "Horizontal Expansion"). The horizontal time base at
the upper-left corner of the screen will be changed accordingly, as shown in the
figure below.
You can adjust the horizontal time base with the following methods:
Click the horizontal time base label
at the top of the screen. The following
window is displayed. Click on the
icon at the right side of the Scale input
field to decrease or increase the scale (i.g. enlarge or compress the waveforms). You
can also click the Scale input field to input a specific value with the displayed
numeric keypad.
You can click on the function navigation icon to open the function navigation. Then
click Acquisition → Fine to enable or disable the fine adjustment of the horizontal
time base.
⚫ Coarse adjustment: adjusts the horizontal time base of the waveforms of all
channels at 1-2-5 step within the adjustable range.
⚫ Fine adjustment: adjusts the horizontal time base of the waveforms of all
channels with a minor step value within the adjustable range.
To Adjust the Horizontal Position
Horizontal position, also called trigger position, refers to the trigger point position of
the waveforms of all channels in the horizontal direction relative to the screen center.
When the waveform trigger point is at the left (right) side of the screen center, the
Decrease the Scale Increase the Scale
Chapter 3 To Set the Horizontal System RIGOL
DS8000-R User Guide 3-3
horizontal position is a positive (negative) value.
While you change the horizontal position, the waveform trigger points and the
displayed waveforms of all channels are moved left and right. The horizontal position
at the right-upper corner of the screen changes accordingly, as shown in the figure
below.
You can adjust the horizontal position with the following method:
Click the horizontal position label
at the top of the screen. The following
window is displayed. Click the
icon at the right side of the Pos input field
to decrease or increase the horizontal position. You can also click the Pos input field
to input a specific value with the displayed numeric keypad.
Delayed Sweep
Delayed sweep can be used to enlarge a length of waveform horizontally to view
waveform details.
Click the function navigation icon
at the lower-left corner of the externally
connected screen to open the function navigation menu. Click the acquisition icon
to open the acquisition setting menu. Click More → Zoom to enable or disable
the delayed sweep function.
Note:
To enable the delayed sweep, you must ensure that the current time base
mode is "YT".
In delayed sweep mode, the screen is divided into two display areas, as shown in
Figure 3-1.
Horizontal Position of the
Delayed Sweep
Decrease the Position Increase the Position
RIGOL Chapter 3 To Set the Horizontal System
3-4 DS8000-R User Guide
Figure 3-1 Delayed Sweep Mode
Waveform before enlargement:
The waveform in the area that is not covered by subtransparent blue in the upper
part of the screen is the waveform before enlargement. Its horizontal time base (also
called main time base) is displayed at the upper-left corner of the screen.
Waveform after enlargement:
The waveform in the lower part of the screen is the horizontally expanded delayed
sweep waveform. Its horizontal time base (also called the time base of the delayed
sweep) is displayed on the screen. Compared with the main time base, the time
based of the delayed sweep has increased the waveform resolution.
Note: The time base of the delayed sweep should be smaller than or equal to the
main time base.
Waveform Before Enlargement
Main
Time
Base
Time
Base of
the
Delayed
Sweep
Waveform After Enlargement
RIGOL Chapter 4 To Set the Sample System
4-2 DS8000-R User Guide
Timebase Mode
DS8000-R series supports three available time base modes: YT mode, XY mode, and
ROLL mode. By default, the time base mode is YT.
Click the function navigation icon
at the lower-left corner of the externally
connected screen to open the function navigation menu. Click the acquisition icon
to open the acquisition setting menu. Click Timebase Mode to select the
desired time base mode.
YT Mode
In this mode, the Y axis represents voltage, and the X axis represents time.
Note: Only when this mode is enabled, can delayed sweep be turned on. In this
mode, when the horizontal time base is equal to or greater than 200 ms/div,
the instrument enters slow sweep mode. For details, refer to descriptions for
slow sweep in "ROLL Mode".
XY Mode
In this mode, both the X axis and the Y axis represent the voltage. The mode
changes the display from voltage-time display mode to voltage-voltage display. You
can use the Lissajous method to measure the phase deviation of the two input
signals whose frequencies are the same. The following figure shows the
measurement schematic diagram of phase deviation.
Figure 4-1 Measurement Schematic Diagram of Phase Deviation
According to sin
=A/B or C/D, is the phase deviation angle between the two
Chapter 4 To Set the Sample System RIGOL
DS8000-R User Guide 4-3
channels. The definitions of A, B, C, and D are shown in the above figure. The phase
deviation angle is obtained, that is:
=arcsin(A/B) or arcsin(C/D)
If the principal axis of the ellipse is within Quadrant I and III, the phase deviation
angle obtained should be within Quadrant I and IV, namely within (0 to π/2) or (3π/2
to 2π). If the principal axis of the ellipse is within Quadrant II and IV, the phase
deviation angle obtained should be within Quadrant II and III, namely within (π/2 to
π) or (π to 3π/2).
The XY function can be used to measure the phase deviation occurred when the
signal under test passes through a circuit network. Connect the oscilloscope to the
circuit to monitor the input and output signals of the circuit.
Application example: measures the phase deviation between the input signals of
two channels.
Use Lissajous method
1. Connect one sine signal to CH1, and then connect another sine signal (with the
same frequency and amplitude as the previous one but a 90° phase deviation
from the previous one) to CH2.
2. In the Web Control page, click Auto at the right side of the operation interface.
After you select "XY" mode, click the label
at the top of the
screen to adjust the horizontal timebase for obtaining a proper sample rate to
get a better view of Lissajous graph for observation and measurement.
3. Click the channel label of CH1 and CH2 at the bottom of the screen respectively
to adjust their vertical scale and offset to make the signals easy to observe.
Then, a circle, as shown in the figure below, should be displayed.
4. Observe the measurement result shown in the figure above. According to the
measurement schematic diagram of the phase deviation (as shown in Figure
4-1), A/B(C/D)=1. Thus, the phase deviation angle of the two channel input
RIGOL Chapter 4 To Set the Sample System
4-4 DS8000-R User Guide
signals is =arcsin1=90°.
Note:
⚫ The maximum sample rate in XY mode is 2.5 GSa/s. In this mode, CH1 and CH2
are forced to be enabled; CH3 and CH4 are forced to be disabled. Generally, a
longer sample waveform can ensure better display effect of Lissajous figure. But
due to the limitation of the memory depth, you have to reduce the waveform
sample rate to acquire a longer waveform (refer to the introduction in "Memory
Depth"). Therefore, during the measurement, reducing the sample rate
properly can achieve better display effect of Lissajous figure.
⚫ The following functions are disabled in XY mode:
"Delayed Sweep", "To Select the Display Type", "Scale", "Protocol
Decoding", "Pass/Fail Test", "To Trigger the Oscilloscope", and
"Waveform Recording & Playing".
ROLL Mode
In this mode, the waveform scrolls from right to left to update the display. The
available range of the horizontal scale is from 200 ms to 1 ks. Click the function
navigation icon to select the Acquisition icon, then click More → Auto ROLL to
select "ON". The system automatically enters the ROLL mode, and slow sweep mode
is disabled.
Note:
⚫ If the current delayed sweep is enabled, then when you enable the ROLL mode,
the delayed sweep is disabled automatically. When you re-enable the "YT" mode,
the delayed sweep will be re-enabled.
⚫ The following functions cannot be set in ROLL mode:
"To Adjust the Horizontal Position" (available when the oscilloscope is in
"Stop" operating status), "Delayed Sweep", "To Trigger the Oscilloscope",
"Protocol Decoding", "Pass/Fail Test", "Waveform Recording &
Playing", and "To Set the Persistence Time".
Slow Sweep
It is similar to the ROLL mode. In YT mode, when the horizontal time base is set to
200 ms/div or smaller, the instrument enters the "slow sweep" mode, in which the
instrument first acquires the data at the left of the trigger point and then waits for
a trigger event. After the trigger occurs, the instrument continues to finish the
waveform at the right of the trigger point. When observing the low-frequency
signal in the slow sweep mode, it is recommended that you set "Channel
Coupling" to "DC".
Chapter 4 To Set the Sample System RIGOL
DS8000-R User Guide 4-5
Acquisition Mode
The acquisition mode is used to control how to generate waveform points from the
sample points.
DS8000-R supports the following four acquisition modes: Normal, Average, Peak,
and High Resolution. By default, the acquisition mode is Normal.
Click on the function navigation icon to open the navigation function. Then, click
Acquisition → Acquisition to select the desired acquisition mode.
Normal
In this mode, the oscilloscope samples the signal at a specified fixed time interval to
rebuild the waveform. For most of the waveforms, using this mode can produce the
optimal display effects.
Average
In this mode, the oscilloscope averages the waveforms from multiple samples to
reduce the random noise of the input signal and improve the vertical resolution.
Greater number of averages can lower the noise and increase the vertical resolution;
while at the same time, it will slow the response of the displayed waveform to the
waveform changes.
When you select "Average" mode, click Averages and use the numeric keypad or
scroll with the mouse to set the desired number of averages. When the average
count value is not in Nth power-of-2, a prompt message "Truncation average error" is
displayed. At this time, a value that is smaller than the one you input and the closest
to the Nth power-of-2 will be input automatically. For example, if you input 9 with the
numeric keypad, the average count will be input 8 automatically.
The number of averages can be set to 2, 4, 8, 16, 32, 64, 128, 256, 512, 1024, 2048,
4096, 8192, 16384, 32768, or 65536. By default, it is 2.
RIGOL Chapter 4 To Set the Sample System
4-6 DS8000-R User Guide
Figure 4-2 Waveforms before Averaging
Figure 4-3 Waveforms after 128 Times of Averaging
Peak
In this mode, the oscilloscope acquires the maximum and minimum values of the
signal within the sample interval to get the envelope of the signal or the narrow pulse
that might be lost. In this mode, signal aliasing can be prevented, but the noise
displayed would be larger.
In this mode, the oscilloscope can display all the pulses whose pulse widths are at
least the same as the sample period.
High Resolution
This mode uses an over-sample technique to average the neighboring points of the
sample waveform. This reduces the random noise on the input signal, generates a
Chapter 4 To Set the Sample System RIGOL
DS8000-R User Guide 4-7
much smoother waveform on the screen. This is generally used when the sample
rate of the digital converter is greater than the storage rate of the acquisition
memory.
Note:
⚫ The "Average" and "High Res" modes use different averaging methods. The
former uses "Multi-sample Average" and the latter uses "Single-sample
Average".
⚫ In "High Res" mode, the oscilloscope improves the measurement accuracy at
the cost of bandwidth. Each time the sampling rate changes, a window
displaying the current bandwidth appears at the lower-left corner of the screen.
⚫ In "High Res" mode, the highest waveform refresh rate mode is not supported.
Sampling Mode
This oscilloscope only supports the real-time sampling mode. In this mode, the
oscilloscope produces the waveform display from samples collected during one
trigger event. The highest real-time sample rate on the analog channel of DS8000-R
series is 10 GSa/s (note that for DS8034-R, it is 5 GSa/s). The current sample rate is
displayed under CH SampleRate.
Sample Rate
Sampling is the process of converting the analog signal into the digital signal at a
specified time interval and then restoring them in sequence. The sample rate is the
reciprocal of the time interval.
The sample rate of the analog channel is related to the current channel mode. The
maximum real-time sample rate in the single-channel mode of the oscilloscope is 10
GSa/s. The maximum real-time sample rate in the dual-channel mode is 5 GSa/s, and
the maximum real-time sample rate in the 4-channel mode is 2.5 GSa/s.
Note: For DS8034-R, the maximum real-time sample rate in the single-channel
mode of the oscilloscope is 5 GSa/s. The maximum real-time sample rate in
the dual-channel mode is 5 GSa/s, and the maximum real-time sample rate in
the 4-channel mode is 2.5 GSa/s
Tip
When you click the
label at the top of the screen to stop sampling, the
oscilloscope will maintain its last captured graph. At this time, you can still expand
or zoom the waveforms horizontally or vertically.
RIGOL Chapter 4 To Set the Sample System
4-8 DS8000-R User Guide
Note: The sample rate is displayed both in the label at the
upper part of the screen and in the CH SampleRate menu. To indirectly
modify the sample rate, click the label
at the upper part
of the screen. Then adjust the horizontal time base or modify the memory
depth to modify the sample rate. In addition, if the triggering source selects
the analog channel, it will cause the channel mode to change, affecting the
sampling rate.
The impact of low sample rate on the waveform:
1. Waveform Distortion: when the sample rate is too low, some waveform
details are lost, and the sample waveform displayed is rather different from the
actual waveform of the signal.
2. Waveform Aliasing: when the sample rate is twice lower than the actual
signal frequency (Nyquist Frequency), the frequency of the waveform rebuilt from
the sample data is smaller than the actual signal frequency.
3. Waveform Leakage: when the sample rate is too low, the waveform rebuilt
from the sample data does not reflect all the actual signal information.
Tip
Single-channel mode: only one of the four channels (CH1/CH2/CH3/CH4) is
enabled.
Dual-channel mode: either CH1 or CH2 is enabled; and either CH3 or CH4 is
enabled.
4-channel mode: CH1/CH2 are both enabled or CH3/CH4 are both enabled.
Chapter 4 To Set the Sample System RIGOL
DS8000-R User Guide 4-9
Memory Depth
Memory depth refers to the number of points of the oscilloscope that can store in one
trigger acquisition. It reflects the storage capability of the acquisition storage. This
oscilloscope is equipped with a standard memory depth of up to 500 Mpts.
T
Trigger Point
Pre-sample Delayed Sample
Memory Depth
Figure 4-4 Memory Depth
The following equation shows the relations among memory depth, sample rate, and
horizontal time base scale:
MDepth SRate TScale HDivs=
MDepth
——indicates the memory depth. The unit is pts.
SRate
——indicates the sample rate. The unit is Sa/s.
TScale
——indicates the horizontal time base scale. The unit is s/div.
HDivs
——indicates the number of grids in the horizontal direction. The unit is div.
Therefore, under the same horizontal time base scale, a higher memory depth can
ensure a higher sample rate.
In the Acquisition menu, click Mem Depth to select the desired memory depth. By
default, the memory depth is 1M.
Pulse
disappeared
RIGOL Chapter 4 To Set the Sample System
4-10 DS8000-R User Guide
― In single-channel mode, the memory depths available include Auto, 1 Kpts, 10
Kpts, 100 Kpts, 1 Mpts, 10 Mpts, 25 Mpts, 50 Mpts, 100 Mpts, 125 Mpts, 250
Mpts, and 500 Mpts.
― In dual-channel mode, the memory depths available include Auto, 1 Kpts, 10
Kpts, 100 Kpts, 1 Mpts, 10 Mpts, 25 Mpts, 50 Mpts, 100 Mpts, 125 Mpts, and 250
Mpts.
― In 4-channel mode, the memory depths available include Auto, 1 Kpts, 10 Kpts,
100 Kpts, 1 Mpts, 10 Mpts, 25 Mpts, 50 Mpts, 100 Mpts, and 125 Mpts.
Note:
In "Auto" mode, the oscilloscope selects the memory depth automatically
according to the current sample rate.
Anti-Aliasing
At a slower sweep speed, the sample rate is reduced, and a dedicated display
algorithm can be used to minimize the possibility of aliasing.
In the Acquisition menu, click Anti-aliasing to enable or disable the anti-aliasing
function. By default, anti-aliasing is disabled. In this case, it is more likely to generate
waveform aliasing.
Note: This function should be enabled when the horizontal time base has a large
deviation from the period of the signal under test (e.g. when the horizontal
time base is greater than five-fold the period of the signal under test). It is
available when the timebase mode is "YT".
Horizontal Expansion
Horizontal expansion indicates the reference position that the screen waveform is
referenced to when it is horizontally expanded or compressed. In YT mode, in the
Acquisition menu, click More → Expand and then select the desired reference
position. The horizontal expansion reference supported by the oscilloscope includes
Center, Left, Right, Trigger, and User. The default is "Center".
⚫ Center: when the horizontal time base is modified, the waveform will be
expanded or compressed horizontally relative to the screen center.
⚫ Left: when the horizontal time base is modified, the waveform will be expanded
or compressed horizontally relative to the leftmost position of the screen.
⚫ Right: when the horizontal time base is modified, the waveform will be
expanded or compressed horizontally relative to the rightmost position of the
screen.
⚫ Trigger: when the horizontal time base is modified, the waveform will be
expanded or compressed horizontally relative to the trigger point.
⚫ User: when the horizontal time base is modified, the waveform displayed will be
Chapter 5 To Trigger the Oscilloscope RIGOL
DS8000-R User Guide 5-1
Chapter 5 To Trigger the Oscilloscope
As for trigger, you set certain trigger condition according to the requirement and
when a waveform in the waveform stream meets this condition, the oscilloscope
captures this waveform as well as the neighboring part, and displays them on the
screen. For the digital oscilloscope, it samples waveform continuously no matter
whether it is stably triggered, but only stable trigger can be stably displayed. The
trigger module ensures that every time base sweep or acquisition starts from the
user-defined trigger condition, namely every sweep is synchronous with the
acquisition and the waveforms acquired is overlapped so as to display the stable
waveforms.
Trigger settings should be based on the features of the input signal. To quickly
capture the desired waveform, you need to understand the signal under test. This
oscilloscope provides abundant trigger types that help you focus on the desired
waveform details.
Contents in this chapter:
◼ Trigger Source
◼ Trigger Level
◼ Trigger Mode
◼ Trigger Coupling
◼ Trigger Holdoff
◼ Noise Rejection
◼ Trigger Type
◼ Zone Trigger
◼ Trigger Output Connector
RIGOL Chapter 5 To Trigger the Oscilloscope
5-2 DS8000-R User Guide
Trigger Source
Click on the function navigation icon
at the lower-left corner of the screen to
open the function navigation. Click on the trigger icon
to open the trigger setting
menu. Click Source to select the desired source.
Analog channels (CH1-CH4), EXT (external trigger), or AC Line can all be selected as
the trigger source.
Analog channel input:
Signals input from analog channels CH1-CH4 can all be used as trigger sources. No
matter whether the channel selected is enabled, the channel can work normally.
External trigger input:
The external trigger source can be used to trigger on the fifth channel while all the
other four channels are acquiring data. The trigger signal (e.g. external clock or
signal of the circuit under test) will be connected to EXT trigger source via the
external trigger input terminal [EXT TRIG] connector. You can set the trigger
conditions within the range of the trigger level (from -5 V to +5 V).
AC line input:
The trigger signal is obtained from the AC power input of the oscilloscope. AC trigger
is usually used to measure signals relevant to the AC power frequency. For example,
stably triggering the waveform output from the transformer of a transformer
substation. It is mainly used in related measurements of the power industry.
Chapter 5 To Trigger the Oscilloscope RIGOL
DS8000-R User Guide 5-3
Trigger Level
The adjustment of the trigger level is related to the type of the trigger source.
⚫ When the trigger source is selected from CH1 to CH4, click on the trigger setting
label
at the right-upper corner of the screen. Then, in the
"Trigger Setting" window, input the trigger level with the pop-up numeric
keypad into the "Level" field. You can also click the Up and Down arrow at the
right of the "Level" field to increase or decrease the trigger level. During the
adjustment, a trigger level line (the color of the trigger level line should be
consistent with that of the channel color) and a trigger label "
" are displayed
on the screen, and they move up and down with the variation of the trigger level.
When you stopping modifying the trigger level, the trigger level line disappears
in about 2 s. The current trigger level value is displayed at the upper-right corner
of the screen.
Note: In Runt Trigger, Slope Trigger, and Window trigger, you need to set the
upper and lower limits of the trigger level. In the trigger menu, you can set the
specified trigger level. The difference between the current upper limit and lower
limit of the trigger level is displayed at the upper-right side of the screen. Two
trigger level labels (
and ) are displayed at the left side of the screen.
Meanwhile, the real-time trigger level information is displayed at the lower-left
side of the screen, as shown in the figure below. H indicates the upper limit of
the trigger level, L indicates the lower limit of the trigger level, and △ indicates
the deviation of the trigger level.
⚫ When the trigger source is EXT, you can also set the trigger level in the "Trigger"
menu. The current trigger level value is displayed at the upper-right corner of
the screen.
Note: For this trigger source, only the variation of the trigger level value is
displayed on the screen during the adjustment of the trigger level, without
displaying the trigger level lines on the screen.
⚫ When the trigger source is AC Line, there is no trigger level.
RIGOL Chapter 5 To Trigger the Oscilloscope
5-4 DS8000-R User Guide
Trigger Mode
The following is the schematic diagram of the acquisition memory. To easily
understand the trigger event, we classify the acquisition memory into the pre-trigger
buffer and post-trigger buffer.
Figure 5-1 Schematic Diagram of the Acquisition Memory
After the system runs, the oscilloscope operates by first filling the pre-trigger buffer.
It starts searching for a trigger after the pre-trigger buffer is filled. While searching
for the trigger, the data sampled will still be transmitted to the pre-trigger buffer (the
new data will continuously overwrite the previous data). When a trigger is found, the
pre-trigger buffer contains the data acquired just before the trigger. Then, the
oscilloscope will fill the post-trigger buffer and display the data in the acquisition
memory.
DS8000-R provides three trigger modes: Auto, Normal, and Single. The default is
Auto.
The trigger mode is displayed at the upper-right corner of the screen: A (Auto), N
(Normal), and S (Single).
⚫ Auto: In this trigger mode, if the specified trigger conditions are not found,
triggers are forced and acquisitions are made so as to display the waveforms.
This trigger mode should be used when the signal level is unknown or the DC
should be displayed as well as when forcible trigger is not necessary as the
trigger condition always occurs.
⚫ Normal: In this trigger mode, triggers and acquisitions only occur when the
specified trigger conditions are found. This trigger mode should be used when
the signal is with low repetition rate or only the event specified by the trigger
setting needs to be sampled as well as when auto trigger should be prevented to
acquire stable display.
⚫ Single: In this trigger mode, the oscilloscope performs a single trigger and
acquisition when the specified trigger conditions are found, and then stops. This
trigger mode should be used when you need to perform a single acquisition of
the specified event and analyze the acquisition result (you can pan and zoom
the currently displayed waveform, and the subsequent waveform data will not
overwrite the current waveform). After a single trigger mode is initiated, the
operating status of the oscilloscope is in "STOP" state.
Pre-trigger Buffer
Post-trigger Buffer
Trigger Event
Acquisition Memory
Chapter 5 To Trigger the Oscilloscope RIGOL
DS8000-R User Guide 5-5
Click on the trigger setting label at the upper-right corner of the
screen. Then the following window is displayed. Click to select "Auto", "Normal", or
"Single" as the trigger mode.
Note: In "Normal" and "Single" trigger modes, press Force on the front panel to
generate a trigger signal forcibly.
Trigger Coupling
Trigger coupling decides which kind of components will be transmitted to the trigger
module. Please distinguish it from "Channel Coupling".
Note: Trigger coupling is only valid when the trigger type is Edge and the trigger
source is an analog channel.
In the "Trigger" menu, click Coupling to select the desired coupling mode.
DS8000-R provides four coupling mode: DC, AC, LFR, and HFR. By default, it is DC.
⚫ DC: allows DC and AC components to pass the trigger path.
⚫ AC: blocks the DC components and attenuates signals.
⚫ LFR: blocks the DC components and rejects the low-frequency components.
⚫ HFR: rejects the high frequency components.
Trigger Holdoff
Trigger holdoff can be used to stably trigger on complex repetitive waveforms that
have multiple edges (or other events) between waveform repetitions (such as pulse
series). Holdoff time indicates the time that the oscilloscope waits for re-arming the
trigger module after generating a correct trigger. The oscilloscope will not trigger
even if the trigger condition is met during the holdoff time and will only re-arm the
trigger module after the holdoff time expires.
Tip
When "AC" or "LFR" is selected under Coupling, no trigger level lines and trigger
icons are displayed. When you adjust the trigger level, you can only see the
changes of the trigger level values at the upper-right corner of the screen.
RIGOL Chapter 5 To Trigger the Oscilloscope
5-6 DS8000-R User Guide
For example, to stably trigger the repetitive pulse series as shown in the figure below,
the holdoff time should be set to a value that is greater than t1 and smaller than t2.
Figure 5-2 Schematic Diagram of Trigger Holdoff
In the "Trigger" menu, click Holdoff (for some trigger, Holdoff is a sub menu under
More, at this time, click More → Holdoff) and then set the holdoff time with the
pop-up numeric keypad or scroll with the mouse to adjust the holdoff time. The
adjustable range of holdoff time is from 8 ns to 10 s. By default, it is 8 ns.
Noise Rejection
Noise rejection can reject the high frequency noise in the signal and reduce the
possibility of miss-trigger of the oscilloscope.
In the "Trigger" menu, click Noise Reject continuously (for some trigger, Noise
Reject is a sub menu under More, at this time, click More → Noise Reject) to
enable or disable noise rejection.
Note: This function is only available when the trigger source is an analog channel.
Holdoff Time
Trigger Position
t1
t2
Chapter 5 To Trigger the Oscilloscope RIGOL
DS8000-R User Guide 5-7
Trigger Type
DS8000-R series oscilloscope provides the following trigger functions.
⚫ Edge Trigger
⚫ Pulse Trigger
⚫ Slope Trigger
⚫ Video Trigger
⚫ Pattern Trigger
⚫ Duration Trigger
⚫ Timeout Trigger
⚫ Runt Trigger
⚫ Window Trigger
⚫ Delay Trigger
⚫ Setup/Hold Trigger
⚫ Nth Edge Trigger
⚫ RS232 Trigger (Option)
⚫ I2C Trigger (Option)
⚫ SPI Trigger (Option)
⚫ CAN Trigger (Option)
⚫ FlexRay Trigger (Option)
⚫ LIN Trigger (Option)
⚫ I2S Trigger (Option)
⚫ MIL-STD-1553 Trigger (Option)
RIGOL Chapter 5 To Trigger the Oscilloscope
5-8 DS8000-R User Guide
Edge Trigger
Triggers on the trigger level of the specified edge of the input signal.
Trigger Type:
Click on the function navigation icon
at the lower-left corner of the screen. Click
the trigger icon and select Type in the trigger setting menu. Select "Edge", and then
the current trigger setting information (including trigger type, trigger source, and
trigger level) is displayed at the upper-right corner of the screen, as shown in the
figure below. The information will change based on the trigger settings.
Source Selection:
Click Source to open the signal source list and select CH1-CH4, AC Line, or EXT. For
details, refer to descriptions in "Trigger Source". The current trigger source is
displayed at the upper-right corner of the screen.
Note: Only when we select the channel (that has been input with signals) as the
trigger source, can we obtain a stable trigger.
Edge Type:
Click Slope to select the input signal the edge on which the oscilloscope triggers.
Then, the current edge type is displayed at the upper-right corner of the screen.
⚫
Rising: triggers on the rising edge of the input signal when the voltage level
meets the specified trigger level.
⚫
Falling: triggers on the falling edge of the input signal when the voltage level
meets the specified trigger level.
⚫
Either: triggers on the rising or falling edge of the input signal when the
voltage level meets the preset trigger level.
Trigger Mode:
For details, refer to descriptions in "Trigger Mode".
Trigger Parameter Setting:
Set the trigger parameters (trigger coupling, trigger holdoff, and noise rejection)
under this trigger type. For details, refer to descriptions in "Trigger Coupling",
"Trigger Holdoff", and "Noise Rejection".
Trigger Level:
Please refer to descriptions in "Trigger Level". The current trigger level value is
displayed at the upper-right corner of the screen.
Chapter 5 To Trigger the Oscilloscope RIGOL
DS8000-R User Guide 5-9
Pulse Trigger
Triggers on the positive or negative pulse with a specified width. In this mode, the
oscilloscope will trigger when the pulse width of the input signal satisfies the
specified pulse width condition.
In this oscilloscope, positive pulse width is defined as the time difference between
the two crossing points of the trigger level and positive pulse; negative pulse width is
defined as the time difference between the two crossing points of the trigger level
and negative pulse, as shown in the figure below.
Figure 5-3 Positive Pulse Width/Negative Pulse Width
Trigger Type:
Click Type, and select "Pulse". Then, the current trigger setting information is
displayed at the upper-right corner of the screen, as shown in the figure below.
Source Selection:
Click Source to open the signal source list and select CH1-CH4. For details, refer to
descriptions in "Trigger Source". The current trigger source is displayed at the
upper-right corner of the screen.
Note: Only when we select the channel (that has been input with signals) as the
trigger source, can we obtain a stable trigger.
Polarity:
Click Polarity continuously to select the desired polarity. The polarities available are
positive polarity (
) and negative polarity ( ).
Trigger Condition:
Click When to select the trigger condition.
⚫ When you select "Positive" for polarity, ">" for trigger condition, the oscilloscope
Trigger
Level
Trigger
Level
+Width
A
B
-Width
A
B
RIGOL Chapter 5 To Trigger the Oscilloscope
5-10 DS8000-R User Guide
triggers when the positive pulse width of the input signal is greater than the
specified pulse width.
⚫ When you select "Positive" for polarity, "<" for trigger condition, the oscilloscope
triggers when the positive pulse width of the input signal is smaller than the
specified pulse width.
⚫ When you select "Positive" for polarity, "<>" for trigger condition, the
oscilloscope triggers when the positive pulse width of the input signal is greater
than the specified lower limit of pulse width and smaller than the specified upper
limit of pulse width.
⚫ When you select "Negative" for polarity, ">" for trigger condition, the
oscilloscope triggers when the negative pulse width of the input signal is greater
than the specified pulse width.
⚫ When you select "Negative" for polarity, "<" for trigger condition, the
oscilloscope triggers when the negative pulse width of the input signal is smaller
than the specified pulse width.
⚫ When you select "Negative" for polarity, "<>" for trigger condition, the
oscilloscope triggers when the negative pulse width of the input signal is greater
than the specified lower limit of pulse width and smaller than the specified upper
limit of pulse width.
Pulse Width Setting:
⚫ When ">" or "<" is set to the trigger condition, click Lower or Upper to set the
lower/upper limit value with the pop-up numeric keypad or by scrolling with the
mouse. The pulse range available is from 800 ps to 10 s.
⚫ When "<>" is set to the trigger condition, click Upper and Lower to set the
lower/upper limit value with the pop-up numeric keypad or by scrolling with the
mouse.
Note: The lower limit of the pulse width must be smaller than the upper limit.
Trigger Mode:
For details, refer to descriptions in "Trigger Mode".
Trigger Parameter Setting:
For details, refer to descriptions in "Trigger Holdoff" and "Noise Rejection".
Trigger Level:
Please refer to descriptions in "Trigger Level". The current trigger level value is
displayed at the upper-right corner of the screen.
Chapter 5 To Trigger the Oscilloscope RIGOL
DS8000-R User Guide 5-11
Slope Trigger
In Slope trigger, the oscilloscope triggers on the positive or negative slope of the
specified time. This trigger mode is applicable to ramp and triangle waveforms.
In this oscilloscope, positive slope time is defined as the time difference between the
two crossing points of trigger level line A and B with the rising edge; negative slope
time is defined as the time difference between the two crossing points of trigger level
line A and B with the falling edge, as shown in the figure below.
Figure 5-4 Positive Slope Time/Negative Slope Time
Trigger Type:
Click Type to select "Slope". Then, the current trigger setting information is
displayed at the upper-right corner of the screen, as shown in the figure below.
Source Selection:
Click Source to switch the trigger source and select CH1-CH4. For details, refer to
descriptions in "Trigger Source". The current trigger source is displayed at the
upper-right corner of the screen.
Note: Only when we select the channel (that has been input with signals) as the
trigger source, can we obtain a stable trigger.
Edge Type:
Click Slope continuously to select the input signal edge on which the oscilloscope
triggers.
⚫
Rising: triggers on the rising edge of the input signal.
⚫
Falling: triggers on the falling edge of the input signal.
Slope Condition:
Click When to select the trigger condition.
⚫ When you select "Rising" for the edge type, ">" for trigger condition, the
oscilloscope triggers when the positive slope time of the input signal is greater
than the specified time.
⚫ When you select "Rising" for the edge type, "<" for trigger condition, the
Upper Limit of Trigger Level
(Up Level)
Lower Limit of Trigger Level
(Low Level)
A
B
Positive Slope Time
Negative Slope Time
RIGOL Chapter 5 To Trigger the Oscilloscope
5-12 DS8000-R User Guide
oscilloscope triggers when the positive slope time of the input signal is smaller
than the specified time.
⚫ When you select "Rising" for the edge type, "<>" for trigger condition, the
oscilloscope triggers when the positive slope time of the input signal is greater
than the specified lower limit time and smaller than the specified upper limit
time.
⚫ When you select "Falling" for the edge type, ">" for trigger condition, the
oscilloscope triggers when the negative slope time of the input signal is greater
than the specified time.
⚫ When you select "Falling" for the edge type, "<" for trigger condition, the
oscilloscope triggers when the negative slope time of the input signal is smaller
than the specified time.
⚫ When you select "Falling" for the edge type, "<>" for trigger condition, the
oscilloscope triggers when the negative slope time of the input signal is greater
than the specified lower limit time and smaller than the specified upper limit
time.
Slope Time Setting:
⚫ When ">" or "<" is set to trigger condition, click Lower or Upper to set the
lower/upper limit value with the pop-up numeric keypad or by scrolling with the
mouse. The available range of the slope time is from 800 ps to 10 s.
⚫ When "<>" is set to trigger condition, click Upper and Lower to set the upper/
lower limit value with the pop-up numeric keypad or by scrolling with the mouse.
Note: The lower slope time limit must be smaller than the upper slope time
limit.
Level Selection and Adjustment of Trigger Level:
After the trigger condition setting is completed, you need to adjust the trigger level
to correctly trigger the signal and obtain a stable waveform. Click Level Select
(when "<>" is selected as the trigger condition, Level Select is a sub-menu under
More) to select the desired level type for adjustment.
⚫ Level A: only adjusts the upper limit of the trigger level, and the lower limit of
the trigger level remains unchanged.
⚫ Level B: only adjusts the lower limit of the trigger level, and the upper limit of
the trigger level remains unchanged.
⚫ Level AB: adjusts the upper and lower limits of the trigger level at the same time,
and the trigger level deviation (the difference between the upper limit and lower
limit of the trigger level) remains unchanged.
Click on the trigger label
at the upper-right corner of the screen. The
"Trigger Setting" window is displayed. Input the trigger level into the "Level A" and
"Level B" field with the pop-up numeric keypad. You can use the Up and Down arrow
at the right side of the "Level A" or "Level B" field to adjust the trigger level. During
the adjustment of trigger level, two trigger level lines appear on the screen, and they
move up and down with the change of the trigger level. At the same time, the
Chapter 5 To Trigger the Oscilloscope RIGOL
DS8000-R User Guide 5-13
real-time trigger level information is displayed at the lower-left corner of the screen
(as shown in the figure below, H indicates the upper limit of the trigger level, L
indicates the lower limit of the trigger level, and △ indicates the trigger level
deviation). When you stopping modifying the trigger level, the trigger level line and
the trigger level information at the lower-left corner of the screen disappear in about
2 s. The current trigger level deviation is displayed at the upper-right corner of the
screen.
Trigger Mode:
For details, refer to descriptions in "Trigger Mode".
Trigger Parameter Setting:
Set the trigger parameters (trigger holdoff and noise rejection) under this trigger
type. For details, refer to descriptions in "Trigger Holdoff" and "Noise
Rejection".
RIGOL Chapter 5 To Trigger the Oscilloscope
5-14 DS8000-R User Guide
Video Trigger
The video signal can include image information and timing information, which adopts
different standards and formats. DS8000-R series can trigger on the standard video
signal field or line of NTSC (National Television Standards Committee), PAL (Phase
Alternating Line), or SECAM (Sequential Couleur A Memoire).
Trigger Type:
Click Type to select "Video". The current trigger setting information is displayed at
the upper-right corner of the screen, as shown in the figure below.
Source Selection:
Click Source to switch the trigger source and select CH1-CH4. For details, refer to
descriptions in "Trigger Source". The current trigger source is displayed at the
upper-right corner of the screen.
Note: Only when we select the channel (that has been input with signals) as the
trigger source, can we obtain a stable trigger.
Video Polarity:
Click Polarity continuously to select the desired video polarity. The polarities
available are positive polarity (
) and negative polarity ( ).
Video Standard:
Click Standard to select the desired video standard.
Video
Standard
Frame Frequency
(Frame)
Scan Type
TV Scan Line
NTSC
30
Interlaced Scan
525
PAL/SECAM
25
Interlaced Scan
625
480p/60Hz
60
Progressive Scan
525
576p/50Hz
50
Progressive Scan
625
720p/60Hz
60
Progressive Scan
750
720p/50Hz
50
Progressive Scan
750
720p/30Hz
30
Progressive Scan
750
720p/25Hz
25
Progressive Scan
750
720p/24Hz
24
Progressive Scan
750
1080p/60Hz
60
Progressive Scan
1125
1080p/50Hz
50
Progressive Scan
1125
1080p/30Hz
30
Progressive Scan
1125
1080p/25Hz
25
Progressive Scan
1125
1080p/24Hz
24
Progressive Scan
1125
1080i/60Hz
60
Interlaced Scan
1125
1080i/50Hz
50
Interlaced Scan
1125
Chapter 5 To Trigger the Oscilloscope RIGOL
DS8000-R User Guide 5-15
Sync:
Click Sync to select the sync type.
⚫ All Lines: triggers on the first line found.
⚫ Line: triggers on the specified line.
When this sync type is selected, you can specify a line number. Click Line, then
use the pop-up numeric keypad or scroll with the mouse to modify the line
number. The range of the line number is related to the currently selected video
standards. The range is from 1 to 525 (NTSC), 1 to 625 (PAL/SECAM), 1 to 525
(480p), 1 to 625 (576p), 1 to 750 (720p), and 1 to 1125 (1080p/1080i).
⚫ Odd: triggers on the rising edge of the first ramp pulse in the odd field. It is only
available when the video standard is set to "NTSC", "PAL/SECAM", or "1080i".
⚫ Even: triggers on the rising edge of the first ramp pulse in the even field. It is
only available when the video standard is set to "NTSC", "PAL/SECAM", or
"1080i".
Noise Rejection:
Set the trigger parameter (noise rejection) under this trigger type. For details, refer
to descriptions in "Noise Rejection".
Trigger Mode:
For details, refer to descriptions in "Trigger Mode".
Trigger Setting:
For details, refer to descriptions in "Noise Rejection".
Trigger Level:
For details, refer to descriptions in "Trigger Level".
Tip
⚫ For a better observation of the waveform details in the video signal, you can
set a larger memory depth first.
⚫ In the trigger debugging process of video signals, the frequency in different
part of the signal can be reflected by a different brightness, as RIGOL digital
oscilloscope provides the intensity graded color display function. Experienced
users can quickly judge the signal quality and discover abnormalities during
the debugging process.
RIGOL Chapter 5 To Trigger the Oscilloscope
5-16 DS8000-R User Guide
Pattern Trigger
Identifies a trigger condition by searching for a specified pattern. This pattern is a
logical "AND" combination of channels. Each channel can be set to H (high), L (low),
or X (don't care). A rising or falling edge (you can only specify a single edge) can be
specified for one channel included in the pattern. When an edge is specified, the
oscilloscope will trigger at the edge specified if the pattern set for the other channels
is true (namely the actual pattern of the channel is the same as the preset pattern).
If no edge is specified, the oscilloscope will trigger on the last edge that makes the
pattern true. If all the channels in the pattern are set to "X", the oscilloscope will not
trigger.
Figure 5-5 Pattern Trigger
Trigger Type:
Click Type to select "Pattern" as the trigger type. Then, the current trigger setting
information is displayed at the upper-right corner of the screen, as shown in the
figure below.
Source Selection:
Click Source to open the signal source list and select CH1-CH4. For details, refer to
descriptions in "Trigger Source". The current trigger source is displayed at the
upper-right corner of the screen.
Note: Only when we select the channel (that has been input with signals) as the
trigger source, can we obtain a stable trigger.
Pattern Setting:
Click Code to select the pattern of the currently selected channel. The available
patterns include the following five types:
⚫ H: sets the pattern of the channel selected to "1", i.g. the voltage level is higher
than the trigger level of the channel.
⚫ L: sets the pattern of the channel selected to "0", i.g. the voltage level is lower
than the trigger level of the channel.
⚫ X: sets the pattern of the channel selected to "X", i.g. this channel is not used as
a part of the pattern. When all channels in the pattern are set to "X", the
oscilloscope will not trigger.
⚫
Rising: sets the pattern to the rising edge ( ) of the channel selected.
Chapter 5 To Trigger the Oscilloscope RIGOL
DS8000-R User Guide 5-17
⚫ Falling: sets the pattern to the falling edge ( ) of the channel selected.
The corresponding pattern is displayed at the bottom of the screen. The patterns of
channels CH1-CH4 are presented from left to right, as shown in the figure below.
Click the above channel pattern. Then, a virtual keypad is displayed. For example,
click CH2 pattern, then the virtual keypad for setting the channel pattern is displayed,
as shown in Figure 5-6. Click the left arrow key or the right arrow key to
move the pattern bit. Then select a pattern bit. After the pattern of the current
channel is set completely, the cursor goes to the next pattern bit automatically. Set
them respectively. After all the pattern bits are set completely, click OK to confirm
the setting, and close the virtual keypad. You can also click ALL to apply the current
pattern to all the channels. This key functions the same as the All Bits menu key.
Figure 5-6 Virtual Keypad for Pattern Setting
Note: Only one edge (rising or falling edge) can be specified in the pattern. If one
edge item is currently defined and then another edge item is defined in another
channel in the pattern, then a prompt message "Invalid input" is displayed. Then the
latter defined edge item will be replaced by X.
All Bits:
Click All Bits to set the patterns of all channels to the currently selected pattern.
Trigger Mode:
For details, refer to descriptions in "Trigger Mode".
Trigger Parameter Setting:
Set the trigger parameters (trigger holdoff and noise rejection) under this trigger
type. For details, refer to descriptions in "Trigger Holdoff" and "Noise
Rejection".
Trigger Level:
Refer to "Trigger Level". The current trigger level value is displayed at the
upper-right corner of the screen.
Confirmation Key
All Bits
Move the cursor to
the left
Move the cursor to
the right
Pattern
RIGOL Chapter 5 To Trigger the Oscilloscope
5-18 DS8000-R User Guide
Duration Trigger
In duration trigger, the instrument identifies a trigger condition by searching for the
duration of a specified pattern. This pattern is a logical "AND" combination of the
channels. Each channel can be set to H (high), L (low), or X (don't care). When the
duration (△T) of this pattern meets the preset time, the oscilloscope initiates a
trigger, as shown in the figure below.
Figure 5-7 Duration Trigger
Trigger Type:
Click Type to select "Duration". Then, the current trigger setting information is
displayed at the upper-right corner of the screen, as shown in the figure below.
Source Selection:
Click Source to open the signal source list and select CH1-CH4. For details, refer to
descriptions in "Trigger Source". The current trigger source is displayed at the
upper-right corner of the screen.
Note: Only when we select the channel (that has been input with signals) as the
trigger source, can we obtain a stable trigger.
Pattern Setting:
Click Code to select the pattern of the currently selected channel. The corresponding
pattern is displayed at the bottom of the screen. The patterns of channels CH1-CH4
are presented from left to right, as shown in the figure below.
Chapter 5 To Trigger the Oscilloscope RIGOL
DS8000-R User Guide 5-19
⚫ H: sets the pattern of the channel selected to "H", i.g. the voltage level is higher
than the trigger level of the channel.
⚫ L: sets the pattern of the channel selected to "L", i.g. the voltage level is lower
than the trigger level of the channel.
⚫ X: sets the pattern of the channel selected to "X", i.g. this channel is not used as
a part of the pattern. When all channels in the pattern are set to "X", the
oscilloscope will not trigger.
Trigger Condition:
Click When to select the trigger condition.
⚫ >: triggers when the duration of the pattern is greater than the preset time.
Click Lower to set the lower limit of the duration of the pattern. Its range is
from 800 ps to 10 s.
⚫ <: triggers when the duration of the pattern is smaller than the preset time.
Click Upper to set the upper limit of the duration of the pattern. Its range is
from 800 ps to 10 s.
⚫ <>: triggers when the duration of the pattern is smaller than the upper limit of
the preset time and greater than the lower limit of the preset time. Click Upper
to set the upper limit of the duration of the pattern, and the range is from 801 ps
to 10 s. Click Lower to set the lower limit of the duration of the pattern, and the
range is from 800 ps to 9.9 s.
⚫ ><: triggers when the duration of the pattern is greater than the upper limit of
the preset time or smaller than the lower limit of the preset time. Click Upper to
set the upper limit of the duration of the pattern, and the range is from 801 ps to
10 s. Click Lower to set the lower limit of the duration of the pattern, and the
range is from 800 ps to 9.9 s.
Note: The lower time limit must be smaller than the upper time limit.
All Bits:
Click All Bits to set the pattern of all trigger sources to the pattern setting selected
currently.
Trigger Mode:
For details, refer to descriptions in "Trigger Mode".
Trigger Parameter Setting:
For details, refer to descriptions in "Trigger Holdoff" and "Noise Rejection".
Trigger Level:
Refer to "Trigger Level". The current trigger level value is displayed at the
upper-right corner of the screen.
RIGOL Chapter 5 To Trigger the Oscilloscope
5-20 DS8000-R User Guide
Timeout Trigger
In Timeout trigger, the oscilloscope triggers when the time interval (△T) (the time
from when the rising edge (or falling edge) of the input signal passes through the
trigger level to the time from when the neighboring falling edge (or rising edge)
passes through the trigger level) is greater than the preset timeout value, as shown
in the figure below.
Time Out
T
Time Out< T
Figure 5-8 Timeout Trigger
Trigger Type:
Click Type to select "Timeout". Then, the current trigger setting information is
displayed at the upper-right corner of the screen, as shown in the figure below.
Source Selection:
Click Source to open the signal source list and select CH1-CH4. For details, refer to
descriptions in "Trigger Source". The current trigger source is displayed at the
upper-right corner of the screen.
Note: Only when we select the channel (that has been input with signals) as the
trigger source, can we obtain a stable trigger.
Edge Type:
Click Slope to select the edge type of the input signal that starts to pass through the
trigger level.
⚫
Rising: starts timing when the rising edge of the input signal passes through
the trigger level.
⚫
Falling: starts timing when the falling edge of the input signal passes
through the trigger level.
⚫
Either: starts timing when either edge of the input signal passes through the
trigger level.
Timeout Value:
Timeout value represents the maximum time that the signal remains idle before the
signal passes through the trigger level. Click Timeout and use the pop-up numeric
Chapter 5 To Trigger the Oscilloscope RIGOL
DS8000-R User Guide 5-21
keypad or scroll with the mouse to set the timeout value of Timeout trigger. The
available range is from 16 ns to 10 s.
Trigger Mode:
For details, refer to descriptions in "Trigger Mode".
Trigger Parameter Setting:
For details, refer to descriptions in "Noise Rejection".
Trigger Level:
Refer to "Trigger Level". The current trigger level value is displayed at the
upper-right corner of the screen.
RIGOL Chapter 5 To Trigger the Oscilloscope
5-22 DS8000-R User Guide
Runt Trigger
This trigger mode is used to trigger pulses that pass through one trigger level but fail
to pass through another trigger level, as shown in the figure below.
Figure 5-9 Runt Trigger
Trigger Type:
Click Type to select "Runt". Then, the current trigger setting information is displayed
at the upper-right corner of the screen, as shown in the figure below.
Source Selection:
Click Source to switch the trigger source and select CH1-CH4. For details, refer to
descriptions in "Trigger Source". The current trigger source is displayed at the
upper-right corner of the screen.
Note: Only when we select the channel (that has been input with signals) as the
trigger source, can we obtain a stable trigger.
Polarity:
Click Polarity continuously to select the pulse polarity of Runt trigger.
⚫
Positive: triggers on the positive runt pulse.
⚫
Negative: triggers on the negative runt pulse.
Trigger Condition:
Click When to set the trigger conditions of Runt trigger.
⚫ None: indicates not setting the trigger condition of Runt trigger.
⚫ >: triggers when the runt pulse width is greater than the lower limit of pulse
width. Click Lower to set the minimum pulse width of Runt trigger.
⚫ <: triggers when the runt pulse width is smaller than the upper limit of pulse
width. Click Upper to set the maximum pulse width of Runt trigger.
⚫ <>: triggers when the runt pulse width is greater than the lower limit and
smaller than the upper limit of pulse width. Click Upper to set the maximum
pulse width of Runt trigger. Click Lower to set the minimum pulse width of Runt
trigger.
Lower Limit of
the Trigger Level
Upper Limit of the
Trigger Level
Negative Runt Pulse
Positive Runt Pulse
Chapter 5 To Trigger the Oscilloscope RIGOL
DS8000-R User Guide 5-23
Note: The lower limit of the pulse width must be smaller than the upper limit.
Level Selection and Adjustment of Trigger Level:
After the trigger condition setting is completed, you need to adjust the trigger level
to correctly trigger the signal and obtain a stable waveform. Click Level Select
(when "<>" is selected as the trigger condition, Level Select is a sub-menu under
More) to select the desired level type for adjustment.
Level A: only adjusts the upper limit of the trigger level, and the lower limit of the
trigger level remains unchanged.
Level B: only adjusts the lower limit of the trigger level, and the upper limit of the
trigger level remains unchanged.
Level AB: adjusts the upper and lower limits of the trigger level at the same time, and
the trigger level deviation (the difference between the upper limit and lower limit of
the trigger level) remains unchanged.
Click on the trigger level setting label
at the upper-right corner of the
screen. Then a "Trigger Setting" window is displayed. In the Level field, input a
value with the pop-up numeric keypad. You can also use the Up and Down arrow at
the right of the Level field to increase or decrease the trigger level. During the
adjustment of trigger level, two trigger level lines appear on the screen, and they
move up and down with the change of the trigger level. At the same time, the
real-time trigger level information is displayed at the lower-left corner of the screen
(as shown in the figure below, H indicates the upper limit of the trigger level, L
indicates the lower limit of the trigger level, and △ indicates the trigger level
deviation). When you stopping modifying the trigger level, the trigger level line and
the trigger level information at the lower-left corner of the screen disappear in about
2 s. The current trigger level deviation is displayed at the upper-right corner of the
screen.
Trigger Mode:
For details, refer to descriptions in "Trigger Mode".
Trigger Parameter Setting:
Set the trigger parameters (trigger holdoff and noise rejection) under this trigger
type. For details, refer to descriptions in "Trigger Holdoff" and "Noise
Rejection".
RIGOL Chapter 5 To Trigger the Oscilloscope
5-24 DS8000-R User Guide
Window Trigger
Window trigger provides a high trigger level and a low trigger level. The instrument
triggers when the input signal passes through the high trigger level or the low trigger
level.
Trigger Type:
Click Type to select "Window". Then, the current trigger setting information is
displayed at the upper-right corner of the screen, as shown in the figure below.
Source Selection:
Click Source to switch the trigger source and select CH1-CH4. For details, refer to
descriptions in "Trigger Source". The current trigger source is displayed at the
upper-right corner of the screen.
Note: Only when we select the channel (that has been input with signals) as the
trigger source, can we obtain a stable trigger.
Edge Type:
Click Slope to select the input signal the edge on which the oscilloscope triggers.
⚫
Rising: triggers on the rising edge of the input signal when the voltage level
is higher than the preset high trigger level.
⚫
Falling: triggers on the falling edge of the input signal when the voltage level
is lower than the preset low trigger level.
⚫
Either: triggers on the rising or falling edge of the input signal when the
voltage level meets the preset trigger level.
Trigger Position:
After selecting the window type, click Position to select the trigger position so as to
further specify the time point of trigger.
⚫ Enter: triggers when the input signal enters the specified trigger level range.
⚫ Exit: triggers when the input signal exits the specified trigger level range.
⚫ Time: triggers when the accumulated hold time since the input signal entered
the specified trigger level range is equal to the window time. When this type is
selected, click Time to set the window time. You can also use the numeric
keypad or scroll with the mouse to set it. Its available range is from 8 ns to 10 s.
Level Selection and Adjustment of Trigger Level:
After the trigger condition setting is completed, you need to adjust the trigger level
to correctly trigger the signal and obtain a stable waveform. Click Level Select to
select the desired level type for adjustment.
⚫ Level A: only adjusts the upper limit of the trigger level, and the lower limit of
the trigger level remains unchanged.
⚫ Level B: only adjusts the lower limit of the trigger level, and the upper limit of
Chapter 5 To Trigger the Oscilloscope RIGOL
DS8000-R User Guide 5-25
the trigger level remains unchanged.
⚫ Level AB: adjusts the upper and lower limits of the trigger level at the same time,
and the trigger level deviation (the difference between the upper limit and lower
limit of the trigger level) remains unchanged.
Click on the trigger level setting label at the upper-right corner of the
screen. Then a "Trigger Setting" window is displayed. In the Level field, input a
value with the pop-up numeric keypad. You can also use the Up and Down arrow at
the right of the Level field to increase or decrease the trigger level. During the
adjustment of trigger level, two trigger level lines appear on the screen, and they
move up and down with the change of the trigger level. At the same time, the
real-time trigger level and slope information is displayed at the lower-left corner of
the screen (as shown in the figure below, H indicates the upper limit of the trigger
level, L indicates the lower limit of the trigger level, and △ indicates the trigger level
deviation). When you stopping modifying the trigger level, the trigger level line and
the trigger level information at the lower-left corner of the screen disappear in about
2 s. The current trigger level deviation is displayed at the upper-right corner of the
screen.
Trigger Mode:
For details, refer to descriptions in "Trigger Mode".
Trigger Parameter Setting:
Set the trigger parameters (trigger holdoff and noise rejection) under this trigger
type. For details, refer to descriptions in "Trigger Holdoff" and "Noise
Rejection".
RIGOL Chapter 5 To Trigger the Oscilloscope
5-26 DS8000-R User Guide
Delay Trigger
In Delay trigger, you need to set Source A and Source B. The oscilloscope triggers
when the time difference (△T) between the specified edges of Source A (Edge A) and
Source B (Edge B) meets the preset time limit, as shown in the figure below.
Note: Edge A and Edge B must be two neighboring edges.
T
Source A
Source B
Edge A=
Edge B=
Figure 5-10 Delay Trigger
Trigger Type:
Click Type to select "Delay". Then, the current trigger setting information is
displayed at the upper-right corner of the screen, as shown in the figure below.
Source A:
Click SourceA to select CH1-CH4 as the trigger source of Source A. For details,
please refer to descriptions in "Trigger Source". The current trigger source is
displayed at the upper-right corner of the screen.
Note: Only when we select the channel (that has been input with signals) as the
trigger source, can we obtain a stable trigger.
Edge A:
Click EdgeA continuously to select the trigger edge type of Source A in Delay trigger.
It can be set to "Rising"
or "Falling" .
Source B:
Click SourceB to select CH1-CH4 as the trigger source of Source B. For details, refer
to descriptions in "Trigger Source". The current trigger source is displayed at the
upper-right corner of the screen.
Note: Only when we select the channel (that has been input with signals) as the
trigger source, can we obtain a stable trigger.
Edge B:
Click EdgeB continuously to select the trigger edge type of Source B in Delay trigger.
Chapter 5 To Trigger the Oscilloscope RIGOL
DS8000-R User Guide 5-27
It can be set to "Rising" or "Falling" .
Trigger Condition:
Click When to set the time limit condition of Delay trigger.
⚫ >: triggers when the time difference (△T) between the specified edges of
Source A and Source B is greater than the preset time lower limit. Click Lower
to set the delay time lower limit in Delay trigger.
⚫ <: triggers when the time difference (△T) between the specified edges of
Source A and Source B is smaller than the preset time upper limit. Click Upper
to set the delay time upper limit in Delay trigger.
⚫ <>: triggers when the time difference (△T) between the specified edges of
Source A and Source B is greater than the lower limit of the preset time and
smaller than the upper limit of the preset time. Click Upper to set the delay time
upper limit in Delay trigger. Click Lower to set the delay time lower limit in Delay
trigger.
Note: The lower time limit must be smaller than the upper time limit.
⚫ ><: triggers when the time difference (△T) between the specified edges of
Source A and Source B is smaller than the lower limit of the preset time or
greater than the upper limit of the preset time. Click Upper to set the delay time
upper limit in Delay trigger. Click Lower to set the delay time lower limit in Delay
trigger.
Note: The lower time limit must be smaller than the upper time limit.
Trigger Mode:
For details, refer to descriptions in "Trigger Mode".
Trigger Parameter Setting:
Set the trigger parameters (trigger holdoff and noise rejection) under this trigger
type. For details, refer to descriptions in "Trigger Holdoff" and "Noise
Rejection".
Trigger Level:
Refer to "Trigger Level". The current trigger level value is displayed at the
upper-right corner of the screen.
RIGOL Chapter 5 To Trigger the Oscilloscope
5-28 DS8000-R User Guide
Setup/Hold Trigger
In Setup/Hold trigger, you need to set the clock source and data source. The setup
time starts when the data signal passes the trigger level and ends at the coming of
the specified clock edge; the hold time starts at the coming of the specified clock
edge and ends when the data signal crosses the trigger level again, as shown in the
figure below. The oscilloscope triggers when the setup time or hold time is smaller
than the preset time.
T1
T2
Data Source
Clock Source
T2
T1
is the setup time
is the hold time
The edge type is
The data type is H
Figure 5-11 Setup/Hold Trigger
Trigger Type:
Click Type to select "Setup/Hold". Then, the current trigger setting information is
displayed at the upper-right corner of the screen, as shown in the figure below.
Clock Source:
Click SCL to set the signal source of the clock line. It can be set to CH1-CH4. For
details, refer to descriptions in "Trigger Source". The current clock source (trigger
source) is displayed at the upper-right corner of the screen.
Note: Only when we select the channel (that has been input with signals) as the
clock source, can we obtain a stable trigger.
Edge Type:
Click Slope continuously to select the desired clock edge type, and it can be set to
"Rising"
or "Falling" .
Data Source:
Click SDA to set the signal source of the data line. It can be set to CH1-CH4. For
details, refer to descriptions in "Trigger Source". The current data source (trigger
source) is displayed at the upper-right corner of the screen.
Note: Only when we select the channel (that has been input with signals) as the
trigger source, can we obtain a stable trigger.
Chapter 5 To Trigger the Oscilloscope RIGOL
DS8000-R User Guide 5-29
Data Type:
Click Data Type continuously to set the effective pattern of the data signal. It can
be set to H (high level) or L (low level).
Trigger Condition:
Click When to select the trigger condition of Setup/Hold trigger.
⚫ Setup: the oscilloscope triggers when the setup time is smaller than the
specified setup time. After selecting this type, click More → Setup to set the
setup time. You can use the pop-up numeric keypad or scroll with the mouse to
set it.
⚫ Hold: the oscilloscope triggers when the hold time is smaller than the specified
hold time. After selecting this type, click More → Hold to set the hold time. You
can use the pop-up numeric keypad or scroll with the mouse to set it.
⚫ Setup/Hold: the oscilloscope triggers when the setup time or the hold time is
smaller than the specified time value. After selecting this type, click More →
Setup and More → Hold to set the setup time and hold time respectively. You
can use the pop-up numeric keypad or scroll with the mouse to set them.
Trigger Mode:
For details, refer to descriptions in "Trigger Mode".
Trigger Parameter Setting:
Set the trigger parameter (noise rejection) under this trigger type. For details, refer
to descriptions in "Noise Rejection".
Trigger Level:
Refer to "Trigger Level". The current trigger level value is displayed at the
upper-right corner of the screen.
RIGOL Chapter 5 To Trigger the Oscilloscope
5-30 DS8000-R User Guide
Nth Edge Trigger
Triggers on the Nth edge that appears after the specified idle time. For example, in
the waveform shown in the figure below, the instrument should trigger on the
second rising edge after the specified idle time (the time between two neighboring
rising edges), and the idle time should be within the range between P and M (P<Idle
Time<M). Wherein, M is the time between the first rising edge and its previous rising
edge; P is the maximum time between the rising edges that participate in counting.
M
P<Idle Time<M
Edge Type=
Edge Num=2
P
Figure 5-12 Nth Edge Trigger
Trigger Type:
Click Type to select "Nth Edge". Then, the current trigger setting information is
displayed at the upper-right corner of the screen, as shown in the figure below.
Source Selection:
Click Source to open the signal source list and select CH1-CH4. For details, refer to
descriptions in "Trigger Source". The current trigger source is displayed at the
upper-right corner of the screen.
Note: Only when we select the channel (that has been input with signals) as the
trigger source, can we obtain a stable trigger.
Edge Type:
Click Slope continuously to select the input signal edge on which the oscilloscope
triggers.
⚫
Rising: triggers on the rising edge of the input signal when the voltage level
meets the specified trigger level.
⚫
Falling: triggers on the falling edge of the input signal when the voltage level
meets the specified trigger level.
Idle Time:
Click Idle Time to set the idle time before the edge counting in Nth edge trigger. Use
the pop-up numeric keypad or scroll with the mouse to set the idle time.
Chapter 5 To Trigger the Oscilloscope RIGOL
DS8000-R User Guide 5-31
Edge Count:
Click Edges to set the value of "N" in Nth edge trigger. Use the pop-up numeric
keypad or scroll with the mouse to set the edge count. Its available range is from 1 to
65535.
Trigger Mode:
For details, refer to descriptions in "Trigger Mode".
Trigger Parameter Setting:
Set the trigger parameter (noise rejection) under this trigger type. For details, refer
to descriptions in "Noise Rejection".
Trigger Level:
Refer to "Trigger Level". The current trigger level value is displayed at the
upper-right corner of the screen.
RIGOL Chapter 5 To Trigger the Oscilloscope
5-32 DS8000-R User Guide
RS232 Trigger (Option)
RS232 bus is a serial communication mode used in data transmission between PCs or
between a PC and a terminal. In RS232 serial protocol, a character is transmitted as
a frame of data. The frame consists of 1 start bit, 5-8 data bits, 1 check bit, and 1-2
stop bits. Its format is as shown in the figure below. DS8000-R series oscilloscope
triggers when the start frame, error frame, check error, or the specified data of the
RS232 signal is detected.
Figure 5-13 Schematic Diagram of RS232 Protocol
Trigger Type:
Click Type to select "RS232". Then, the current trigger setting information is
displayed at the upper-right corner of the screen, as shown in the figure below.
Source:
Click Source to open the signal source list and select CH1-CH4. For details, refer to
descriptions in "Trigger Source". The current trigger source is displayed at the
upper-right corner of the screen.
Note: Only when we select the channel (that has been input with signals) as the
trigger source, can we obtain a stable trigger.
Trigger Condition:
Click When to select the desired trigger condition.
⚫ Start: triggers on the start frame position.
⚫ Error: triggers when an error frame is detected.
⚫ Check Error: triggers when a check error is detected.
⚫ Data: triggers on the last bit of the preset data bits. Click Data, then use the
numeric keypad or scroll with the mouse to set the data of RS232 trigger.
Data Bits:
Indicate the number of bits per frame. Click More → Data Bits to select the desired
data bits. The available data bits include "5 Bits", "6 Bits", "7 Bits", and "8 Bits".
Stop Bit:
Indicate when to stop outputting. Click More → Stop Bit to select the desired stop
bit. The available stop bit include "1 Bit", "1.5 Bits", and "2 Bits".
Start Bit
Data Bits
Check Bit
Stop Bit
Chapter 5 To Trigger the Oscilloscope RIGOL
DS8000-R User Guide 5-33
Parity:
Used to verify whether data are properly transmitted. Click More → Parity to select
the desired parity. The available parity include "None", "Even", and "Odd".
Polarity:
Click Polarity continuously to select the polarity of data transmission. It can be set
to "Pos"
or "Neg" .
Baud Rate:
Set the baud rate of data transmission (i.g. specifies a clock frequency). The
following setting methods are available for baud rate:
⚫ Click Baud Rate, then set the user-defined baud rate with the displayed
numeric keypad or by scrolling with the mouse.
⚫ Click Baud Rate, then select the preset baud rate from the available options.
The available baud rates include 50 bps, 75 bps, 110 bps, 134 bps, 150 bps, 300
bps, and etc.
Trigger Mode:
For details, refer to descriptions in "Trigger Mode".
Trigger Parameter Setting:
For details, refer to descriptions in "Noise Rejection".
Trigger Level:
Refer to "Trigger Level". The current trigger level value is displayed at the
upper-right corner of the screen.
RIGOL Chapter 5 To Trigger the Oscilloscope
5-34 DS8000-R User Guide
I2C Trigger (Option)
I2C is a 2-wire serial bus used to connect the microcontroller and its peripheral
device. It is a bus standard widely used in the microelectronic communication control
field.
The I2C serial bus consists of SCL and SDA. Its transmission rate is determined by
SCL, and its transmission data is determined by SDA, as shown in the figure below.
DS8000-R triggers on the start condition, restart, stop, missing acknowledgment,
specific device address, or data value. Besides, it can also trigger on the specific
device address and data values at the same time.
Figure 5-14 Schematic Diagram of I2C Protocol
Trigger Type:
Click Type to select "I2C". Then, the current trigger setting information is displayed
at the upper-right corner of the screen, as shown in the figure below.
Source Selection:
Click SCL and SDA to specify the signal sources of SCL and SDA respectively. They
can be set to CH1-CH4. For details, refer to descriptions in "Trigger Source". The
current trigger source is displayed at the upper-right corner of the screen.
Note: Only when we select the channel (that has been input with signals) as the
trigger source, can we obtain a stable trigger.
Trigger Condition:
Click When to select the desired trigger condition.
⚫ Start: triggers when SDA data transitions from high level to low level while SCL is
high level.
⚫ Stop: triggers when SDA data transitions from low level to high level while SCL is
high level.
⚫ Restart: triggers when another start condition occurs before a stop condition.
⚫ MissedAck: triggers when the SDA data is high level during any acknowledgment
Chapter 5 To Trigger the Oscilloscope RIGOL
DS8000-R User Guide 5-35
of SCL clock position.
⚫ Address: the trigger searches for the specified address value. When this event
occurs, the oscilloscope will trigger on the read/write bit. After this trigger
condition is selected:
➢ Click AddrBits to select the desired address bits. The available address bits
are "7 Bits", "8 Bits", and "10 Bits".
➢ Click Address, then use the numeric keypad or scroll with the mouse to set
the address of I2C trigger.
➢ Click More → Direction to select "Write", "Read", or "R/W".
Note: This setting is not available when AddrBits is set to "8 Bits".
⚫ Data: the trigger searches for the specified data value on the data line (SDA).
When this event occurs, the oscilloscope will trigger on the clock line (SCL)
transition edge of the last bit of data. After this trigger condition is selected:
➢ Click Bit X, then scroll with the mouse to select data bit that needs to be
operated on. Then set the current bit. As shown in the figure below, the left
is its binary format, and the right is its corresponding Hex format.
Then set it with the pop-up virtual keypad. For setting methods, refer to
descriptions in "Pattern Trigger". If you modify the binary data bit, a
virtual keypad as shown in Figure 5-15 (a) is displayed. If you modify the
hex data bit, a virtual keypad as shown in Figure 5-15 (b) is displayed.
(a) Virtual Keypad for Binary Data Bit (b) Virtual Keypad for Hex Data Bit
Figure 5-15 Virtual Keypad for Data Bit Settings
➢ Click Bytes, then use the pop-up numeric keypad or scroll with the mouse
to set the length of the data. Its range is from 1 to 5.
➢ Click More → Addr Bits to select the desired address bits. The available
address bits are "7 Bits", "8 Bits", and "10 Bits".
⚫ A & D: the oscilloscope searches for the specified address and data at the same
time, then triggers when both the address and data meet the conditions. After
this trigger condition is selected, you need to set Bit X, Bytes, Addr Bits,
Address, and Direction menu items. For setting methods, refer to descriptions
RIGOL Chapter 5 To Trigger the Oscilloscope
5-36 DS8000-R User Guide
in "Address" and "Data" trigger conditions.
Trigger Mode:
For details, refer to descriptions in "Trigger Mode".
Trigger Parameter Setting:
Set the trigger parameter (noise rejection) under this trigger type. For details, refer
to descriptions in "Noise Rejection".
Trigger Level:
Refer to "Trigger Level". The current trigger level value is displayed at the
upper-right corner of the screen.
Chapter 5 To Trigger the Oscilloscope RIGOL
DS8000-R User Guide 5-37
SPI Trigger (Option)
In SPI trigger, after the CS or timeout condition is satisfied, the oscilloscope triggers
when the specified data is found. When using SPI trigger, you need to specify the
SCL clock sources and SDA data sources. Below is the sequential chart of SPI bus.
SDA
SCL
CS
D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0
Figure 5-16 Sequential Chart of SPI Bus
Trigger Type:
Click Type to select "SPI". Then, the current trigger setting information is displayed
at the upper-right corner of the screen, as shown in the figure below.
Source Selection:
Click CLK and MISO to specify the sources of SCL and SDA respectively. They can be
set to CH1-CH4. For details, refer to descriptions in "Trigger Source". The current
trigger source is displayed at the upper-right corner of the screen.
Note: Only when we select the channel (that has been input with signals) as the
trigger source, can we obtain a stable trigger.
Edge Type:
Click Slope continuously to select the desired clock edge type.
⚫
Rising: samples the SDA data on the rising edge of the clock.
⚫ Falling: samples the SDA data on the falling edge of the clock.
Trigger Condition:
Click When continuously to select the desired trigger condition.
⚫ Timeout: the oscilloscope starts to search for the data (SCL) on which to trigger
after the clock signal (SDA) stays in the idle state for a specified period of time.
After selecting this condition, you can click Timeout, then use the pop-up
numeric keypad or scroll with the mouse to set the idle time. The range is from
8 ns to 10 s.
⚫ With CS: if the CS signal is valid, the oscilloscope will trigger when the data (SDA)
RIGOL Chapter 5 To Trigger the Oscilloscope
5-38 DS8000-R User Guide
satisfying the trigger conditions is found.
➢ Click CS to select the chip selection signal line. The available channels are
CH1-CH4. For details, refer to descriptions in "Trigger Source". The
current trigger source is displayed at the upper-right corner of the screen.
➢ Click More → CS Mode to set the current CS mode to "Pos " (high
level is valid) or "Neg
" (low level is valid).
Current Bit:
Click More → Bit X to set the data bit that needs to be operated on. For setting
methods, refer to descriptions in "I2C Trigger (Option)".
Data Bits:
Click More → DataBits, then use the pop-up numeric keypad or scroll with the
mouse to set the number of bits in the serial data string. The number of bits in the
string can be set to any integer ranging from 4 and 32.
Trigger Mode:
For details, refer to descriptions in "Trigger Mode".
Trigger Parameter Setting:
Set the trigger parameter (noise rejection) under this trigger type. For details, refer
to descriptions in "Noise Rejection".
Trigger Level:
Refer to "Trigger Level". The current trigger level value is displayed at the
upper-right corner of the screen.
Chapter 5 To Trigger the Oscilloscope RIGOL
DS8000-R User Guide 5-39
CAN Trigger (Option)
DS8000-R can trigger on the start of a frame, end of a frame, frame of the specified
type (e.g. Remote, Overload, Data, etc.), or error frame of the specified type (e.g.
Answer Error, Check Error, Format Error, etc.) of the CAN signal.
The data frame format of the CAN bus is as shown in the figure below.
Figure 5-17 Data Frame Format of the CAN Bus
Trigger Type:
Click Type to select "CAN". Then, the current trigger setting information is displayed
at the upper-right corner of the screen, as shown in the figure below.
Source Selection:
Click Source to open the signal source list and select CH1-CH4. For details, refer to
descriptions in "Trigger Source". The current trigger source is displayed at the
upper-right corner of the screen.
Note: Only when we select the channel (that has been input with signals) as the
trigger source, can we obtain a stable trigger.
Trigger Condition:
Click When to select the desired trigger condition.
⚫ SOF: triggers at the start of a frame.
⚫ EOF: triggers at the end of a frame.
⚫ Remote ID: triggers on the remote frame with the specified ID. Set the following
parameters:
➢ Click Extended ID to enable or disable the extended ID.
➢ Click Bit X to set the data bit that needs to be operated on. For setting
methods, refer to descriptions in "I2C Trigger (Option)".
⚫ Overload: triggers on the CAN overload frames.
⚫ Frame ID: triggers on the data frames with the specified ID. Set the following
parameters:
➢ Click Extended ID to enable or disable the extended ID.
➢ Click Bit X to set the data bit that needs to be operated on. For setting
methods, refer to descriptions in "I2C Trigger (Option)".
⚫ Frame Data: triggers on the data frames with specified data. Set the following
RIGOL Chapter 5 To Trigger the Oscilloscope
5-40 DS8000-R User Guide
parameters:
➢ Click Bit X to set the data bit that needs to be operated on. For setting
methods, refer to descriptions in "I2C Trigger (Option)".
➢ Click Bytes, then use the numeric keypad or scroll with the mouse to set
the length of the data. Its range is from 1 to 8.
⚫ Data&ID: triggers on the data frames with the specified ID and data. Set the
following parameters:
➢ Click Define to select "Data" or "ID".
➢ When you select "Data", set Bit X and Bytes. For detailed settings, refer to
parameter settings for "Frame Data".
➢ When you select "ID", set Extended ID and Bit X. For detailed settings,
refer to parameter settings for "Frame ID".
⚫ Frame Error: triggers on the error frame.
⚫ Bit Fill: triggers on the error frame with the bit fill.
⚫ Answer Error: triggers on the answer error frame.
⚫ Check Error: triggers on the check error frame.
⚫ Format Error: triggers on the format error frame.
⚫ Random Error: triggers on random error frame, such as the format error frame,
answer error frame, etc.
Signal Type:
Click More → Signal Type to select the desired signal type.
⚫ CAN_H: indicates the actual CAN_H bus signal.
⚫ CAN_L: indicates the actual CAN_L bus signal.
⚫ TX/RX: indicates the Transmit signal and Receive signal from the CAN bus
transceiver.
⚫ DIFF: The CAN differential bus signals connected to an analog source channel by
using a differential probe. Connect the probe's positive lead to the CAN_H bus
signal and connect the negative lead to the CAN_L bus signal.
Baud Rate:
Click More → Baud to set the baud rate. The following setting methods are
available for baud rate:
⚫ Click Baud, then set the user-defined baud rate with the displayed numeric
keypad or by scrolling with the mouse.
⚫ Click Baud, then select the preset baud rate from the available options. The
available baud rates include 10 kbps, 20 kbps, 33.3 kbps, 50 kbps, 62.5 kbps,
83.3 kbps, and etc.
Sample Position:
Sample position is a point within a bit’s time. The oscilloscope samples the bit level at
this point. The sample position is represented by the proportion of "the time from the
start of the bit to the sample position" to the "bit time", as shown in the figure below.
Chapter 5 To Trigger the Oscilloscope RIGOL
DS8000-R User Guide 5-41
Figure 5-18 Sample Position
Click More → Sample Position, then use the pop-up numeric keypad or scroll with
the mouse to set the sample position. The settable range is from 10% to 90%.
Trigger Mode:
For details, refer to descriptions in "Trigger Mode".
Trigger Parameter Setting:
Set the trigger parameter (noise rejection) under this trigger type. For details, refer
to descriptions in "Noise Rejection".
Trigger Level:
Refer to "Trigger Level". The current trigger level value is displayed at the
upper-right corner of the screen.
One Bit
60%
70%
80%
RIGOL Chapter 5 To Trigger the Oscilloscope
5-42 DS8000-R User Guide
FlexRay Trigger (Option)
DS8000-R can trigger on the specified frame, symbol, error, or position of the
FlexRay bus.
FlexRay is a type of differential serial bus configured with three consecutive
segments (i.g. header, payload, and trailer). Its data transmission rate is up to 10
Mb/s. Each frame contains a static segment and a dynamic segment, and ends with
the bus idle time.
Its format is as shown in the figure below.
Figure 5-19 Frame Format of FlexRay Bus
Trigger Type:
Click Type to select "FlexRay". Then, the current trigger setting information is
displayed at the upper-right corner of the screen, as shown in the figure below.
Source Selection:
Click Source to open the signal source list and select CH1-CH4. For details, refer to
descriptions in "Trigger Source". The current trigger source is displayed at the
upper-right corner of the screen.
Note: Only when we select the channel (that has been input with signals) as the
trigger source, can we obtain a stable trigger.
Baud Rate:
Click Baud to select a FlexRay baud rate that matches the FlexRay bus signal. The
available baud rates are 2.5 Mbps, 5 Mbps, and 10 Mbps.
Trigger Condition:
Click When to select the desired trigger condition.
⚫ Post: triggers on the specified position of the FlexRay bus. Click Post to select
"TSS End", "FSS_BSS End", "FES End", or "DTS End".
Chapter 5 To Trigger the Oscilloscope RIGOL
DS8000-R User Guide 5-43
⚫ Frame: triggers on the frame of FlexRay bus.
➢ Click Frame to select the frame type. The types of frames include null, Sync,
Start, and All.
➢ Click More → Define to select "ID" or "Cyc Count".
When you select "ID", set the following parameters: ID Comp, ID Min, and
ID Max. Click More → ID Comp to select the comparison conditions. The
available choices include =, ≠, >, <, ><, <>. Click More → ID Max or
click More → ID Min, then use the pop-up numeric keypad or scroll with
the mouse to set the frame ID.
When you select "Cyc Count", set the following parameters: Cyc Comp,
Count Min, and Count Max. Click More → Cyc Comp to select the
comparison conditions. The available choices include =, ≠, >, <, ><, <>.
Click More → Count Max or click More → Count Min, then use the
pop-up numeric keypad or scroll with the mouse to set the cycle count.
⚫ Symbol: triggers on the CAS/MTS (Collision Avoidance Symbol/Media Access
Test Symbol) and WUS (Wake Up Symbol) of FlexRay bus.
➢ Click Symbol to select the symbol type. The symbol type includes CAS/MTS
and WUS.
➢ Click More → ID Comp to select the comparison conditions. The available
choices include =, ≠, >, <, ><, <>. Click More → ID Max or click More
→ ID Min, then use the pop-up numeric keypad or scroll with the mouse to
set the frame ID.
⚫ Error: triggers when an error occurs to the FlexRay bus.
Click Error to select the error type. It includes Head CRC Err, Tail CRC Err,
Decode Err, and Random Err.
Note: As the occurrence possibility of specified FlaxRay frame is very low, it is
recommended that you set the oscilloscope to "Normal" trigger mode when the
trigger condition is set to "Frame", so as to prevent the instrument from triggering
automatically while waiting for the specified frame. The same goes for "Error" trigger
condition. In addition, when multiple FlexRay errors occur at the same time, you
need to adjust the trigger holdoff so as to view the specific error.
Trigger Mode:
For details, refer to descriptions in "Trigger Mode".
Trigger Parameter Setting:
Set the trigger parameter (noise rejection) under this trigger type. For details, refer
to descriptions in "Noise Rejection".
Trigger Level:
Refer to "Trigger Level". The current trigger level value is displayed at the
upper-right corner of the screen.
RIGOL Chapter 5 To Trigger the Oscilloscope
5-44 DS8000-R User Guide
LIN Trigger (Option)
DS8000-R can trigger on the sync field of LIN signal, and can also trigger on the
specified identifier, data, or frame.
The data frame format of the LIN bus is as shown in the figure below.
Figure 5-20 Data Frame Format of the LIN Bus
Trigger Type:
Click Type to select "LIN". Then, the current trigger setting information is displayed
at the upper-right corner of the screen, as shown in the figure below.
Source Selection:
Click Source to open the signal source list and select CH1-CH4. For details, refer to
descriptions in "Trigger Source". The current trigger source is displayed at the
upper-right corner of the screen.
Note: Only when we select the channel (that has been input with signals) as the
trigger source, can we obtain a stable trigger.
Trigger Condition:
Click When to select the desired trigger condition.
⚫ Sync: triggers on the last bit of the sync field.
⚫ ID: triggers when the frame with an ID equal to the selected value is detected.
Click ID, then use the pop-up numeric keypad or scroll with the mouse to set ID.
⚫ Data: triggers when the data that meet the preset conditions are found.
➢ Click Bit X to set the data bit that needs to be operated on. For setting
methods, refer to descriptions in "I2C Trigger (Option)".
➢ Click Bytes, then use the pop-up numeric keypad or scroll with the mouse
to set the length of the data. Its range is from 1 to 8.
⚫ Data&ID: triggers when a frame with a specified ID and data that meet the
preset conditions are both found.
➢ Click Bit X to set the data bit that needs to be operated on. For setting
methods, refer to descriptions in "I2C Trigger (Option)".
➢ Click Bytes, then use the pop-up numeric keypad or scroll with the mouse
to set the length of the data. Its range is from 1 to 8.
➢ Click ID, then use the pop-up numeric keypad or scroll with the mouse to
set ID.
⚫ Sleep: triggers when the sleep frame is found.
⚫ Wakeup: triggers when the wakeup frame is found.
⚫ Error: triggers on the specified type of error frame. Click Error Type and select
Chapter 5 To Trigger the Oscilloscope RIGOL
DS8000-R User Guide 5-45
the desired error type: Sync, Even Odd, or Check Sum.
Protocol Version:
Click More → Version to select the protocol version that matches the signal under
test. The available versions include 1.X, 2.X, and Both.
Baud Rate:
Click More → Baud to set the baud rate. The setting methods are available for baud
rate:
⚫ Click Baud, then set the user-defined baud rate with the displayed numeric
keypad or by scrolling with the mouse.
⚫ Click Baud to select the preset baud rate from the available options. The
available baud rates include 1.2 kbps, 2.4 kbps, 4.8 kbps, 9.6 kbps, 19.2 kbps,
and etc.
Sample Position:
Sample position is a point within a bit’s time. The oscilloscope samples the bit level at
this point. The sample position is represented by the proportion of "the time from the
start of the bit to the sample position" to the "bit time", as shown in the figure below.
Figure 5-21 Sample Position
Click More → Sample Position, then use the pop-up numeric keypad or scroll with
the mouse to set the sample position. The settable range is from 10% to 90%.
Trigger Mode:
For details, refer to descriptions in "Trigger Mode".
Trigger Parameter Setting:
Set the trigger parameter (noise rejection) under this trigger type. For details, refer
to descriptions in "Noise Rejection".
Trigger Level:
Refer to "Trigger Level". The current trigger level value is displayed at the
upper-right corner of the screen.
One Bit
60%
70%
80%
RIGOL Chapter 5 To Trigger the Oscilloscope
5-46 DS8000-R User Guide
I2S Trigger (Option)
In I2S trigger, the oscilloscope searches for the specified data value and take it as the
condition for identifying the trigger. You need to specify the serial clock line (SCLK, 1
pulse is found on the clock line once 1 bit of digital audio data is sent), frame clock
line (WS, used for switch the audio channel data), and serial data line (SDA, used for
transmit audio data represented in binary (2's complement)).
Below is the sequential chart of I2S bus.
Figure 5-22 Sequential Chart of I2S Bus
Trigger Type:
Click Type to select "I2S". Then, the current trigger setting information is displayed
at the upper-right corner of the screen, as shown in the figure below.
Source Selection:
Click SCLK, WS, and SDA to specify the sources for SCLK, WS, and SDA respectively.
The available choices are CH1-CH4. For details, refer to descriptions in "Trigger
Source". The current trigger source is displayed at the upper-right corner of the
screen.
Note: Only when we select the channel (that has been input with signals) as the
trigger source, can we obtain a stable trigger.
Edge Type:
Click SCLK Edge to select the desired clock edge.
⚫
Rising: samples the SDA data on the rising edge of the clock.
⚫ Falling: samples the SDA data on the falling edge of the clock.
Audio:
Click Audio continuously to select "Left", "Right", or "Either".
Chapter 5 To Trigger the Oscilloscope RIGOL
DS8000-R User Guide 5-47
Trigger Condition:
Click When to select the desired trigger condition.
⚫ =: triggers when the channel's data equal the set data value. Click Data to set
the data bit. For setting methods, refer to descriptions in "I2C Trigger
(Option)".
⚫ ≠: triggers when the channel's data do not equal the set data value. Click Data
to set the data bit. For setting methods, refer to descriptions in "I2C Trigger
(Option)".
⚫ <: triggers when the channel's data are smaller than the set data value. Click
Data Max to set the upper limit of the data bit. For setting methods, refer to
descriptions in "I2C Trigger (Option)".
⚫ >: triggers when the channel's data are greater than the set data value. Click
Data Min to set the lower limit of the data bit. For setting methods, refer to
descriptions in "I2C Trigger (Option)".
⚫ ><: triggers when the channel's data are smaller than the upper limit of the
data value and greater than the lower limit of the data value. Click Data Max
and Data Min to set the upper limit and lower limit of the data bit respectively.
For setting methods, refer to descriptions in "I2C Trigger (Option)".
⚫ <>: triggers when the channel's data are greater than the upper limit of the
data value or smaller than the lower limit of the data value. Click Data Max and
Data Min to set the upper limit and lower limit of the data bit respectively. For
setting methods, refer to descriptions in "I2C Trigger (Option)".
Width:
Click More → Width, then use the pop-up numeric keypad or scroll with the mouse
to set the width. Its range is from 4 to 32.
User Width:
Click More → User Width, then use the pop-up numeric keypad or scroll with the
mouse to set the user width. Its range is from 4 to 32.
Note: The user width is smaller than or equal to the width.
Alignment:
Click More → Alignment to select the alignment way for data signal.
I2S: MSB (Most Significant Bit) of data for each sample is sent first, and LSB (Least
Significant Bit) is sent last. The MSB appears on the SDA line one bit clock after the
edge of the WS transition.
LJ: data transmission (MSB first) begins at the edge of the WS transition.
RJ: data transmission (MSB first) is right-justified to the WS transition.
Trigger Mode:
For details, refer to descriptions in "Trigger Mode".
Trigger Parameter Setting:
Set the trigger parameter (noise rejection) under this trigger type. For details, refer
to descriptions in "Noise Rejection".
Chapter 5 To Trigger the Oscilloscope RIGOL
DS8000-R User Guide 5-49
MIL-STD-1553 Trigger (Option)
1553B is the abbreviation for the MIL-STD-1553 bus. DS8000-R can trigger on the
sync field of 1553B bus, and can also trigger on the specified data word, command
word, status word, or error type.
The formats of the command word, data word, and status word of the 1553B bus is
shown in the following figure.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
Bit
Times
Bit
Times
Data
Word
Bit
Times
Status
Word
Sync
Remote Terminal
Address
5
5 5
T/R
Subaddress/Mode
Word Count/
Mode Code
P
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
P
16
Sync
16-bit Data
Sync
Remote Terminal
Address
Message
Error
Instrumentation
Reserve
d
Service
Request
Broadcast CMD Received
Busy
Subsystem Flag
Dynamic Bus
Acceptance
Terminal Flag
Odd Parity
5 3
Command
Word
Figure 5-23 Formats of the Command Word, Data Word, and Status Word of the
1553B Bus
Trigger Type:
Click Type to select "MIL-STD-1553". Then, the current trigger setting information is
displayed at the upper-right corner of the screen, as shown in the figure below.
Source Selection:
Click Source to open the signal source list and select CH1-CH4. For details, refer to
descriptions in "Trigger Source". The current trigger source is displayed at the
upper-right corner of the screen.
Note: Only when we select the channel (that has been input with signals) as the
trigger source, can we obtain a stable trigger.
RIGOL Chapter 5 To Trigger the Oscilloscope
5-50 DS8000-R User Guide
Trigger Condition:
Click When to select the desired trigger condition.
⚫ Sync: triggers on the specified sync type. After the trigger condition is selected,
click Sync to select the desired sync type: Data Sync, Cmd/Status Sync, or All
Sync.
⚫ Data: triggers on the specified data word. After the trigger condition is selected,
click Comp to select the comparison conditions. The available choices include =,
≠, >, <, ><, <>.
➢ =: triggers when the channel's data word equals the set data word. Click
Min to set the lower limit of the data word. For setting methods, refer to
descriptions in "I2C Trigger (Option)".
➢ ≠: triggers when the channel's data word does not equal the set data word.
Click Min to set the lower limit of the data word. For setting methods, refer
to descriptions in "I2C Trigger (Option)".
➢ <: triggers when the channel's data word is smaller than the set data word.
Click Max to set the upper limit of the data word. For setting methods, refer
to descriptions in "I2C Trigger (Option)".
➢ >: triggers when the channel's data word is greater than the set data word.
Click Min to set the lower limit of the data word. For setting methods, refer
to descriptions in "I2C Trigger (Option)".
➢ ><: triggers when the channel's data word is smaller than the upper limit of
the data word and greater than the lower limit of the data word. Click Max
and Min to set the upper limit and lower limit of the data word respectively.
For setting methods, refer to descriptions in "I2C Trigger (Option)".
➢ <>: triggers when the channel's data word is greater than the upper limit of
the data word or smaller than the lower limit of the data word. Click Max
and Min to set the upper limit and lower limit of the data word respectively.
For setting methods, refer to descriptions in "I2C Trigger (Option)".
⚫ RTA: triggers on the specified remote terminal address. After this trigger
condition is selected, click RTA to set the remote terminal address. For setting
methods, refer to descriptions in "I2C Trigger (Option)".
⚫ RTA+11Bit: triggers on the RTA and the remaining 11 bits. After this trigger
condition is selected:
➢ Click RTA to set the remote terminal address. For setting methods, refer to
descriptions in "I2C Trigger (Option)".
➢ Click Bit time to set the bit time position value to 0 (low), 1 (high), or X
(don't care). For setting methods, refer to descriptions in "I2C Trigger
(Option)".
⚫ Error: triggers on the specified error type. After this trigger condition is selected,
click Err Type to select the error type.
➢ Sync Error: triggers when an invalid sync pulse is found.
➢ Check Error: triggers when the parity bit is incorrect for the data in the
word.
Level Selection and Adjustment of Trigger Level:
After the trigger condition setting is completed, you need to adjust the trigger level
Chapter 5 To Trigger the Oscilloscope RIGOL
DS8000-R User Guide 5-51
to correctly trigger the signal and obtain a stable waveform. Click Level Select
(when "Data" is selected for the trigger condition, click More → Level Select), then
select the desired level type for adjustment.
➢ Level A: only adjusts the upper limit of the trigger level, and the lower limit of
the trigger level remains unchanged.
➢ Level B: only adjusts the lower limit of the trigger level, and the upper limit of
the trigger level remains unchanged.
➢ Level AB: adjusts the upper and lower limits of the trigger level at the same time,
and the trigger level deviation (the difference between the upper limit and lower
limit of the trigger level) remains unchanged.
You can click on the trigger setting label
at the upper-right corner of
the screen to adjust the trigger level. During the adjustment of trigger level, two
trigger level lines appear on the screen, and they move up and down with the change
of the trigger level. At the same time, the real-time trigger level and slope
information is displayed at the lower-left corner of the screen (as shown in the figure
below, H indicates the upper limit of the trigger level, L indicates the lower limit of
the trigger level, and △ indicates the trigger level deviation). When you stopping
modifying the trigger level, the trigger level line and the trigger level information at
the lower-left corner of the screen disappear in about 2 s. The current trigger level
deviation is displayed at the upper-right corner of the screen.
Polarity:
Click More → Polarity to select the desired polarity. The polarities available are
positive polarity (
) and negative polarity ( ).
Trigger Mode:
For details, refer to descriptions in "Trigger Mode".
Trigger Parameter Setting:
Set the trigger parameter (noise rejection) under this trigger type. For details, refer
to descriptions in "Noise Rejection".
RIGOL Chapter 5 To Trigger the Oscilloscope
5-52 DS8000-R User Guide
Zone Trigger
DS8000-R series oscilloscope supports the zone trigger and provides two rectangle
areas: Trigger zone A and Trigger zone B. You can set the trigger conditions to
"Intersect" or "Not intersect". Refer to "Rectangle Drawing" to select "Trigger
zone A" or "Trigger zone B" to open the zone trigger setting menu. You can also click
on the function navigation icon to open the navigation menu. Then click Measure →
Analyze → Zone trigger to enter the zone trigger setting menu.
Enable or disable Trigger zone A or Trigger zone B:
Click Zone A enable or Zone B enable continuously to enable or disable Trigger
zone A or Trigger zone B. You can also refer to "Rectangle Drawing" to select
"Trigger zone A" or "Trigger zone B" to enable Trigger zone A or Trigger zone B. If
both Trigger zone A and Trigger zone B are disabled, then the zone trigger function is
disabled. At this time, you must enable either of them to re-enable the zone trigger.
Note: The zone trigger function is disabled when you enable "XY Mode" or "ROLL
Mode".
Select Source A or Source B:
Click Source A or Source B to select the desired source. The available sources
include CH1-CH4. The zone name color and the zone color are the same as the color
of the selected source channel.
Set the conditions for Trigger zone A and Trigger zone B:
Click Zone A or Zone B to select "Intersect" or "Not intersect".
If you enable Zone A, select CH1 as Source A, and select "Intersect" as the condition,
as shown in the figure below.
If you enable Zone A, select CH1 as Source A, and select "Not intersect" as the
condition, the following figure is displayed.
RIGOL Chapter 5 To Trigger the Oscilloscope
5-54 DS8000-R User Guide
Trigger Output Connector
The trigger output connector ([TRIG OUT]) on the rear panel of DS8000-R series
can output trigger signals (hardware trigger) determined by the current setting.
Figure 5-24 Trigger Output Connector
Click on the function navigation icon to open the navigation menu. Then click Utility
→ System → AUX Out to select "TrigOut". A signal which reflects the current
capture rate of the oscilloscope can be output from the [TRIG OUT] connector each
time a trigger is generated by the oscilloscope. If this signal is connected to a
waveform display device to measure the frequency, the measurement result is the
same as the current capture rate.
Note: If you click Utility → System → AUX Out to select "PassFail", then in the
pass/fail test, when a pass/fail event is detected, the oscilloscope outputs a pulse
from the rear-panel [TRIG OUT] connector.
Trigger Output Connector
Chapter 6 Operations and Measurements RIGOL
DS8000-R User Guide 6-1
Chapter 6 Operations and Measurements
DS8000-R can perform math operations, auto measurements, and cursor
measurements on sampled and displayed data.
Contents in this chapter:
◼ Math Operation
◼ Auto Measurement
◼ Cursor Measurement
RIGOL Chapter 6 Operations and Measurements
6-2 DS8000-R User Guide
Math Operation
Click on the function navigation icon
to open the function navigation. Then click
on the "Math" icon
to open the math operation menu. This oscilloscope supports
four math operations: Math1, Math2, Math3, and Math4. The following section takes
Math1 as an example to introduce the math operation in detail.
Click Math → Math1 → Operator to select the desired math function. Click
Operation continuously to enable or disable the operation. When enabled, the
results of math operation are displayed with purple waveforms on the screen, and
the math operation formula, vertical scale, and other parameters (the displayed data
parameters are different for different math operations) are displayed at the bottom
of the screen. The results of the math operation can be further measured. This
oscilloscope supports enabling the four math operations at the same time, as shown
in the figure below.
DS8000-R series can realize multiple math operations between waveforms of
different channels, including
⚫ arithmetic operations (A+B, A-B, A×B, and A/B)
⚫ FFT operation
⚫ logic operation: A&&B, A||B, A^B, and !A
⚫ function operation: Intg, Diff, Sqrt, Lg, Ln, Exp, Abs, and AX+B (linear function)
⚫ math filter: low-pass filter, high-pass filter, band-pass filter, and band-stop filter
Note: When you select the source, only the enabled channel is available.
Addition
Adds the waveform voltage values of signal source A and B point by point and
displays the results.
Click Math → Math1 → Operator to select "A+B":
⚫ Click Operation continuously to enable or disable the addition operation
function.
⚫ Click SourceA and SourceB respectively to select the channel for Source A and
Source B. The available channels for Source A and Source B are CH1-CH4 and
Ref1-Ref10.
Note: The source of Math2 can be CH1-CH4, Ref1-Ref10, or Math1; the source
Chapter 6 Operations and Measurements RIGOL
DS8000-R User Guide 6-3
of Math3 can be CH1-CH4, Ref1-Ref10, Math1, or Math2; the source of Math4
can be CH1-CH4, Ref1-Ref10, Math1, Math2, or Math3; only the channels that
have been enabled currently can be selected.
⚫ Click Offset to set the vertical offset of the operation results. For setting
methods, refer to the descriptions in "Parameter Setting Method".
⚫ Click Scale to set the vertical scale of the operation results. For setting methods,
refer to the descriptions in "Parameter Setting Method".
⚫ Click More → AutoSetting to adjust the vertical scale and the offset of the
operation results to the optimal value according to the current configuration, so
as to better to observe.
⚫ Click More → Invert to enable or disable the inverted display function of the
waveform.
⚫ Click More → Expand to expand or compress the math operation waveform
around the "Center" or "GND".
⚫ Click More → Label to set the label for math operation results. For details, refer
to descriptions in "Math Operation Label".
⚫ Click More → Color Grade to enable or disable the color grade display of the
operation results. When enabled, different colors are displayed on the screen to
indicate the times of data acquisition or acquisition probability.
⚫ Click More → Reset ColorGrade to clear the color grade display and display
the color grade again.
Subtraction
Subtracts the waveform voltage values of signal source B from that of source A point
by point and displays the results.
Click Math → Math1 → Operator to select "A-B":
⚫ Click Operation continuously to enable or disable the subtraction operation
function.
⚫ Click SourceA and SourceB respectively to select the channel for Source A and
Source B. The available channels for Source A and Source B are CH1-CH4 and
Ref1-Ref10.
Note: The source of Math2 can be CH1-CH4, Ref1-Ref10, or Math1; the source
of Math3 can be CH1-CH4, Ref1-Ref10, Math1, or Math2; the source of Math4
can be CH1-CH4, Ref1-Ref10, Math1, Math2, or Math3; only the channels that
have been enabled currently can be selected.
⚫ Click Offset to set the vertical offset of the operation results. For setting
methods, refer to the descriptions in "Parameter Setting Method".
⚫ Click Scale to set the vertical scale of the operation results. For setting methods,
refer to the descriptions in "Parameter Setting Method".
RIGOL Chapter 6 Operations and Measurements
6-4 DS8000-R User Guide
⚫ Click More → AutoSetting to adjust the vertical scale and offset of the
operation results to the optimal value according to the current configuration, so
as to better observe.
⚫ Click More → Invert to enable or disable the inverted display function of the
waveform.
⚫ Click More → Expand to expand or compress the math operation waveform
around the "Center" or "GND".
⚫ Click More → Label to set the label for math operation results. For details, refer
to descriptions in "Math Operation Label".
⚫ Click More → Color Grade to enable or disable the color grade display of the
operation results. When enabled, different colors are displayed on the screen to
indicate the times of data acquisition or acquisition probability.
⚫ Click More → Reset ColorGrade to clear the color grade display and display
the color grade again.
Multiplication
Multiplies the waveform voltage values of signal source A and B point by point and
displays the results.
Click Math → Math1 → Operator to select "A×B":
⚫ Click Operation continuously to enable or disable the multiplication operation
function.
⚫ Click SourceA and SourceB respectively to select the channel for Source A and
Source B. The available channels for Source A and Source B are CH1-CH4 and
Ref1-Ref10.
Note: The source of Math2 can be CH1-CH4, Ref1-Ref10, or Math1; the source
of Math3 can be CH1-CH4, Ref1-Ref10, Math1, or Math2; the source of Math4
can be CH1-CH4, Ref1-Ref10, Math1, Math2, or Math3; only the channels that
have been enabled currently can be selected.
⚫ Click Offset to set the vertical offset of the operation results. For setting
methods, refer to the descriptions in "Parameter Setting Method".
⚫ Click Scale to set the vertical scale of the operation results. For setting methods,
refer to the descriptions in "Parameter Setting Method".
⚫ Click More → AutoSetting to adjust the vertical scale and offset of the
operation results to the optimal value according to the current configuration, so
as to better observe.
⚫ Click More → Invert to enable or disable the inverted display function of the
waveform.
⚫ Click More → Expand to expand or compress the measurement waveform
around the "Center" or "GND".
Chapter 6 Operations and Measurements RIGOL
DS8000-R User Guide 6-5
⚫ Click More → Label to set the label for math operation results. For details, refer
to descriptions in "Math Operation Label".
⚫ Click More → Color Grade to enable or disable the color grade display of the
operation results. When enabled, different colors are displayed on the screen to
indicate the times of data acquisition or acquisition probability.
⚫ Click More → Reset ColorGrade to clear the color grade display and display
the color grade again.
Division
Divides the waveform voltage values of signal source A by that of source B point by
point and displays the results. It can be used to analyze the multiple relationships of
waveforms of two channels.
Note: When the voltage of signal source B is 0 V, the division result is treated as 0.
Click Math → Math1 → Operator to select "A÷B":
⚫ Click Operation continuously to enable or disable the division operation
function.
⚫ Click SourceA and SourceB respectively to select the channel for Source A and
Source B. The available channels for Source A and Source B are CH1-CH4 and
Ref1-Ref10.
Note: The source of Math2 can be CH1-CH4, Ref1-Ref10, or Math1; the source
of Math3 can be CH1-CH4, Ref1-Ref10, Math1, or Math2; the source of Math4
can be CH1-CH4, Ref1-Ref10, Math1, Math2, or Math3; only the channels that
have been enabled currently can be selected.
⚫ Click Offset to set the vertical offset of the operation results. For setting
methods, refer to the descriptions in "Parameter Setting Method".
⚫ Click Scale to set the vertical scale of the operation results. For setting methods,
refer to the descriptions in "Parameter Setting Method".
⚫ Click More → AutoSetting to adjust the vertical scale and offset of the
operation results to the optimal value according to the current configuration, so
as to better observe.
⚫ Click More → Invert to enable or disable the inverted display function of the
waveform.
⚫ Click More → Expand to expand or compress the measurement waveform
around the "Center" or "GND".
⚫ Click More → Label to set the label for math operation results. For details, refer
to descriptions in "Math Operation Label".
⚫ Click More → Color Grade to enable or disable the color grade display of the
operation results. When enabled, different colors are displayed on the screen to
indicate the times of data acquisition or acquisition probability.
⚫ Click More → Reset ColorGrade to clear the color grade display and display
RIGOL Chapter 6 Operations and Measurements
6-6 DS8000-R User Guide
the color grade again.
FFT
FFT (Fast Fourier Transform) is used to transform time-domain signals to
frequency-domain components (frequency spectrum). DS8000-R oscilloscope
provides FFT operation function which enables you to observe the time-domain
waveform and spectrum of the signal at the same time. FFT operation can facilitate
the following works:
⚫ Measure harmonic components and distortion in the system;
⚫ Display the characteristics of the noise in DC power;
⚫ Analyze vibration.
Click Math → Math1 → Operator to select "FFT":
⚫ Click Operation continuously to enable or disable the FFT operation function.
When enabled, the operation results are displayed as purple waveforms on the
screen. At the same time, the parameters such as vertical scale, center
frequency, and resolution are displayed at the bottom of the screen, as shown in
the following figure. Of which, FFT resolution is the quotient of the sample rate
and the number of FFT points. If the number of FFT points is a fixed value
(65535 at most), then the higher the sample rate, the higher the resolution.
⚫ Click Source to select the channel. The available channels are CH1, CH2, CH3,
and CH4.
⚫ Click Offset to set the vertical offset of the operation results. For setting
methods, refer to the descriptions in "Parameter Setting Method".
⚫ Click Scale to set the vertical scale of the operation results. For setting methods,
refer to the descriptions in "Parameter Setting Method". If the source
channel unit is set to "V", then the unit of the vertical scale is displayed as dBV.
If you select other source channel units, then the unit of the vertical scale is
displayed as dB.
⚫ Click AutoSetting to adjust the vertical scale and offset of the operation results
to the optimal value according to the current configuration, so as to better
observe.
⚫ Click More → Unit to select the vertical unit. The vertical unit can be set to
dBm/dBV or Vrms. The vertical amplitude can be expressed both in log form and
linear form, with dBm/dBV and Vrms as the unit respectively. If you need to
display the FFT spectrum within a larger dynamic range, dBm/dBV is
recommended.
Vertical Scale Sample Rate Center Frequency Span Resolution
Chapter 6 Operations and Measurements RIGOL
DS8000-R User Guide 6-7
⚫ Click More → X continuously to select "Span-Center" (frequency range to
center frequency) or "Start-End" (start frequency to stop frequency).
➢ "Span-Center" (frequency range to center frequency): the frequency range
refers to the screen width, and you can divide the frequency range by 10 to
obtain the frequency per division. Click Span to set the frequency range of
the frequency-domain waveform. For setting methods, refer to descriptions
in "Parameter Setting Method". Click Center to set the frequency of
the frequency-domain waveform relative to the horizontal center of the
screen. For setting methods, refer to descriptions in "Parameter Setting
Method".
➢ "Start-End" (start frequency to stop frequency): start frequency refers to
the frequency at the left side of the screen. Click Start to set the start
frequency of the frequency-domain waveform. For setting methods, refer to
descriptions in "Parameter Setting Method". Stop frequency refers to
the frequency at the right side of the screen. Click End to set the stop
frequency of the frequency-domain waveform. For setting methods, refer to
descriptions in "Parameter Setting Method".
⚫ Click More → Peak Search to enter the peak search menu.
Click Peak Search continuously to enable or disable the peak search function.
When enabled, the peak search results are displayed on the screen, as shown in
the figure below. Click the "Math" tab at the top of the peak search results to
switch among Math1-Math4.
➢ Click Peak Number, then use the pop-up numeric keypad or scroll with the
mouse to set the number of peaks. The available range is from 1 to 15. By
default, it is 5.
➢ Click Threshold, then use the pop-up numeric keypad or scroll with the
mouse to set the threshold of the peak.
➢ Click Excursion, then use the pop-up numeric keypad or scroll with the
mouse to set the excursion of the peak.
➢ Click Table Order, then select the sorting mode of the peak. The available
sorting mode is "Amp Order" and "Freq Order". By default, it is "Amp
Order".
➢ Click Export, and the save setting menu is displayed. You can export the
peak search results to the internal memory or the external USB storage
device in CSV format. For detailed saving operation, refer to descriptions in
"Store and Load".
⚫ Click More → Window to select the desired window function.
RIGOL Chapter 6 Operations and Measurements
6-8 DS8000-R User Guide
Spectral leakage can be considerably decreased when a window function is used.
DS8000-R provides 6 FFT window functions (as shown in Table 6-1) which have
different characteristics and are applicable to measuring different waveforms.
You need to select the window function according to the characteristics of the
waveform to be measured.
Table 6-1 Window Function
Window
Function
Characteristics
Waveforms Applicable to the
Window Function
Rectangular
Best frequency
resolution
Poorest
amplitude
resolution
Similar to the
situation when
no window is
applied.
Transient or short pulse, the signal
levels before and after the
multiplication are basically the same.
Sine waveforms with the same
amplitudes and rather similar
frequencies.
Wide band random noise with
relatively slow change of waveform
spectrum.
Blackman-Harris
Best amplitude
resolution
Poorest
frequency
resolution
Single frequency signal, searching for
higher order harmonics.
Hanning
Better frequency
resolution and
poorer amplitude
resolution
compared with
Rectangular
Sine, periodic, and narrow band
random noise.
Hamming
A little bit better
frequency
resolution than
Hanning
Transient or short pulse, the signal
levels before and after the
multiplication are rather different.
Flattop
Measure the
signals
accurately
Measure the signal that has no
accurate reference and requires an
accurate measurement
Triangle
Better frequency
resolution
Measure the narrow band signal and
that has strong noise interference
⚫ For FFT math operation setting label, refer to descriptions in "Math Operation
Label".
⚫ Click More → More → Color Grade to enable or disable the color grade
display of the FFT operation results. When enabled, different colors are
displayed on the screen to indicate the times of data acquisition or acquisition
probability.
⚫ Click More → More → Reset ColorGrade to clear the color grade display and
Chapter 6 Operations and Measurements RIGOL
DS8000-R User Guide 6-9
display the color grade again.
"AND" Operation
Performs logic "AND" operation on the waveform voltage values of the specified
sources point by point and displays the results. In operation, when the voltage value
of the source channel is greater than the threshold of the corresponding channel, it is
regarded as logic "1"; otherwise it is logic "0". The results of logic AND operation of
two binary bits are shown in Table 6-2.
Table 6-2 Logic "AND" Operation
A
B
A&&B
0
0
0
0
1
0
1
0
0
1
1
1
Click Math → Math1 → Operator to select "A&&B":
⚫ Click Operation continuously to enable or disable the "AND" operation function.
⚫ Click SourceA and SourceB respectively to select the channel for SourceA and
Source B. The available channels for Source A and Source B are CH1-CH4.
Note: Only the channels that have been enabled currently can be selected.
➢ If Source A (or Source B) selects CH1, click More → Thre.CH1 to set the
threshold of Source A (or Source B) in logic operation. For setting methods,
refer to descriptions in "Parameter Setting Method".
➢ If Source A (or Source B) selects CH2, click More → Thre.CH2 to set the
threshold of Source A (or Source B) in logic operation. For setting methods,
refer to descriptions in "Parameter Setting Method".
➢ If Source A (or Source B) selects CH3, click More → Thre.CH3 to set the
threshold of Source A (or Source B) in logic operation. For setting methods,
refer to descriptions in "Parameter Setting Method".
➢ If Source A (or Source B) selects CH4, click More → Thre.CH4 to set the
threshold of Source A (or Source B) in logic operation. For setting methods,
refer to descriptions in "Parameter Setting Method".
Tip
FFT shortcut operation: click the function navigation icon
at the lower-left
corner of the screen to open the function navigation. Then, click the "FFT" icon
to open the FFT menu. This oscilloscope supports 4 FFTs: FFT1, FFT2, FFT3, and
FFT4. For details, refer to the descriptions in this section.
RIGOL Chapter 6 Operations and Measurements
6-10 DS8000-R User Guide
⚫ Click Offset to adjust the vertical offset of the operation results with the
displayed numeric keypad or by scrolling with the mouse.
⚫ Click Size to select the waveform size. The available sizes include "Small",
"Medium", and "Large".
⚫ The AutoSetting menu under More is grayed out and disabled.
⚫ Click More → Sensitivity to set the sensitivity of the digital signal converted
from the analog signal on the source. For setting methods, refer to descriptions
in "Parameter Setting Method".
⚫ Click More → Label to set the label for math operation results. For details, refer
to descriptions in "Math Operation Label".
"OR" Operation
Performs logic "OR" operation on the waveform voltage values of the specified
sources point by point and displays the results. In operation, when the voltage value
of the source channel is greater than the threshold of the corresponding channel, it is
regarded as logic "1"; otherwise it is logic "0". The results of logic OR operation of
two binary bits are as shown in Table 6-3.
Table 6-3 Logic "OR" Operation
A
B
A||B
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
0
1
1
1
1
Click Math → Math1 → Operator to select "A||B":
⚫ Click Operation continuously to enable or disable the "OR" operation function.
⚫ Click SourceA and SourceB to select the channel for Source A and Source B.
The available channels for Source A and Source B are CH1-CH4.
Note: Only the channels that have been enabled currently can be selected.
➢ If Source A (or Source B) selects CH1, click More → Thre.CH1 to set the
threshold of Source A (or Source B) in logic operation. For setting methods,
refer to descriptions in "Parameter Setting Method".
➢ If Source A (or Source B) selects CH2, click More → Thre.CH2 to set the
threshold of Source A (or Source B) in logic operation. For setting methods,
refer to descriptions in "Parameter Setting Method".
➢ If Source A (or Source B) selects CH3, click More → Thre.CH3 to set the
threshold of Source A (or Source B) in logic operation. For setting methods,
refer to descriptions in "Parameter Setting Method".
➢ If Source A (or Source B) selects CH4, click More → Thre.CH4 to set the
Chapter 6 Operations and Measurements RIGOL
DS8000-R User Guide 6-11
threshold of Source A (or Source B) in logic operation. For setting methods,
refer to descriptions in "Parameter Setting Method".
⚫ Click Offset to adjust the vertical offset of the operation results.
⚫ Click Size to select the waveform size. The available sizes include "Small",
"Medium", and "Large".
⚫ The AutoSetting menu under More is grayed out and disabled.
⚫ Click More → Sensitivity to set the sensitivity of the digital signal converted
from the analog signal on the source. For setting methods, refer to descriptions
in "Parameter Setting Method".
⚫ Click More → Label to set the label for math operation results. For details, refer
to descriptions in "Math Operation Label".
"XOR" Operation
Performs logic "XOR" operation on the waveform voltage values of the specified
sources point by point and displays the results. In operation, when the voltage value
of the source channel is greater than the threshold of the corresponding channel, it is
regarded as logic "1"; otherwise it is logic "0". The results of logic XOR operation of
two binary bits are as shown in Table 6-4.
Table 6-4 Logic "XOR" Operation
A
B
A^B
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
0
1
1
1
0
Click Math → Math1 → Operator to select "A^B":
⚫ Click Operation continuously to enable or disable the "XOR" operation function.
⚫ Click SourceA and SourceB to select the channel for SourceA and Source B.
The available channels for Source A and Source B are CH1-CH4.
Note: Only the channels that have been enabled currently can be selected.
➢ If Source A (or Source B) selects CH1, click More → Thre.CH1 to set the
threshold of Source A (or Source B) in logic operation. For setting methods,
refer to descriptions in "Parameter Setting Method".
➢ If Source A (or Source B) selects CH2, click More → Thre.CH2 to set the
threshold of Source A (or Source B) in logic operation. For setting methods,
refer to descriptions in "Parameter Setting Method".
➢ If Source A (or Source B) selects CH3, click More → Thre.CH3 to set the
threshold of Source A (or Source B) in logic operation. For setting methods,
refer to descriptions in "Parameter Setting Method".
RIGOL Chapter 6 Operations and Measurements
6-12 DS8000-R User Guide
➢ If Source A (or Source B) selects CH4, click More → Thre.CH4 to set the
threshold of Source A (or Source B) in logic operation. For setting methods,
refer to descriptions in "Parameter Setting Method".
⚫ Click Offset to adjust the vertical offset of the operation results.
⚫ Click Size to select the waveform size. The available sizes include "Small",
"Medium", and "Large".
⚫ The AutoSetting menu under More is grayed out and disabled.
⚫ Click More → Sensitivity to set the sensitivity of the digital signal converted
from the analog signal on the source. For setting methods, refer to descriptions
in "Parameter Setting Method".
⚫ Click More → Label to set the label for math operation results. For details, refer
to descriptions in "Math Operation Label".
"NOT" Operation
Performs logic "NOT" operation on the waveform voltage values of the specified
sources point by point and displays the results. In operation, when the voltage value
of the source channel is greater than the threshold of the corresponding channel, it is
regarded as logic "1"; otherwise it is logic "0". The results of logic "NOT" operation of
two binary bits are as shown in Table 6-5.
Table 6-5 Logic "NOT" Operation
A
!A
0
1
1
0
Click Math → Math1 → Operator to select "!A":
⚫ Click Operation continuously to enable or disable the "NOT" operation function.
⚫ Click SourceA to select the channel for Source A. The available channels for
Source A are CH1-CH4.
Note: Only the channels that have been enabled currently can be selected.
➢ If Source A (or Source B) selects CH1, click More → Thre.CH1 to set the
threshold of Source A (or Source B) in logic operation. For setting methods,
refer to descriptions in "Parameter Setting Method".
➢ If Source A (or Source B) selects CH2, click More → Thre.CH2 to set the
threshold of Source A (or Source B) in logic operation. For setting methods,
refer to descriptions in "Parameter Setting Method".
➢ If Source A (or Source B) selects CH3, click More → Thre.CH3 to set the
threshold of Source A (or Source B) in logic operation. For setting methods,
refer to descriptions in "Parameter Setting Method".
➢ If Source A (or Source B) selects CH4, click More → Thre.CH4 to set the
Chapter 6 Operations and Measurements RIGOL
DS8000-R User Guide 6-13
threshold of Source A (or Source B) in logic operation. For setting methods,
refer to descriptions in "Parameter Setting Method".
⚫ Click Offset to adjust the vertical offset of the operation results.
⚫ Click Size to select the waveform size. The available sizes include "Small",
"Medium", and "Large".
⚫ The AutoSetting menu is grayed out and disabled.
⚫ Click More → Sensitivity to set the sensitivity of the digital signal converted
from the analog signal on the source. For setting methods, refer to descriptions
in "Parameter Setting Method".
⚫ Click More → Label to set the label for math operation results. For details, refer
to descriptions in "Math Operation Label".
Intg
Calculates the integral of the selected source. For example, you can use integral to
measure the area under a waveform or the pulse energy.
Click Math → Math1 → Operator to select "Intg":
⚫ Click Operation continuously to enable or disable the "Intg" operation function.
⚫ Click SourceA to select the channel for Source A. The available channels for
Source A are CH1-CH4 and Ref1-Ref10.
Note: The source of Math2 can be CH1-CH4, Ref1-Ref10, or Math1; the source
of Math3 can be CH1-CH4, Ref1-Ref10, Math1, or Math2; the source of Math4
can be CH1-CH4, Ref1-Ref10, Math1, Math2, or Math3; only the channels that
have been enabled currently can be selected.
⚫ Click Offset to set the vertical offset of the operation results. For setting
methods, refer to the descriptions in "Parameter Setting Method".
⚫ Click Scale to set the vertical scale of the operation results. For setting methods,
refer to the descriptions in "Parameter Setting Method".
⚫ Click AutoSetting to adjust the vertical scale and offset of the operation results
to an optimal value based on the current configuration, so as to better observe.
⚫ Click More → Bias to set the DC offset correction factor for the input signal.
Note that this parameter can only be set by using the numeric keypad.
⚫ Click More → Invert to enable or disable the inverted display function of the
waveform.
⚫ Click More → Label to set the label for math operation results. For details, refer
to descriptions in "Math Operation Label".
⚫ Click More → Color Grade to enable or disable the color grade display of the
operation results. When enabled, different colors are displayed on the screen to
indicate the times of data acquisition or acquisition probability.
⚫ Click More → Reset ColorGrade to clear the color grade display and display
the color grade again.
RIGOL Chapter 6 Operations and Measurements
6-14 DS8000-R User Guide
Diff
Calculates the discrete time derivative of the selected source. For example, you can
use differentiate to measure the instantaneous slope of a waveform.
Click Math → Math1 → Operator to select "Diff":
⚫ Click Operation continuously to enable or disable the "Diff" operation function.
⚫ Click SourceA to select the channel for Source A. The available channels for
Source A are CH1-CH4 and Ref1-Ref10.
Note: The source of Math2 can be CH1-CH4, Ref1-Ref10, or Math1; the source
of Math3 can be CH1-CH4, Ref1-Ref10, Math1, or Math2; the source of Math4
can be CH1-CH4, Ref1-Ref10, Math1, Math2, or Math3; only the channels that
have been enabled currently can be selected.
⚫ Click Offset to set the vertical offset of the operation results. For setting
methods, refer to the descriptions in "Parameter Setting Method".
⚫ Click Scale to set the vertical scale of the operation results. For setting methods,
refer to the descriptions in "Parameter Setting Method".
⚫ Click AutoSetting to adjust the vertical scale and offset of the operation results
to an optimal value based on the current configuration, so as to better observe.
⚫ Click More → Smooth to set the number of smoothing times in differential
operation. For setting methods, refer to descriptions in "Parameter Setting
Method".
Note: As the high-frequency component of waveform data has a great impact
on the differential operation, you need to adjust the parameter "Smooth" to a
larger value, so as to restore the low-frequency component.
⚫ Click More → Invert to enable or disable the inverted display function of the
waveform.
⚫ Click More → Label to set the label for math operation results. For details, refer
to descriptions in "Math Operation Label".
⚫ Click More → Color Grade to enable or disable the color grade display of the
operation results. When enabled, different colors are displayed on the screen to
indicate the times of data acquisition or acquisition probability.
⚫ Click More → Reset ColorGrade to clear the color grade display and display
the color grade again.
Sqrt
Tip
Because differentiation is very sensitive to noise, it is helpful to set acquisition
mode to "Average".
Chapter 6 Operations and Measurements RIGOL
DS8000-R User Guide 6-15
Calculates the square root of the selected source point by point and displays the
results.
Click Math → Math1 → Operator to select "Sqrt":
⚫ Click Operation continuously to enable or disable the "Sqrt" operation function.
⚫ Click SourceA to select the channel for Source A. The available channels for
Source A are CH1-CH4 and Ref1-Ref10.
Note: The source of Math2 can be CH1-CH4, Ref1-Ref10, or Math1; the source
of Math3 can be CH1-CH4, Ref1-Ref10, Math1, or Math2; the source of Math4
can be CH1-CH4, Ref1-Ref10, Math1, Math2, or Math3; only the channels that
have been enabled currently can be selected.
⚫ Click Offset to set the vertical offset of the operation results. For setting
methods, refer to the descriptions in "Parameter Setting Method".
⚫ Click Scale to set the vertical scale of the operation results. For setting methods,
refer to the descriptions in "Parameter Setting Method".
⚫ Click AutoSetting to adjust the vertical scale and offset of the operation results
to an optimal value based on the current configuration, so as to better observe.
⚫ Click More → Invert to enable or disable the inverted display function of the
waveform.
⚫ Click More → Label to set the label for math operation results. For details, refer
to descriptions in "Math Operation Label".
⚫ Click More → Color Grade to enable or disable the color grade display of the
operation results. When enabled, different colors are displayed on the screen to
indicate the times of data acquisition or acquisition probability.
⚫ Click More → Reset ColorGrade to clear the color grade display and display
the color grade again.
Lg (Base 10 Exponential)
Calculates the base 10 exponential of the selected source point by point and displays
the results.
Click Math → Math1 → Operator to select "Lg":
⚫ Click Operation continuously to enable or disable the "Lg" operation function.
⚫ Click SourceA to select the channel for Source A. The available channels for
Source A are CH1-CH4 and Ref1-Ref10.
Note: The source of Math2 can be CH1-CH4, Ref1-Ref10, or Math1; the source
of Math3 can be CH1-CH4, Ref1-Ref10, Math1, or Math2; the source of Math4
can be CH1-CH4, Ref1-Ref10, Math1, Math2, or Math3; only the channels that
have been enabled currently can be selected.
⚫ Click Offset to set the vertical offset of the operation results. For setting
methods, refer to the descriptions in "Parameter Setting Method".
RIGOL Chapter 6 Operations and Measurements
6-16 DS8000-R User Guide
⚫ Click Scale to set the vertical scale of the operation results. For setting methods,
refer to the descriptions in "Parameter Setting Method".
⚫ Click AutoSetting to adjust the vertical scale and offset of the operation results
to an optimal value based on the current configuration, so as to better observe.
⚫ Click More → Invert to enable or disable the inverted display function of the
waveform.
⚫ Click More → Label to set the label for math operation results. For details, refer
to descriptions in "Math Operation Label".
⚫ Click More → Color Grade to enable or disable the color grade display of the
operation results. When enabled, different colors are displayed on the screen to
indicate the times of data acquisition or acquisition probability.
⚫ Click More → Reset ColorGrade to clear the color grade display and display
the color grade again.
Ln
Calculates the natural logarithm (Ln) of the selected source point by point and
displays the results.
Click Math → Math1 → Operator to select "Ln":
⚫ Click Operation continuously to enable or disable the "Ln" operation function.
⚫ Click SourceA to select the channel for Source A. The available channels for
Source A are CH1-CH4 and Ref1-Ref10.
Note: The source of Math2 can be CH1-CH4, Ref1-Ref10, or Math1; the source
of Math3 can be CH1-CH4, Ref1-Ref10, Math1, or Math2; the source of Math4
can be CH1-CH4, Ref1-Ref10, Math1, Math2, or Math3; only the channels that
have been enabled currently can be selected.
⚫ Click Offset to set the vertical offset of the operation results. For setting
methods, refer to the descriptions in "Parameter Setting Method".
⚫ Click Scale to set the vertical scale of the operation results. For setting methods,
refer to the descriptions in "Parameter Setting Method".
⚫ Click AutoSetting to adjust the vertical scale and offset of the operation results
to an optimal value based on the current configuration, so as to better observe.
⚫ Click More → Invert to enable or disable the inverted display function of the
waveform.
⚫ Click More → Label to set the label for math operation results. For details, refer
to descriptions in "Math Operation Label".
⚫ Click More → Color Grade to enable or disable the color grade display of the
operation results. When enabled, different colors are displayed on the screen to
indicate the times of data acquisition or acquisition probability.
⚫ Click More → Reset ColorGrade to clear the color grade display and display
Chapter 6 Operations and Measurements RIGOL
DS8000-R User Guide 6-17
the color grade again.
Exp
Calculates the exponential of the selected source point by point and displays the
results.
Click Math → Math1 → Operator to select "Exp":
⚫ Click Operation continuously to enable or disable the "Exp" operation function.
⚫ Click SourceA to select the channel for Source A. The available channels for
Source A are CH1-CH4 and Ref1-Ref10.
Note: The source of Math2 can be CH1-CH4, Ref1-Ref10, or Math1; the source
of Math3 can be CH1-CH4, Ref1-Ref10, Math1, or Math2; the source of Math4
can be CH1-CH4, Ref1-Ref10, Math1, Math2, or Math3; only the channels that
have been enabled currently can be selected.
⚫ Click Offset to set the vertical offset of the operation results. For setting
methods, refer to the descriptions in "Parameter Setting Method".
⚫ Click Scale to set the vertical scale of the operation results. For setting methods,
refer to the descriptions in "Parameter Setting Method".
⚫ Click AutoSetting to adjust the vertical scale and offset of the operation results
to an optimal value based on the current configuration, so as to better observe.
⚫ Click More → Invert to enable or disable the inverted display function of the
waveform.
⚫ Click More → Label to set the label for math operation results. For details, refer
to descriptions in "Math Operation Label".
⚫ Click More → Color Grade to enable or disable the color grade display of the
operation results. When enabled, different colors are displayed on the screen to
indicate the times of data acquisition or acquisition probability.
⚫ Click More → Reset ColorGrade to clear the color grade display and display
the color grade again.
Abs
Calculates the absolute value of the selected source and displays the results.
Click Math → Math1 → Operator to select "Abs":
⚫ Click Operation continuously to enable or disable the "Abs" operation function.
⚫ Click SourceA to select the channel for Source A. The available channels for
Source A are CH1-CH4 and Ref1-Ref10.
Note: The source of Math2 can be CH1-CH4, Ref1-Ref10, or Math1; the source
RIGOL Chapter 6 Operations and Measurements
6-18 DS8000-R User Guide
of Math3 can be CH1-CH4, Ref1-Ref10, Math1, or Math2; the source of Math4
can be CH1-CH4, Ref1-Ref10, Math1, Math2, or Math3; only the channels that
have been enabled currently can be selected.
⚫ Click Offset to set the vertical offset of the operation results. For setting
methods, refer to the descriptions in "Parameter Setting Method".
⚫ Click Scale to set the vertical scale of the operation results. For setting methods,
refer to the descriptions in "Parameter Setting Method".
⚫ Click AutoSetting to adjust the vertical scale and offset of the operation results
to an optimal value based on the current configuration, so as to better observe.
⚫ Click More → Invert to enable or disable the inverted display function of the
waveform.
⚫ Click More → Label to set the label for math operation results. For details, refer
to descriptions in "Math Operation Label".
⚫ Click More → Color Grade to enable or disable the color grade display of the
operation results. When enabled, different colors are displayed on the screen to
indicate the times of data acquisition or acquisition probability.
⚫ Click More → Reset ColorGrade to clear the color grade display and display
the color grade again.
Low Pass
Only allows the signals whose frequencies are lower than the current upper limit
frequency to pass.
Click Math → Math1 → Operator to select "LowPass":
⚫ Click Operation continuously to enable or disable the "LowPass" operation
function.
⚫ Click SourceA to select the channel for Source A. The available channels for
Source A are CH1-CH4 and Ref1-Ref10.
Note: The source of Math2 can be CH1-CH4, Ref1-Ref10, or Math1; the source
of Math3 can be CH1-CH4, Ref1-Ref10, Math1, or Math2; the source of Math4
can be CH1-CH4, Ref1-Ref10, Math1, Math2, or Math3; only the channels that
have been enabled currently can be selected.
⚫ Click Offset to set the vertical offset of the operation results. For setting
methods, refer to the descriptions in "Parameter Setting Method".
⚫ Click Scale to set the vertical scale of the operation results. For setting methods,
refer to the descriptions in "Parameter Setting Method".
⚫ Click ωc to set the upper limit frequency. For setting methods, refer to
descriptions in "Parameter Setting Method".
Note: The settable range of the upper limit frequency is related to the Math
sample rate (displayed at the bottom of the screen when the Math function is
Chapter 6 Operations and Measurements RIGOL
DS8000-R User Guide 6-19
enabled). The sample rate of the analog channel or the changes of the memory
depth can affect the Math sample rate.
⚫ Click More → AutoSetting to adjust the vertical scale and offset of the
operation results to an optimal value based on the current configuration, so as
to better observe.
⚫ Click More → Invert to enable or disable the inverted display function of the
waveform.
⚫ Click More → Label to set the label for math operation results. For details, refer
to descriptions in "Math Operation Label".
⚫ Click More → Color Grade to enable or disable the color grade display of the
operation results. When enabled, different colors are displayed on the screen to
indicate the times of data acquisition or acquisition probability.
⚫ Click More → Reset ColorGrade to clear the color grade display and display
the color grade again.
High Pass
Only allows the signals whose frequencies are higher than the current lower limit
frequency to pass.
Click Math → Math1 → Operator to select "HighPass":
⚫ Click Operation continuously to enable or disable the "HighPass" operation
function.
⚫ Click SourceA to select the channel for Source A. The available channels for
Source A are CH1-CH4 and Ref1-Ref10.
Note: The source of Math2 can be CH1-CH4, Ref1-Ref10, or Math1; the source
of Math3 can be CH1-CH4, Ref1-Ref10, Math1, or Math2; the source of Math4
can be CH1-CH4, Ref1-Ref10, Math1, Math2, or Math3; only the channels that
have been enabled currently can be selected.
⚫ Click Offset to set the vertical offset of the operation results. For setting
methods, refer to the descriptions in "Parameter Setting Method".
⚫ Click Scale to set the vertical scale of the operation results. For setting methods,
refer to the descriptions in "Parameter Setting Method".
⚫ Click ωc to set the lower limit frequency. For setting methods, refer to
descriptions in "Parameter Setting Method".
Note: The settable range of the lower limit frequency is related to the Math
sample rate (displayed at the bottom of the screen when the Math function is
enabled). The sample rate of the analog channel or the changes of the memory
depth can affect the Math sample rate.
⚫ Click More → AutoSetting to adjust the vertical scale and offset of the
operation results to an optimal value based on the current configuration, so as
to better observe.
RIGOL Chapter 6 Operations and Measurements
6-20 DS8000-R User Guide
⚫ Click More → Invert to enable or disable the inverted display function of the
waveform.
⚫ Click More → Label to set the label for math operation results. For details, refer
to descriptions in "Math Operation Label".
⚫ Click More → Color Grade to enable or disable the color grade display of the
operation results. When enabled, different colors are displayed on the screen to
indicate the times of data acquisition or acquisition probability.
⚫ Click More → Reset ColorGrade to clear the color grade display and display
the color grade again.
Band Pass
Only allows the signals whose frequencies are higher than the current lower limit
frequency and lower than the current upper limit frequency to pass.
Click Math → Math1 → Operator to select "BandPass":
⚫ Click Operation continuously to enable or disable the "BandPass" operation
function.
⚫ Click SourceA to select the channel for Source A. The available channels for
Source A are CH1-CH4 and Ref1-Ref10.
Note: The source of Math2 can be CH1-CH4, Ref1-Ref10, or Math1; the source
of Math3 can be CH1-CH4, Ref1-Ref10, Math1, or Math2; the source of Math4
can be CH1-CH4, Ref1-Ref10, Math1, Math2, or Math3; only the channels that
have been enabled currently can be selected.
⚫ Click Offset to set the vertical offset of the operation results. For setting
methods, refer to the descriptions in "Parameter Setting Method".
⚫ Click Scale to set the vertical scale of the operation results. For setting methods,
refer to the descriptions in "Parameter Setting Method".
⚫ Click AutoSetting to adjust the vertical scale and offset of the operation results
to an optimal value based on the current configuration, so as to better observe.
⚫ Click More → ωc1 to set the lower limit frequency. For setting methods, refer to
descriptions in "Parameter Setting Method".
⚫ Click More → ωc2 to set the upper limit frequency. For setting methods, refer
to descriptions in "Parameter Setting Method".
Note: The settable ranges of the upper and lower limit frequencies are related
to the Math sample rate (displayed at the bottom of the screen when the Math
function is enabled). The sample rate of the analog channel or the changes of
the memory depth can affect the Math sample rate.
⚫ Click More → Invert to enable or disable the inverted display function of the
waveform.
⚫ Click More → Label to set the label for math operation results. For details, refer
to descriptions in "Math Operation Label".
Chapter 6 Operations and Measurements RIGOL
DS8000-R User Guide 6-21
⚫ Click More → Color Grade to enable or disable the color grade display of the
operation results. When enabled, different colors are displayed on the screen to
indicate the times of data acquisition or acquisition probability.
⚫ Click More → Reset ColorGrade to clear the color grade display and display
the color grade again.
Band Stop
Only allows the signals whose frequencies are lower than the current lower limit
frequency and higher than the current upper limit frequency to pass.
Click Math → Math1 → Operator to select "BandStop":
⚫ Click Operation continuously to enable or disable the "BandStop" operation
function.
⚫ Click SourceA to select the channel for Source A. The available channels for
Source A are CH1-CH4 and Ref1-Ref10.
Note: The source of Math2 can be CH1-CH4, Ref1-Ref10, or Math1; the source
of Math3 can be CH1-CH4, Ref1-Ref10, Math1, or Math2; the source of Math4
can be CH1-CH4, Ref1-Ref10, Math1, Math2, or Math3; only the channels that
have been enabled currently can be selected.
⚫ Click Offset to set the vertical offset of the operation results. For setting
methods, refer to the descriptions in "Parameter Setting Method".
⚫ Click Scale to set the vertical scale of the operation results. For setting methods,
refer to the descriptions in "Parameter Setting Method".
⚫ Click AutoSetting to adjust the vertical scale and offset of the operation results
to an optimal value based on the current configuration, so as to better observe.
⚫ Click More → ωc1 to set the lower limit frequency. For setting methods, refer to
descriptions in "Parameter Setting Method".
⚫ Click More → ωc2 to set the upper limit frequency. For setting methods, refer
to descriptions in "Parameter Setting Method".
Note: The settable ranges of the upper and lower limit frequencies are related
to the Math sample rate (displayed at the bottom of the screen when the Math
function is enabled). The sample rate of the analog channel or the changes of
the memory depth can affect the Math sample rate.
⚫ Click More → Invert to enable or disable the inverted display function of the
waveform.
⚫ Click More → Label to set the label for math operation results. For details, refer
to descriptions in "Math Operation Label".
⚫ Click More → Color Grade to enable or disable the color grade display of the
operation results. When enabled, different colors are displayed on the screen to
indicate the times of data acquisition or acquisition probability.
⚫ Click More → Reset ColorGrade to clear the color grade display and display
RIGOL Chapter 6 Operations and Measurements
6-22 DS8000-R User Guide
the color grade again.
AX+B
Applies a linear function to the selected source, and displays the results.
Click Math → Math1 → Operator to select "AX+B":
⚫ Click Operation continuously to enable or disable the "AX+B" operation
function.
⚫ Click SourceA to select the channel for Source A. The available channels for
Source A are CH1-CH4 and Ref1-Ref10.
Note: The source of Math2 can be CH1-CH4, Ref1-Ref10, or Math1; the source
of Math3 can be CH1-CH4, Ref1-Ref10, Math1, or Math2; the source of Math4
can be CH1-CH4, Ref1-Ref10, Math1, Math2, or Math3; only the channels that
have been enabled currently can be selected.
⚫ Click Offset to set the vertical offset of the operation results. For setting
methods, refer to the descriptions in "Parameter Setting Method".
⚫ Click Scale to set the vertical scale of the operation results. For setting methods,
refer to the descriptions in "Parameter Setting Method".
⚫ Click AutoSetting to adjust the vertical scale and offset of the operation results
to an optimal value based on the current configuration, so as to better observe.
⚫ Click More → A to set the value of A. Note that this parameter can only be set
by using the numeric keypad.
⚫ Click More → B to set the value of B. Note that this parameter can only be set
by using the numeric keypad.
⚫ Click More → Invert to enable or disable the inverted display function of the
waveform.
⚫ Click More → Label to set the label for math operation results. For details, refer
to descriptions in "Math Operation Label".
⚫ Click More → Color Grade to enable or disable the color grade display of the
operation results. When enabled, different colors are displayed on the screen to
indicate the times of data acquisition or acquisition probability.
⚫ Click More → Reset ColorGrade to clear the color grade display and display
the color grade again.
Math Operation Label
Click Label to enter the label setting menu.
⚫ Click Display continuously to enable or disable the label display of the
waveform. If it is enabled, the label will be displayed at the left side of the
Chapter 6 Operations and Measurements RIGOL
DS8000-R User Guide 6-23
waveform.
⚫ Click Library to select the preset waveform label, including ADD, SUB, MUL, DIV,
FFT, AND, OR, XOR, NOT, Intg, Diff, Sqrt, Lg, Ln, Exp, Abs, LPas, HPas, BPas,
BStop, and AX+B.
⚫ Click Label, and the label editing interface is automatically displayed. You can
input the label manually. For details, refer to descriptions in "Channel Label".
RIGOL Chapter 6 Operations and Measurements
6-24 DS8000-R User Guide
Auto Measurement
DS8000-R provides auto measurements for 41 waveform parameters, as well as the
statistics and analysis of the measurement results.
Quick Measurement after AUTO
When the oscilloscope is correctly connected and has detected a valid input signal,
click Auto in the Web Control mode to enable the waveform auto setting function
and open the auto setting function menu.
⚫
: Click this key, and then the complete single period of the signal is
displayed automatically on the screen. Meanwhile, the system will make
measurements for the "period" and the "frequency" of the currently displayed
waveforms in a complete single period. The measurement results are displayed
at the bottom of the screen.
⚫
: Click this key, and then multiple periods of the signal are displayed
automatically on the screen. Meanwhile, the system will make measurements
for the "period" and the "frequency" of the currently displayed waveforms in
multiple periods. The measurement results are displayed at the bottom of the
screen.
⚫ : Click this key, and then one rising edge of the signal is displayed
automatically on the screen. Meanwhile, the system will make measurements
for the "rise time" of the currently displayed rising edge. The measurement
results are displayed at the bottom of the screen. By default, it is intended for
the fast edge signal.
⚫
: Click this key, and then one falling edge of the signal is displayed
automatically on the screen. Meanwhile, the system will make measurements
for the "fall time" of the currently displayed falling edge. The measurement
results are displayed at the bottom of the screen. By default, it is intended for
the fast edge signal.
⚫
: Click this key, and the system returns to the last set menu.
⚫ Click Option to enter the auto setting function menu.
➢ Click Lock to lock the AUTO function. To unlock the AUTO function, use the
following two methods:
Method 1: Send the remote command :SYSTem:AUToscale ON to unlock the
AUTO function.
Method 2: Click Lock again, then a password input dialog box is displayed.
Input the password. By default, there is no password, and clicking OK
directly can unlock the function.
Chapter 6 Operations and Measurements RIGOL
DS8000-R User Guide 6-25
➢ Click Peak to Peak to enable or disable the peak-peak priority setting. This
function is intended for the shifted signal. If there is a large deviation, you
can view the signal waveform in priority when you enable the function.
➢ Click CH to select "All" or "Open".
If you select "All", click Auto and the system will test the 4 analog channels
(CH1-CH4) in sequence. If no signal is found on the channel, then the
channel is disabled; if a signal is found on the channel, adjust the channel
to an optimal scale to display the signal.
If you select "Open", click Auto and the system will only test the enabled
channels.
➢ Click Overlay to enable or disable the waveform overlay display function. If
enabled, waveforms of different channels will be displayed in the same
position of the screen; if disabled, waveforms of different channels will be
displayed on the screen from top to bottom in sequence.
➢ Click Coupling to enable or disable the coupling hold function. If enabled,
after you click Auto, the settings for the channel coupling remain
unchanged; if disabled, then the channel coupling is, by default, set to
"DC".
➢ Click Password, and then the password reset dialog box is displayed, as
shown in the figure below. You can reset the password.
⚫ : Click this key to cancel the auto setting and recovers to the parameter
settings prior to clicking the Auto key.
Note:
The waveform auto setting function requires that the frequency of the signal
should be greater than or equal to 35 Hz, the amplitude greater than or equal to 5
mV. If not meeting the conditions, the waveform auto setting function may be invalid.
Tip
If you lock the Auto function and then exit the auto setting function
menu, you can click on the function navigation icon to open the function
navigation, and click Utility → More → Auto Config to enter the auto
setting function menu again to unlock the Auto function.
RIGOL Chapter 6 Operations and Measurements
6-26 DS8000-R User Guide
Measurement Parameter
Click on the function navigation icon
to open the function navigation. Then click
on the Measure icon to enter the measurement setting menu. You can set the
measurement source, enable or disable the all measurement function, the statistical
analysis function, and etc. You can also quickly make measurements for 41 waveform
parameters. The measurement results will be displayed on the screen. The
measurement results on the screen are always marked in the same color as the
current measurement channel. You can also click the auto measurement label
"Measure" at the top of the screen to enter the measurement setting menu.
Note: If there is no signal input for the current source or the measurement result is
not within the valid range (too large or too small), then the measurement results are
invalid, and "*****" is displayed on the screen. Please re-input the signal or set the
signal.
Time Parameters
Figure 6-1 Time Parameters
1． Period: defined as the time between the middle threshold points of two
consecutive, like-polarity edges.
2
． Frequency: defined as the reciprocal of period.
3
． Rise Time: indicates the time for the signal amplitude to rise from the threshold
lower limit to the threshold upper limit.
4
． Fall Time: indicates the time for the signal amplitude to rise from the threshold
upper limit to the threshold lower limit.
5
． +Width: indicates the time between the threshold middle value of a rising edge
Fall Time
Threshold
Upper Limit
Threshold
Middle Value
Threshold
Lower Limit
+Width
-Width
Period
Rise Time
Chapter 6 Operations and Measurements RIGOL
DS8000-R User Guide 6-27
to the threshold middle value of the next falling edge.
6
． -Width: indicates the time between the threshold middle value of a falling edge
to the threshold middle value of the next rising edge.
7
． +Duty: indicates the ratio of the positive pulse width to the period.
8
． -Duty:indicates the ratio of the negative pulse width to the period.
9
． Tvmax: indicates the time that corresponds to the maximum value of the
waveform (Vmax).
10. Tvmin: indicates the time that corresponds to the minimum value of the
waveform (Vmin).
Note: The default values for threshold upper limit, threshold middle value, and
threshold low limit are 90%, 50%, and 10%, respectively. You can click Measure in
the function navigation menu, then click Setting to enter the sub-menu to set the
parameters.
Count Values
1
． Positive Pulse Count: The number of positive pulses that rise from under the
threshold lower limit to above the threshold upper limit.
2
． Negative Pulse Count: The number of negative pulses that fall from above
the threshold upper limit to below the threshold lower limit.
3
． Rising Edge Count: The number of rising edges that rise from under the
threshold lower limit to above the threshold upper limit.
Positive Pulse Count = n
1 2 n
Negative Pulse Count = n
1 2 n
Threshold Upper Limit
Threshold Lower Limit
Threshold Upper Limit
Threshold Lower Limit
RIGOL Chapter 6 Operations and Measurements
6-28 DS8000-R User Guide
4
． Falling Edge Count: The number of falling edges that fall from above the
threshold upper limit to below the threshold lower limit.
Note:
⚫ The above measurement items are only available for the analog channels.
⚫ The default values for threshold upper limit and threshold low limit are 90% and
10%, respectively. You can click Measure in the function navigation menu, then
click Setting to enter the sub-menu to set the parameters.
Delay and Phase
Source A
Source B
Period
Delay
1． Delay A →B : indicates the time difference between the threshold middle
values of the rising edge of Source A and that of Source B. Negative delay
indicates that the rising edge of Source A occurred after that of Source B.
2
． Delay A →B : indicates the time difference between the threshold middle
values of the falling edge of Source A and that of Source B. Negative delay
indicates that the falling edge of Source A occurred after that of Source B.
Rising Edge Count = n
1 2 n
Falling Edge Count = n
1 2 n
Threshold Upper Limit
Threshold Lower Limit
Threshold Upper Limit
Threshold Lower Limit
Chapter 6 Operations and Measurements RIGOL
DS8000-R User Guide 6-29
3． Delay A →B : indicates the time difference between the threshold middle
values of the rising edge of Source A and the falling edge of Source B. Negative
delay indicates that the rising edge of Source A occurred after the falling edge of
Source B.
4
． Delay A →B : indicates the time difference between the threshold middle
values of the falling edge of Source A and the rising edge of Source B. Negative
delay indicates that the falling edge of Source A occurred after the rising edge of
Source B.
5． Phase A →B : indicates the phase deviation between the threshold middle
values of the rising edge of Source A and that of Source B. It is expressed in
degree. The formula is as follows:
°360×=
sourceA
RR
RR
Period
BDelayA
BPhaseA
Wherein,
RR
BPhaseA
represents Phase A →B ,
RR
BDelayA
represents
Delay A
→B , and
sourceA
Period
represents period of Source A.
6． Phase A →B : indicates the phase deviation between the threshold middle
values of the falling edge of Source A and that of Source B. It is expressed in
degree. The formula is as follows:
°360×=
sourceA
FF
FF
Period
BDelayA
BPhaseA
Wherein,
FF
BPhaseA
represents Phase A →B ,
FF
BDelayA
represents
Delay A
→B , and
sourceA
Period
represents period of Source A.
7． Phase A →B : indicates the phase deviation between the threshold middle
values of the rising edge of Source A and falling edge of Source B. It is
expressed in degree. The formula is as follows:
°360×=
sourceA
FR
FR
Period
BDelayA
BPhaseA
Wherein,
FR
BPhaseA
represents Phase A →B ,
FR
BDelayA
represents
Delay A
→B , and
sourceA
Period
represents period of Source A.
8
． Phase A →B : indicates the phase deviation between the threshold middle
values of the falling edge of Source A and the rising edge of Source B. It is
expressed in degree. The formula is as follows:
°360×=
sourceA
RF
RF
Period
BDelayA
BPhaseA
Wherein,
RF
BPhaseA
represents Phase A →B ,
RF
BDelayA
represents
Delay A
→B , and
sourceA
Period
represents period of Source A.
RIGOL Chapter 6 Operations and Measurements
6-30 DS8000-R User Guide
Note:
⚫ Source A and Source B can be any channel selected from CH1-CH4 and
Math1-Math4. You can click Measure → Add to enter the sub-menu to set the
parameters.
⚫ The default threshold middle value is 50%. You can click Measure in the
function navigation menu, then click Setting to enter the sub-menu to set the
parameters.
Voltage Parameters
Figure 6-2 Voltage Parameters
1
． Vmax: indicates the voltage value from the highest point of the waveform to
the GND.
2
． Vmin: indicates the voltage value from the lowest point of the waveform to the
GND.
3
． Vpp: the voltage value from the highest point to the lowest point of the
waveform.
4
． Vtop: indicates the voltage value from the flat top of the waveform to the GND.
5
． Vbase: indicates the voltage value from the flat base of the waveform to the
GND.
6
． Vamp: indicates the voltage value from the top of the waveform to the base of
the waveform.
7
． Vupper: indicates the actual voltage value that corresponds to the threshold
maximum value.
8
． Vmid: indicates the actual voltage value that corresponds to the threshold
middle value.
9． Vlower: indicates the actual voltage value that corresponds to the threshold
minimum value.
Preshoot
Overshoot
Vamp
Vbase
Vmax
Vmin
Vpp
Vtop
Vupper
Vmid
Vlower
Chapter 6 Operations and Measurements RIGOL
DS8000-R User Guide 6-31
10. Vavg: indicates the arithmetic average value on the whole waveform or in the
gating area. The formula is shown as follows:
n
x
Average
n
i
i
∑
1=
=
Wherein,
i
x
is the measurement result of the
i
th point, and
n
is the number
of points being measured.
11. VRMS: indicates the root mean square value on the whole waveform or in the
gating area. The formula is as follows:
n
x
RMS
n
i
i
∑
1
2
=
=
Wherein,
i
x
is the measurement result of the
i
th point, and
n
is the number
of points being measured.
12. Per.VRMS: indicates the root mean square value within a period. The formula is
as shown above.
13. Overshoot: indicates the ratio of the difference between the maximum value
and the top value of the waveform to the amplitude value.
14. Preshoot: indicates the ratio of the difference between the minimum value and
the base value of the waveform to the amplitude value.
15. Std. Dev: indicates the root-mean-square value of the waveforms, with the DC
component removed. The formula is shown as follows:
n
Averagex
DevS
n
i
i
∑
1
2
)(
.td
=
−
=
Wherein,
i
x
is the amplitude of the
i
th point,
Average
is the waveform average
value, and
n
is the number of the points being measured.
Other Parameters
1
． Positive Slew Rate: On the rising edge, first calculate the difference between
the high value and the low value, then use the difference to divide the
corresponding time value to obtain the positive slew rate.
2
． Negative Slew Rate: On the falling edge, first calculate the difference
between the low value and the high value, then use the difference to divide the
corresponding time value to obtain the negative slew rate.
3
． Area: indicates the area of the whole waveform within the screen. The unit is
V*s. The area of the waveform above the zero reference (namely the vertical
offset) is positive, and the area of the waveform below the zero reference is
negative. The area measured is the algebraic sum of the area of the whole
waveform within the screen.
RIGOL Chapter 6 Operations and Measurements
6-32 DS8000-R User Guide
4． Period Area: indicates the area of the first period of waveform on the screen.
The unit is V*s. The area of the waveform above the zero reference (namely the
vertical offset) is positive, and the area of the waveform below the zero
reference is negative. The area measured is the algebraic sum of the whole
period area.
Measurement Settings
1
． Measurement Category
Click Measure → Add → Category to select "Horizontal", "Vertical", or "Other".
Meanwhile, the specific measurement parameters are displayed on the screen,
as shown in the figure below. In the measurement category area, you can click
to select "Horizontal", "Vertical", or "Other".
⚫ "Horizontal" measurement parameters: Period, Freq, RiseTime, FallTime,
+Width, -Width, +Duty, -Duty, +Pulses, -Pulses, +Edges, -Edges, Tvmax,
Tvmin, +SlewRate, and –SlewRate.
⚫ "Vertical" measurement parameters: Vmax, Vmin, Vpp, Vtop, Vbase, Vamp,
Vupper, Vmid, Vlower, Vavg, VRMS, Per.VRMS, Overshoot, Preshoot, Area,
Per.Area, and Std.Dev.
⚫ "Other" measurement parameters: Delay(A
→B ), Delay(A →B ),
Delay(A
→B ), Delay(A →B ), Phase(A →B ), Phase(A →B ),
Phase(A
→B ), and Phase(A →B ).
In the measurement parameter area, click to select a measurement item. Then
the measurement results of the item are displayed at the bottom of the screen
(measurement results of up to 10 items can be displayed at most). When you
add a new measurement item, its measurement result will be displayed as the
first, with the original items moving right in sequence. If the number of
measurement items added exceeds 10, then when you add one item, the
rightmost item at the bottom of the screen will be disabled.
Measurement Category Area Measurement Parameter Area
Chapter 6 Operations and Measurements RIGOL
DS8000-R User Guide 6-33
2
． Source Selection
For different measurement categories, the selection methods for measurement
sources are different.
⚫ Horizontal and vertical parameter measurement
Click Measure → Add → Source A to select the desired channel for
measurement. The available channels include CH1-CH4 and Math1-Math4.
⚫ Other (Delay and Phase) parameter measurement
Click Measure → Add → Source A (Source B) to set the two source
channels for the current measurement category. The available channels
include CH1-CH4 and Math1-Math4.
3． Indicator
Click Indicator continuously to enable or disable the indicator. You can also
Click Measure → Add → Indicator to enable or disable the indicator. For
details, refer to descriptions in "Measure Mode".
4
． Measurement Settings
Click Measure → Setting to enter the sub-menu of measurement.
⚫ Click Mode to select the measurement mode to "Normal" or
"Precision".
➢ Normal: executes measurement of up to 1 Mpts.
➢ Precision: executes measurement of up to 200 Mpts, improving the
resolution of measurement results. Note, in this mode, the refresh rate
of the waveforms may be reduced.
Note: When the memory depth is less than or equal to 1K points or the
"High Res" mode is opened, the "Precision" measurement mode will
automatically switch to the "Normal" measurement mode.
⚫ Click Type to select "Threshold", "Range", or "Amp Method".
➢ Select "Threshold", and then make the following settings:
--Click Source to select the desired channel for measurement
(CH1-CH4 or Math1-Math4).
Tip
In the measurement category area, click to select "Analyze". The following
figure is displayed. Select "Counter", "DVM", "Histogram", "Power" (required
to install the option DS8000-R-PWR), "Eye", or "Jitter" (required to install the
option DS8000-R-JITTER) to enter the corresponding function setting menu.
For descriptionsn about these functions, refer to relevant chapters.
RIGOL Chapter 6 Operations and Measurements
6-34 DS8000-R User Guide
--Click Upper to select "Upper(%)" or "Upper(Abs)" first, and then
click the key to set the upper limit of the measurement. For details,
refer to descriptions in "Parameter Setting Method". When the
upper limit is set to be smaller than or equal to the current middle
value, a prompt message "Set at lower limit" is displayed. Then,
the oscilloscope will automatically adjust the upper limit and make
it greater than the middle value. By default, it is 90%.
--Click Mid to select "Mid(%)" or "Mid(Abs)" first, and then click
the key to set the middle value of the measurement. For details,
refer to descriptions in "Parameter Setting Method". The
middle value is limited by the settings of the upper limit and lower
limit. By default, it is 50%.
--Click Lower to select "Lower(%)" or "Lower(Abs)" first, and
then click the key to set the lower limit of the measurement. For
details, refer to descriptions in "Parameter Setting Method".
When the lower limit is set to be greater than or equal to the
current middle value, a prompt message "Set at upper limit" is
displayed. Then, the oscilloscope will automatically adjust the
lower limit and make it smaller than the middle value. By default, it
is 10%.
--Click Default, and then the upper value, middle value, and lower
value will be restored to the defaults.
➢ Select "Range", and then click Region to select "Main", "Zoom",
or "Cursor".
--Main: indicates that the measurement range is within the main
time base region.
--Zoom: indicates that the measurement range is within the
zoomed time base region. Note: Only when you enable the
delayed sweep function first, can "Zoom" be enabled.
--Cursor: when you select it, two cursors will be displayed on the
screen. At this time, click CursorA and CursorB respectively to
adjust the positions of the two cursors to determine the
measurement range. Also, you can click CursorAB to adjust the
positions of the two cursors simultaneously.
➢ Select "Amp Method", and then click Amp Method to select
"Auto" or "Manual". This method affects the measurement method
for the top and base values. If you select "Manual", you need to
set the following parameters:
--Click Top to select "Histogram" or "Max-Min".
--Click Base to select "Histogram" or "Max-Min".
Chapter 6 Operations and Measurements RIGOL
DS8000-R User Guide 6-35
Remove the Measurement Result
This oscilloscope allows you to remove the measurement results of the parameters.
Click Measure → Remove to enter the "Remove" sub-menu.
⚫ Click Remove to remove the last added measurement item. Note that clicking
this key one time can only remove one measurement item. When you remove a
measurement item, the measurement result of the last added item at the
bottom of the screen will be removed.
⚫ Click Remove All to remove all the displayed measurement items.
⚫ Click Indicator to enable or disable the indicator.
Besides, you can also click Measure → Add → Remove to enter the "Remove"
sub-menu.
Statistical Function
Performs statistics and displays the measurement results (Cur, Avg, Max, Min, Dev,
and Cnt) of at most 10 items, as shown in the figure below.
Tip
⚫ Modifying the threshold will affect the measurement results of
the time, delay and phase parameters.
⚫ If you select "Manual" under Amp Method, the measurement
results of other parameters may be affected.
⚫ "Histogram" and "Max-Min" are the internal measurement
algorithm for the oscilloscope. The "Histogram" method here is
different from the Histogram function of the oscilloscope.
Tip
If the "Remove" sub-menu is not displayed in the current menu, when you select
a certain measurement item, the system will automatically enter the "Remove"
sub-menu.
RIGOL Chapter 6 Operations and Measurements
6-36 DS8000-R User Guide
Click Measure → Statistic to enter the sub-menu of "Statistic".
⚫ Click Statistic to enable or disable the statistical function.
⚫ Click Reset Stat. to clear the history statistics data and makes statistics again.
⚫ Click Count, then use the pop-up numeric keypad or scroll with the mouse to
set the count value. Its range is from 2 to 100000. By default, it is 1000.
All Measurement
All measurement could measure the time parameter, count value, voltage
parameters, and other parameters of the current measurement source and display
the results on the screen. Click Measure → All Measure to select "OFF" (disabling
the all measurement function) or select the desired channel for measurement
(CH1-CH4). If you select "CH1", data of all measurement parameters of CH1 are
displayed on the screen.
Note: The removal operation will not clear the measurement results of the
all-measurement function.
Cursor Measurement
Cursor measurement can measure the X-axis values (e.g. Time) and Y-axis values
(e.g. Voltage) of the selected waveform. Before making cursor measurement,
connect the signal to the oscilloscope to acquire stable display. All the parameters
supported by the "Auto Measurement" function can be measured with cursor
measurement. The cursor measurement function provides the following two cursors.
⚫ X Cursor
X cursor is a vertical solid/dotted line that is used to make horizontal
adjustments. It can be used to measure time (s), frequency (Hz), phase (°), and
Y Cursor (Cursor B)
Y Cursor (Cursor A)
X Cursor (Cursor A)
X Cursor (Cursor B)
Chapter 6 Operations and Measurements RIGOL
DS8000-R User Guide 6-37
ratio (%).
➢ Cursor A is a vertical solid line (
is displayed at the bottom of the screen),
and Cursor B is a vertical dotted line (
is displayed at the bottom of the
screen).
➢ In the X-Y cursor mode, X cursor is used to measure the waveform
amplitude of CH1.
⚫ Y Cursor
Y cursor is a horizontal solid/dotted line that is used to make vertical adjustment.
It can be used to measure amplitude (the unit is the same as that of the source
channel amplitude) and ratio (%).
➢ Cursor A is a horizontal solid line (
is displayed at the right section of the
screen), and Cursor B is a horizontal dotted line (
is displayed at the
right section of the screen).
➢ In the X-Y cursor mode, Y cursor is used to measure the waveform
amplitude of CH2.
Click on the function navigation icon at the lower-left corner of the screen to
open the function navigation. Then click on the cursor icon
to open the cursor
measurement menu.
In the cursor measurement menu, click Mode to select the desired cursor mode. The
available modes are "Manual", "Track", "XY", and "Measure". When you select "OFF",
the cursor measurement function is disabled.
Note: When the Time Base Mode is set to "XY", the XY cursor measurement mode is
valid.
Manual Mode
In this mode, you can adjust the cursor manually to measure the value of the
waveforms of the specified source at the current cursor. The measurement results
are displayed at the upper-left corner of the screen. When you change the cursor
position, the measurement results will be changed accordingly.
Click Mode to select "Manual" to enable the manual cursor measurement function. If
the settings for the parameter such as "Select", "Source", "Hori. Unit", and "Vert.
Unit" are different, the measurement results will be different for cursor measurement.
The measurement results are displayed at the upper-left corner of the screen, as
shown in the figure below.
RIGOL Chapter 6 Operations and Measurements
6-38 DS8000-R User Guide
⚫ AX: indicates the X value at Cursor A.
⚫ AY: indicates the Y value at Cursor A.
⚫ BX: indicates the X value at Cursor B.
⚫ BY: indicates the Y value at Cursor B.
⚫ △X: indicates the horizontal spacing between Cursor A and Cursor B.
⚫ △Y: indicates the vertical spacing between Cursor A and Cursor B.
⚫ 1/△X: indicates the reciprocal of the horizontal spacing between Cursor A and
Cursor B.
1. Select Cursor Type
Click Select continuously to select the cursor type.
⚫ X: It is a pair of vertical solid (Cursor A)/dotted (Cursor B) lines, used for
measuring time parameters. The measurement results include AX, BX, △X,
and 1/△X (displayed only when "s" or "Hz" is selected under Hori. Unit).
⚫ Y: It is a pair of horizontal solid (Cursor A)/dotted (Cursor B) lines, used for
measuring voltage parameters. The measurement results include AY, BY,
and △Y.
2. Select Measurement Source
Click Source to select the desired source (CH1-CH4). The available source
channels are None, CH1-CH4, and Math1-Math4.
Note: Only channels currently enabled can be selected.
3. Adjust Cursor Position
1) When "X" is selected under Select, you can adjust the position of X cursor.
⚫ Click AX to adjust the horizontal position of Cursor A (X cursor). Its
adjustable range is limited within the screen.
⚫ Click BX to adjust the horizontal position of Cursor B (X cursor). Its
adjustable range is limited within the screen.
⚫ Click AX BX and then scroll with the mouse to adjust the horizontal
position of Cursor A and Cursor B (X cursors) simultaneously. Its
adjustable range is limited within the screen. The horizontal spacing
between Cursor A and Cursor B (X cursors) remains unchanged.
2) When "Y" is selected under Select, you can adjust the position of Y cursor.
⚫ Click AY to adjust the vertical position of Cursor A (Y cursor).
⚫ Click BY to adjust the vertical position of Cursor B (Y cursor).
⚫ Click AY BY and then scroll with the mouse to adjust the vertical
position of Cursor A and Cursor B (Y cursors) simultaneously. The
Chapter 6 Operations and Measurements RIGOL
DS8000-R User Guide 6-39
vertical spacing between Cursor A and Cursor B (Y cursors) remains
unchanged.
4. Select Screen Region
⚫ When the delayed sweep function is disabled, click More, and "Main" is
automatically selected under Region and cannot be modified.
⚫ When the delayed sweep function is enabled, the screen is divided into two
regions: main time base and zoomed time base. Click Region continuously
to select "Main" or "Zoom".
➢ When "Main" is selected, the cursor is displayed in the main time base
region, and you can measure the parameters in the main time base
region.
➢ When "Zoom" is selected, the cursor is displayed in the zoomed time
base region, and you can measure the parameters in the zoomed time
base region.
5. Set the Horizontal/Vertical Measurement Unit
⚫ When "X" is selected under Select, you can set the horizontal measurement
unit. When the source can be Math1-Math4, this menu is grayed out and
disabled.
Click More → Hori. Unit to select the horizontal measurement unit. The
available units include "s", "Hz", "Degree(°)", and "Percent(%)".
➢ s: measures the time value at X Cursor (taking the trigger position as
reference). The measurement results include AX, BX, △X, and 1/△X.
Wherein, AX, BX, and △X all indicate time, and 1/△X indicates
frequency.
➢ Hz: measures the frequency value at X Cursor (taking the trigger
position as reference). The measurement results include AX, BX, △X,
and 1/△X. Wherein, AX, BX, and △X all indicate frequency, and 1/△X
indicates time.
➢ Degree(°): measures the phase value at X Cursor. The measurement
results include AX, BX, and △X, and they are all expressed in degree.
This oscilloscope allows you to set the reference position for the phase
according to your needs. After adjusting X Cursor to a desired position,
click Set Reference to take the current cursor position as the
reference. The current positions of Cursor A and Cursor B are
respectively defined as "0°" and "360°". Meanwhile, two vertical
cursors (in blue) that cannot be moved are displayed on the screen as
the phase reference position (the phase position at "0°" and "360°" are
respectively marked by a solid line and a dotted line). Before you set
manually, the oscilloscope adopts the default phase reference position.
➢ Percent(%): measures ratio at X Cursor. The measurement results
include AX, BX, and △X, and they are all expressed in percentage. This
oscilloscope allows you to set the reference position for the ratio
according to your needs. After adjusting X Cursor to a desired position,
RIGOL Chapter 6 Operations and Measurements
6-40 DS8000-R User Guide
click Set Reference to take the current cursor position as the
reference. The current positions of Cursor A and Cursor B are
respectively defined as "0%" and "100%". Meanwhile, two cursors (in
blue) that cannot be moved are displayed on the screen as the ratio
reference position (the ratio position at "0%" and "100%" are
respectively marked by a solid line and a dotted line). Before you set
manually, the oscilloscope adopts the default ratio reference position.
⚫ When "Y" is selected under Select, you can set the vertical measurement
unit. When the source can be Math1-Math4, this menu is grayed out and
disabled.
Click More → Vert. Unit to select the vertical measurement unit. The
available units include "Source" and "Percent(%)".
➢ Source: measures the amplitude at Y Cursor (taking the channel
ground point as the reference). The measurement results include AY,
BY, and △Y (its unit is consistent with that of the current source).
➢ Percent(%): measures ratio at Y Cursor. The measurement results
include AY, BY, and △Y, and they are all expressed in percentage.
This oscilloscope allows you to set the reference position for the ratio
according to your needs. After adjusting Y Cursor to a desired position,
click Set Reference to take the current cursor position as the
reference. The current positions of Cursor A and Cursor B are
respectively defined as "0%" and "100%". Meanwhile, two cursors (in
blue) that cannot be moved are displayed on the screen as the ratio
reference position (the ratio position at "0%" and "100%" are
respectively marked by a solid line and a dotted line). Before you set
manually, the oscilloscope adopts the default ratio reference position.
6. Measurement Example
Measure the period of a sine wave by using the manual cursor measurement
and auto measurement respectively. The measurement results are both 1 ms, as
shown in Figure 6-3.
Chapter 6 Operations and Measurements RIGOL
DS8000-R User Guide 6-41
Figure 6-3 Manual Cursor Measurement Example
Track Mode
In this mode, you can adjust the two pairs of cursors (Cursor A and Cursor B) to
measure the X and Y values on two different sources respectively. The points being
measured on Cursor A and Cursor B are marked by and respectively. When
the cursors are moved horizontally/vertically, the markers will position on the
waveform automatically. When the waveform is expanded or compressed
horizontally/vertically, the markers will track the points being marked at the last
adjustment of the cursors.
Note: When the delayed sweep function is enabled, the track cursor is within the
expanded area.
Click Mode to select "Track" to enable the cursor track function, and the
measurement results will be displayed at the upper-left corner of the screen, as
shown in the following figure. When you change the measurement parameter for the
track mode, the measurement results will be changed accordingly.
⚫ AX: indicates the X value at Cursor A.
⚫ AY: indicates the Y value at Cursor A.
⚫ BX: indicates the X value at Cursor B.
Auto
Measurement
Cursor
Measurement
RIGOL Chapter 6 Operations and Measurements
6-42 DS8000-R User Guide
⚫ BY: indicates the Y value at Cursor B.
⚫ △X: indicates the horizontal spacing between Cursor A and Cursor B.
⚫ △Y: indicates the vertical spacing between Cursor A and Cursor B.
⚫ 1/△X: indicates the reciprocal of the horizontal spacing between Cursor A and
Cursor B.
1. Select Measurement Source
⚫ Click AX Source to select the desired measurement source. The available
source channels are None, CH1-CH4, and Math1-Math4.
⚫ Click BX Source to select the desired source. The available source
channels are None, CH1-CH4, and Math1-Math4.
Note: Only channels currently enabled can be selected.
2. Select the Track Axis
Click Track to select "X" or "Y" as the current track axis. The default is "X".
⚫ X: tracks X Cursor and measures the value at X Cursor.
⚫ Y: tracks Y Cursor and measures the time of the first point at the left side of
the screen.
3. Adjust Cursor Position
1) When "X" is selected under Track, you can adjust the position of X cursor.
⚫ Click AX and drag/scroll the mouse to adjust the horizontal position of
Cursor A (X cursor). Its adjustable range is limited within the screen.
⚫ Click BX and drag/scroll the mouse to adjust the horizontal position of
Cursor B (X cursor). Its adjustable range is limited within the screen.
⚫ Click AX BX and drag/scroll the mouse to adjust the horizontal position
of Cursor A and Cursor B (X cursors) simultaneously. Its adjustable
range is limited within the screen. The horizontal spacing between
Cursor A and Cursor B (X cursors) remains unchanged.
2) When "Y" is selected under Track, you can adjust the position of Y cursor.
⚫ Click AY and drag/scroll the mouse to adjust the vertical position of
Cursor A (Y cursor).
⚫ Click BY and drag/scroll the mouse to adjust the vertical position of
Cursor B (Y cursor).
⚫ Click AY BY and drag/scroll the mouse to adjust the vertical position of
Cursor A and Cursor B (Y cursors) simultaneously. The vertical spacing
between Cursor A and Cursor B (Y cursors) remains unchanged.
Note: In track mode, the horizontal cursor (or vertical cursor) will track the
marked point in a timely manner (i.g, the cursor will move up and down with the
transient change of the waveform). Thus, the X value (or Y value) might change
even though you do not adjust the cursor.
4. Measurement Example
Measure the waveforms of CH1 and CH2 with Cursor A and Cursor B,
Chapter 6 Operations and Measurements RIGOL
DS8000-R User Guide 6-43
respectively. Then, expand the waveforms horizontally, and you will find that the
cursor will track the point that has been marked, as shown in the following
figure.
Track Measurement (before Horizontal Expansion):
Track Measurement (after Horizontal Expansion):
XY Mode
XY mode is only available when the horizontal time base mode is "XY" (refer to
"Timebase Mode"). In this mode, two pairs of cursors will appear. You can adjust
the cursor positions to measure the X and Y values at the crossing points of the two
pairs of cursors.
Click Mode to select "XY" to enable the XY cursor measurement function. The
measurement results are displayed at the upper-left corner of the screen, as shown
in the following figure.
RIGOL Chapter 6 Operations and Measurements
6-44 DS8000-R User Guide
⚫ AX: indicates the X value at Cursor A.
⚫ AY: indicates the Y value at Cursor A.
⚫ BX: indicates the X value at Cursor B.
⚫ BY: indicates the Y value at Cursor B.
⚫ △X: indicates the horizontal spacing between Cursor A and Cursor B.
⚫ △Y: indicates the vertical spacing between Cursor A and Cursor B.
1. Adjust Cursor Position
⚫ Click AX to adjust the X value at Cursor A.
⚫ Click BX to adjust the X value at Cursor B.
⚫ Click AY to adjust the Y value at Cursor A.
⚫ Click BY to adjust the Y value at Cursor B.
⚫ Click More → ABX, then drag or scroll with the mouse to adjust the X value
at Cursor A and the X value at Cursor B simultaneously.
⚫ Click More → ABY, then drag or scroll with the mouse to adjust the Y value
at Cursor A and the Y value at Cursor B simultaneously.
During the adjustment, the measurement results will change accordingly. The
adjustable range is limited within the screen.
2. Display Lissajous Legend
This oscilloscope provides the Lissajous schematic diagram under different
frequencies and phase deviation, as shown in Figure 6-4. Click More →
Lissajous, then the Lissajous schematic diagram is displayed.
Figure 6-4 Lissajous Schematic Diagram
Measure Mode
Click Mode to select "Measure". In this mode, the cursor position for measurement is
displayed.
Phase deviation
between two signals
Frequency ratio
between two signals
Chapter 6 Operations and Measurements RIGOL
DS8000-R User Guide 6-45
Click Indicator continuously to enable or disable the indicator. If it is enabled, one
or multiple cursors are displayed on the screen. Before enabling the indicator, you
need to enable at least one parameter for auto measurement. The number of cursors
will change along with the enabled measurement parameters.
Note: If no measurement parameter is selected or no measurement source is input,
no cursor is displayed. When you expand or compress the waveforms horizontally,
the cursor will change accordingly.
Chapter 7 Digital Voltmeter (DVM) and Frequency Counter RIGOL
DS8000-R User Guide 7-1
Chapter 7 Digital Voltmeter (DVM) and
Frequency Counter
DS8000-R series oscilloscope provides a built-in digital voltmeter (DVM) and
frequency counter, which enable you to perform an accurate measurement,
improving user experience in counter and frequency measurement.
Contents in this chapter:
◼ Digital Voltmeter (DVM)
◼ Frequency Counter
RIGOL Chapter 7 Digital Voltmeter (DVM) and Frequency Counter
7-2 DS8000-R User Guide
Digital Voltmeter (DVM)
The built-in DVM of this oscilloscope provides 3-digit voltage measurements on any
analog channel. DVM measurements are asynchronous from the oscilloscope’s
acquisition system and are always acquiring.
The following methods are available for you to enter the DVM setting menu:
⚫ Click on the function navigation icon
at the lower-left corner of the screen
to open the function navigation. Click on the "DVM" icon to enter the DVM
setting menu.
⚫ Click on the function navigation icon
at the lower-left corner of the screen
to open the function navigation. Click on the "Measure" icon
to enter the
"Measure" menu. Click Analyze → DVM to enter the DVM setting menu.
⚫ Click on the function navigation icon
at the lower-left corner of the screen
to open the function navigation. Click on the "Measure" icon to enter the
"Measure" menu. Then click Add. In the displayed measurement category area,
click to select "Analyze", and then select "DVM" to open the DVM setting menu.
⚫ Click on the "MEASURE" label at the top of the screen, then click the "Analyze"
tab to select "DVM" to open the DVM setting menu.
To Enable or Disable DVM Measurement
In the "DVM" setting menu, click DVM continuously to enable or disable DVM
measurement. When enabled, the following figure is displayed. The DVM display also
has a scale that is determined by the channel's vertical scale and vertical offset. The
scale range is the range of the screen. The scale's yellow triangle pointer shows the
most recent measurement result. The specific value above the pointer shows the
real-time voltage value.
Note: DVM measurement and the oscilloscope share the same probe, so the unit for
the DVM measurement is consistent with that of the channel.
Pointer Scale
Source Mode Voltage Value
Chapter 7 Digital Voltmeter (DVM) and Frequency Counter RIGOL
DS8000-R User Guide 7-3
To Select the Measurement Source
Click Source in the "DVM" setting menu to select the desired source. The analog
channel (CH1-CH4) can be selected to be the measurement source.
Note: Even if the analog channel (CH1-CH4) is not enabled, you can still perform the
DVM measurement.
To Select Measurement Mode
Click Mode in the "DVM" setting menu to select the desired mode. The DVM
measurement modes include AC RMS, DC, and AC+DC RMS.
⚫ AC RMS: displays the root-mean-square value of the acquired data, with the DC
component removed.
⚫ DC: displays the average value of the acquired data.
⚫ AC+DC RMS: displays the root-mean-square value of the acquired data.
To Set the Limits
Click Limits to enter the sub-menu of Limits. Then set the following parameters.
⚫ Beeper
Click Beeper continuously to enable or disable the beeper.
⚫ Limits Condition Setting
Click When to select the desired limit setting condition. The limits conditions
include "In Limits" and "Out Limits".
➢ In Limits: when the voltage value is within the limits, you can enable or
disable the beeper to sound an alarm.
➢ Out Limits: when the voltage value is outside of the limits, you can enable
or disable the beeper to sound an alarm.
⚫ Upper/Lower Limit Setting
Click Upper, then use the pop-up numeric keypad or scroll with the mouse to
set the upper limit of the voltage.
Click Lower, then use the pop-up numeric keypad or scroll with the mouse to
set the lower limit of the voltage.
RIGOL Chapter 7 Digital Voltmeter (DVM) and Frequency Counter
7-4 DS8000-R User Guide
Frequency Counter
The frequency counter analysis function provides frequency, period, or edge event
counter measurements on any analog channel.
The following methods are available for you to enter the frequency counter setting
menu:
⚫ Click on the function navigation icon
at the lower-left corner of the screen
to open the function navigation. Click on the "Counter" icon to enter the
frequency counter setting menu.
⚫ Click on the "MEASURE" label at the top of the screen, then click the "Analyze"
tab to select "Counter" to open the frequency counter setting menu.
⚫ Click on the function navigation icon , then select Measure, then click Add.
In the displayed measurement category area, click to select "Analyze", and then
select "Counter" to open the frequency counter setting menu.
To Enable or Disable the Frequency Counter
In the "Counter" setting menu, click Counter continuously to enable or disable the
frequency counter measurement. When enabled, the following figure is displayed.
To Select the Measurement Source
Click Source to select the desired source. The analog channels (CH1-CH4) and EXT
can all be selected as the source of the frequency counter.
To Select the Measurement Item
The measurement items supported by the frequency counter of this oscilloscope
include Frequency, Period, and Totalize measurements. Wherein, Totalize indicates
the count of edge events on the signal.
Click Measure in the "Counter" menu to select the desired measurement item.
Source Measurement Item Value
Chapter 7 Digital Voltmeter (DVM) and Frequency Counter RIGOL
DS8000-R User Guide 7-5
To Set Resolution
For Period and Frequency measurements, you need to set the readout resolution.
Click Resolution, then use the pop-up numeric keypad or scroll with the mouse to
set the resolution. The range of resolution is from 3 bits to 6 bits. By default, it is 5
bits.
Note: The greater the resolution, the longer the gate time. In this way, the
measurement time will be longer.
To Clear Count
When "Totalize" is selected under Measure, the oscilloscope measures the count of
edge events on the signal. At this time, click Clear Count to clear the measurement
results.
To Enable or Disable the Statistical Function
For Period and Frequency measurements, enable the frequency counter statistical
function. Click Statistic continuously to enable or disable the statistical function.
When enabled, the maximum value and minimum value will be displayed in the
frequency counter data, as shown in the following figure.
Statistics
Chapter 8 Power Analysis (Option) RIGOL
DS8000-R User Guide 8-1
Chapter 8 Power Analysis (Option)
DS8000-R series oscilloscope provides an optional power analysis function, which
can help you easily analyze the efficiency and reliability of the switch-mode power
supplies. With the power analysis function, you can analyze the power quality and
output ripple noise of the input power.
Contents in this chapter:
◼ Power Quality
◼ Ripple
RIGOL Chapter 8 Power Analysis (Option)
8-2 DS8000-R User Guide
Power Quality
By analyzing the power quality, you can test the quality of AC input lines. The specific
measurement parameters for power quality analysis include V_RMS, I_RMS, real
power, apparent power, reactive power, power factor, reference frequency, phase
angle, impedance, voltage crest factor, and current crest factor.
The following methods are available for you to enter the power quality setting menu:
⚫ Click on the function navigation icon
at the lower-left corner of the screen
to open the function navigation. Click on the "Power" icon to enter the
power analysis setting menu.
⚫ Click on the "MEASURE" label at the top of the screen, then click the "Analyze"
tab to select "Power" to open the power analysis setting menu.
⚫ Click on the function navigation icon , then select Measure, then click Add.
In the displayed measurement category area, click to select "Analyze", and then
select "Power" to open the power analysis setting menu.
To Select the Analysis Type
In the power analysis setting menu, click Analysis Type to select "Power Quality".
To Set the Power Quality Analysis Source
In the power analysis setting menu, click Source to enter the source setting menu.
⚫ Click Voltage to select the channel (CH1-CH4) for acquiring voltage.
⚫ Click Current to select the channel (CH1-CH4) for acquiring current.
⚫ Click Freq. Ref continuously to select "Voltage" or "Current" as the frequency
reference.
To Set the Reference Level
In the power analysis setting menu, click Ref Levels (level of the frequency
reference channel) to enter the reference level setting menu.
⚫ Click Type to set the reference level display type to "Percent(%)" or "Absolute".
⚫ Click Upper, then use the pop-up numeric keypad or scroll with the mouse to
set the upper limit value.
⚫ Click Mid, then use the pop-up numeric keypad or scroll with the mouse to set
the middle value. The middle value is limited by the settings of the upper limit
and lower limit.
⚫ Click Lower, then use the pop-up numeric keypad or scroll with the mouse to
set the lower limit.
Chapter 8 Power Analysis (Option) RIGOL
DS8000-R User Guide 8-3
⚫ Click Default, and then the upper value, middle value, and lower value will be
restored to the defaults.
To Set Count
Click Count, then use the pop-up numeric keypad to set the number of statistical
times for power quality analysis. Its range is from 2 to 5000. By default, it is 1000.
To Reset
Click Reset Stat. to clear the current data and execute statistics on the
measurement results again.
To Open or Close the Results Display Window
Click Display continuously to enable or disable the display of the results.
When enabled, the statistical results will be displayed on the screen, as shown in the
figure below. Click on the icon
at the right-upper corner of the statistical results
window to close it.
Note: If you select "ON" under Display, the multiplication operation will be enabled
in the Math operation.
To View the Connection Diagram
Click Tips, and then the connection diagram of the power quality analysis is
displayed on the screen. Please connect the cables according to the connection
method as shown in Figure 8-1. Click Tips again or click on the icon at the
right-upper corner of the connection diagram window to close it.
RIGOL Chapter 8 Power Analysis (Option)
8-4 DS8000-R User Guide
Figure 8-1 Connection Diagram of Power Quality Analysis
Ripple
Power ripple is an important parameter for evaluating DC power supply, which
indicates the ripple quantity of the output DC voltage. The ripple analysis can
measure the current value, average value, minimum value, maximum value,
standard deviation, and count value of the ripples on the power output terminal.
Note: The 1X probe is recommended for the ripple measurement. For example,
PVP2150 or PVP2350.
To Select the Analysis Type
In the power analysis setting menu, click Analysis Type to select "Ripple".
To Set the Ripple Analysis Source
In the power analysis setting menu, click Source to select the ripple analysis source
(CH1-CH4).
To Set Count
Click Count, then use the pop-up numeric keypad to set the number of statistical
times for ripple analysis. Its range is from 2 to 5000. By default, it is 1000.
To Reset
Click Reset Stat. to clear the current data and execute statistics on the
measurement results again.
Chapter 8 Power Analysis (Option) RIGOL
DS8000-R User Guide 8-5
To Open or Close the Results Display Window
Click Display continuously to enable or disable the display of the results.
When enabled, the statistical results will be displayed on the screen, as shown in the
figure below. You can also click on the icon
at the right-upper corner of the
statistical results window to close it.
To View the Connection Diagram
Click Tips, and then the connection diagram of the ripple analysis is displayed on the
screen. Please connect the cables according to the connection method as shown in
Figure 8-2. Click Tips again or click on the icon at the right-upper corner of the
connection diagram window to close it.
Figure 8-2 Connection Diagram of Ripple Analysis
Chapter 9 Histogram Analysis RIGOL
DS8000-R User Guide 9-1
Chapter 9 Histogram Analysis
DS8000-R series oscilloscope supports the histogram analysis function, enabling you
to judge the trend of waveforms, and quickly locate the potential problems of the
signal.
Contents in this chapter:
◼ To Enable or Disable the Histogram Function
◼ To Select the Histogram Type
◼ To Select the Histogram Source
◼ To Select the Measurement Item
◼ To Set the Histogram Height
◼ To Set the Histogram Range
◼ To Enable or Disable the Statistical Function
◼ To Reset
RIGOL Chapter 9 Histogram Analysis
9-2 DS8000-R User Guide
To Enable or Disable the Histogram Function
The histogram analysis function supported by the DS8000-R series is available to
provide a statistical view of waveforms or measurement results. It can be classified
into horizontal histogram, vertical histogram, measurement histogram, and jitter
histogram (available only when the sub-menu Histogram under Measure in the
Jitter menu is enabled). With the on-going acquisition and measurement of the
waveforms, the height of the bar graph will change within the set range of the
histogram window to indicate the number of times for data statistics.
You can enter the "Histogram" setting menu through the following methods:
⚫ Click on the function navigation icon at the lower-left corner of the screen to
open the function navigation. Then, click on the "Histogram" icon , and then
the histogram setting menu is displayed at the right section of the screen.
⚫ Click on the function navigation icon , then select Measure. In the displayed
menu, select Analyze → Histogram to enter the "Histogram" setting menu.
⚫ Click on the function navigation icon , and select Measure. Then click Add.
In the displayed measurement category area, click to select "Analyze", and then
select "Histogram" to open the "Histogram" setting menu.
⚫ Click the auto measurement label "MEASURE" at the top of the screen to enter
the measurement setting menu. In the measurement category area, click to
select the "Analyze" tab and select "Histogram" to enter the "Histogram" setting
menu.
⚫ Refer to descriptions in "Rectangle Drawing" to enter the "Histogram" setting
menu.
Click Enable continuously to enable or disable the histogram analysis function.
To Select the Histogram Type
The histogram includes the following types:
⚫ Horizontal: displays the number of times for statistics making in the forms of
columns in the histogram bar graph at the bottom of the graticule.
⚫ Vertical: displays the number of times for statistics making in the forms of rows
in the histogram bar graph at the left of the graticule.
⚫ Measure: displays the number of times for statistics of the measurement results
in the forms of columns in the histogram bar graph at the bottom of the
graticule.
Tip
To record peaks or glitches in the histogram data, please always enable the
histogram function.
Chapter 9 Histogram Analysis RIGOL
DS8000-R User Guide 9-3
⚫ Jitter: displays the number of times for statistics of the jitter measurement
results in the forms of columns in the histogram bar graph at the bottom of the
graticule.
The parameters for the jitter histogram are required to be set in the Jitter menu.
For detailed operations, refer to "To Set the Jitter Measurement". The jitter
type is only available when the sub-menu Histogram under Measure in the
Jitter menu is enabled.
Click Type to select the desired histogram type.
To Select the Histogram Source
If "Horizontal" or "Vertical" is selected under Type, you need to set the source
(CH1-CH4). Click Source to select the desired source.
To Select the Measurement Item
⚫ When you select "Measure" as the histogram type, click Measure → Add or
click the auto measurement label "MEASURE" at the top of the screen to enter
the measurement setting menu, and then add one or multiple measurement
items. At this time, the added measurement item(s) can be served as the
measurement histogram source(s) and displayed in the Item menu.
⚫ When "Jitter" is selected as the histogram type, please first click on the
navigation icon to open the function navigation. Then click Jitter → Measure
→ Item to select the measurement item. At this time, the selected item is
shown in the Item menu.
To Set the Histogram Height
The histogram height indicates the number of grids the histogram bar graph should
occupy on the screen. Click Height, then use the pop-up numeric keypad to set the
height. The available range of height is from 1 to 4. By default, it is 2.
To Set the Histogram Range
When "Horizontal" or "Vertical" is selected under Type, you need to set the window
range. Set "Left Limit", "Right Limit", "Top Limit", and "Bottom Limit" respectively to
adjust the size and position of the histogram window. Click Range to enter the
sub-menu of histogram range. Then click the corresponding key to scroll with the
mouse to set their values.
RIGOL Chapter 9 Histogram Analysis
9-4 DS8000-R User Guide
Note: The adjustment for the horizontal time base and vertical scale will not affect
the time base of the histogram range, but only shows variation with the scale.
To Enable or Disable the Statistical Function
Click Statistic to enable or disable the statistical function. When the statistical
function is enabled, the statistical results of the histogram data will be displayed, as
shown in the following figure. Note that when you select "Measure" under Type, the
statistical data results also include the parameter XScale.
⚫ Sum: indicates the sum of all bins (buckets) in the histogram.
⚫ Peaks: indicates the maximum number of hits in any single bin.
⚫ Max: indicates the value that corresponds to the maximum bin that has any hits.
⚫ Min: indicates the value that corresponds to the minimum bin that has any hits.
⚫ Pk_Pk: indicates the Delta between the max. value and the min. value.
⚫ Mean: indicates the average value of the histogram.
⚫ Median: indicates the median value of the histogram.
⚫ Mode: indicates the mode value of the histogram.
⚫ Bin width: indicates the width of each bin (bucket) in the histogram.
⚫ Sigma: indicates the standard deviation of the histogram.
To Reset
Click Reset to reset the statistical data and restart to make statistics.
Chapter 10 Real-time Eye Diagram and Jitter Analysis (Option) RIGOL
DS8000-R User Guide 10-1
Chapter 10 Real-time Eye Diagram and
Jitter Analysis (Option)
The DS8000-R series oscilloscope provides the real-time eye plot and measurement
with the clock recovery function. The flexible and convenient jitter measurement and
analysis enable the users to instinctively understand the strong and weak
Inter-Symbol Interference in the system, so as to accurately and quickly make
deterministic jitter measurement for high-speed serial signal.
If you have purchased and activated the DS8000-R-JITTER option, the oscilloscope
also supports real-time eye diagram and jitter analysis functions.
Note: The DS8000-R-JITTER option is not available for DS8034-R. Therefore, the
real-time eye diagram and jitter analysis functions mentioned in this chapter are not
available for DS8034-R.
Contents in this chapter:
◼ Real-time Eye Analysis
◼ Jitter Analysis
RIGOL Chapter 10 Real-time Eye Diagram and Jitter Analysis (Option)
10-2 DS8000-R User Guide
Real-time Eye Analysis
An eye diagram is a view of a signal. A real- time eye accomplishes this by acquiring
data, performing clock recovery, and then superimposing (folding) successive unit
intervals within a single plot. This is a statistical view in the form of a color grade. The
eye analysis function is usually used to observe the waveforms of the Receive signal
to analyze the impact of inter-symbol interference (ISI) and noise on the system
performance.
Note: The eye diagram can only be obtained when the horizontal time base is less
than or equal to 100 ns/div.
You can go to the "Eye" setting menu through the following ways:
⚫ Click on the function navigation icon at the lower-left corner of the screen to
open the function navigation. Then, click on the "Eye" icon to open the
"Eye" setting menu.
⚫ Click on function navigation icon at the lower-left corner of the screen to
open the function navigation. Then, click Measure → Analyze → Eye
Analysis to enter the "Eye" setting menu.
⚫ Click on the function navigation icon , and select Measure. Then click Add.
In the displayed measurement category area, click to select "Analyze", and then
select "Eye" to open the "Eye" setting menu.
⚫ Click the auto measurement label "MEASURE" at the top of the screen to enter
the measurement setting menu. In the measurement category area, click the
"Analyze" tab to select the "Eye" option to enter the "Eye" setting menu.
To Enable or Disable the Eye Analysis Function
In the "Eye" setting menu, click the Enable key continuously to enable or disable the
eye diagram analysis function.
To Select the Eye Source
Click Source in the "Eye" setting menu to select the desired eye source. The analog
channel (CH1-CH4) can be selected as the eye source.
To Set the Threshold
In the "Eye" setting menu, click Threshold to enter the threshold setting menu.
Chapter 10 Real-time Eye Diagram and Jitter Analysis (Option) RIGOL
DS8000-R User's Guide 10-3
⚫ Set the high threshold
Click HighThres, then use the pop-up numeric keypad to set the high
threshold.
Note: If you reduce the high threshold to a value below the set middle
threshold, the oscilloscope will automatically adjust the high threshold to
make it greater than the middle threshold.
⚫ Set the middle threshold
Click MidThres, then use the pop-up numeric keypad to set the middle
threshold.
Note: The middle threshold is limited by the set low threshold and high
threshold.
⚫ Set the low threshold
Click LowThres, then use the pop-up numeric keypad to set the low threshold.
Note: If you increase the low threshold to a value above the set middle
threshold, the oscilloscope will automatically adjust the low threshold to
make it smaller than the middle threshold.
To Set Clock Recovery
The clock recovery provides an ideal clock for comparison to actual signal edges.
In the "Eye" setting menu, click Clock Recovery to enter the clock recovery menu.
This oscilloscope supports several clock recovery methods, including constant clock,
phase-locked loop (PLL), and external clock.
1. Setting method for constant clock recovery
Click RecoveryType to select "Constant".
⚫ Set the data rate type
The data rate type for Constant includes Manual, Semi-auto, and Auto.
➢ Manual: recovers the clock by the data rate input manually.
➢ Semi-auto: recovers the clock by the manually preset data rate and the
signal edge.
➢ Auto: recovers the clock based on the narrowest pulse of the signal.
Click Type to select the desired data rate type.
⚫ Set the data rate
Click Data Rate, then use the pop-up numeric keypad to set the data rate.
Note: When the data rate type is set to Auto, the Data Rate menu is
grayed out and disabled, and only the automatically recovered frequency of
the ideal clock can be displayed.
RIGOL Chapter 10 Real-time Eye Diagram and Jitter Analysis (Option)
10-4 DS8000-R User Guide
2. Setting method for phase-locked loop (PLL)
Click RecoveryType to select "PLL".
⚫ Set the data rate
Click Data Rate, then use the pop-up numeric keypad to set the data rate.
⚫ Set the PLL order
This oscilloscope supports first-order PLL and second-order PLL. Click PLL
Order to select the order number.
⚫ Set the loop BW
Click Loop BW, then use the pop-up numeric keypad to set the loop
bandwidth.
⚫ Set the damping factor
When PLL order is set to "2nd Order", you need to set the damping factor. It
is the damping factor of the PLL's observed jitter transfer function (OJTF).
Click DampFactor, then use the pop-up numeric keypad to set the
damping factor.
The typical damping factor is 1.0 and 0.707. The former is critically damped,
and the latter is the ideal or optimal value.
3. Setting method for external clock recovery
Click RecoveryType to select "Explicit".
Click Source to select the desired source. The analog channel (CH1-CH4) can
be selected as the source of the external clock.
To Enable or Disable the Eye Measurement Result
In the "Eye" setting menu, click the Result key continuously to enable or disable the
eye measurement result. When it is enabled, the statistical results of the eye
measurement item data will be displayed at the upper-left corner of the screen, as
shown in the following figure. You can drag the statistical results with the mouse to
any place where you want to put it for view on the screen.
Chapter 10 Real-time Eye Diagram and Jitter Analysis (Option) RIGOL
DS8000-R User's Guide 10-5
Wherein,
One: indicates "1" level.
Zero: indicates "0" level.
Eye Width: indicates the width of an eye diagram.
Eye Height: indicates the height of an eye diagram.
Eye Amp: indicates the amplitude of an eye diagram.
Cross: indicates the crossing percentage of an eye diagram.
Q Factor: indicates the Q factor.
The parameters of the eye measurement are shown in Figure 10-1.
Figure 10-1 Diagram of Eye Measurement Parameters
To Reset Color
Click Reset Color to clear the color level counter.
Persistence
Click Persistence continuously to enable or disable the overlaying display function.
When enabled, the overlaying plots of waveforms in the eye diagram are displayed.
RIGOL Chapter 10 Real-time Eye Diagram and Jitter Analysis (Option)
10-6 DS8000-R User Guide
When disabled, the overlaying plots of waveforms will not be displayed, but only
display the updated plots of waveforms for the eye diagram.
Jitter Analysis
The jitter analysis function is mainly used to analyze the integrity of the high-speed
serial signal and measure the variance of a measurement over time. The
measurement item includes TIE, Cycle to Cycle, +Width to +Width, and –Width to
-Width. Wherein, TIE indicates time interval error. The TIE measurement compares
the edges in a data signal with the edges in an ideal data signal determined by the
clock recovery feature to generate error statistics.
You can go to the "Jitter" setting menu through the following ways:
⚫ Click on the function navigation icon at the lower-left corner of the screen to
open the function navigation. Then, click on the "Jitter" icon to open the
"Jitter" setting menu.
⚫ Click on function navigation icon at the lower-left corner of the screen to
open the function navigation. Then, click Measure → Analyze → Jitter to
enter the "Jitter" setting menu.
⚫ Click the auto measurement label "MEASURE" at the top of the screen to enter
the measurement setting menu. In the measurement category area, click the
"Analyze" tab to select the "Jitter" option to enter the "Jitter" setting menu.
⚫ Click on the function navigation icon , and select Measure. Then click Add.
In the displayed measurement category area, click to select "Analyze", and then
select "Jitter" to open the "Jitter" setting menu.
To Enable or Disable the Jitter Analysis Function
In the "Jitter" setting menu, click the Enable key continuously to enable or disable
the jitter analysis function. When the jitter analysis function and the jitter trend are
enabled, Math3 trend operation function is enabled by default and the trend diagram
is displayed on the screen.
To Select the Jitter Source
Click Source in the "Jitter" setting menu to select the desired jitter source. The
analog channel (CH1-CH4) can be selected as the jitter source.
Chapter 10 Real-time Eye Diagram and Jitter Analysis (Option) RIGOL
DS8000-R User's Guide 10-7
To Set the Threshold
For the threshold setting methods of the jitter, please refer to descriptions in "To Set
the Threshold" in the "Real-time Eye Analysis" section.
To Set Clock Recovery
For setting methods of the clock recovery in the jitter, refer to descriptions in "To Set
Clock Recovery" in the "Real-time Eye Analysis" section.
Note: When the measurement item is "TIE", you need to set the clock recovery. For
other measurement items, you do not need to set the clock recovery.
To Set the Jitter Measurement
Click Measure to enter the jitter measurement menu. You can set the jitter
measurement item and the graph display mode of the jitter measurement results.
⚫ Set the jitter measurement item
The jitter measurement items supported by this oscilloscope include TIE, Cycle
to Cycle, +Width to +Width, and –Width to -Width.
Click Item to select the desired measurement item.
➢ TIE
Compares edges in a signal under test with the edges in an ideal signal
determined by the clock recovery feature. Then, all the signal intervals are
measured based on the ideal data rate to generate the error statistics.
➢ Cycle to Cycle
Measures the first cycle and then subtracts the first cycle from the second
cycle. The measurement is made according to this rule.
RIGOL Chapter 10 Real-time Eye Diagram and Jitter Analysis (Option)
10-8 DS8000-R User Guide
Cycle1 Cycle2
1st Measurement = Cycle2 - Cycle1
Cycle3 Cycle4
2nd Measurement = Cycle4 – Cycle3
➢ +Width to +Width
The +Width to +Width jitter measurement subtracts the first cycle's
positive pulse width from the second cycle's positive pulse width for the first
measurement result. Then, the second cycle's positive pulse width from the
third cycle's positive pulse width for the second measurement result, and so
on, until all of the cycles of the waveform have been measured.
➢ -Width to -Width
The -Width to -Width jitter measurement subtracts the first cycle's negative
pulse width from the second cycle's negative pulse width for the first
measurement result. Then, the second cycle's negative pulse width from
the third cycle's negative pulse width for the second measurement result,
and so on, until all of the cycles of the waveform have been measured.
⚫ Jitter edge
When the measurement item is "TIE" or "Cycle to Cycle", you need to set the
edge for the measurement signal. The edges include Rising, Falling, and Either
(available when TIE is selected as the measurement item). Click Slope to select
the desired edge.
Chapter 10 Real-time Eye Diagram and Jitter Analysis (Option) RIGOL
DS8000-R User's Guide 10-9
⚫ Jitter trend graph
The trend graph can display the trend of the jitter measurement results. The
data obtained from the waveforms of the same frame are generated to form a
curve, which enables users to find out the cause for jitter.
Click Trend continuously to enable or disable the display of the trend graph.
Note: When the clock recovery method is set to "PLL", the PLL system cannot
reach the expected ideal clock frequency until it reaches the specified lock time.
During the lock time, the TIE jitter measurement results based on the ideal
recovery clock are incorrect. The data produced during this time will be
discarded in data processing. Therefore, in the TIE jitter trend graph based on
the PLL recovery, part of trend graph at the left section of the screen will be lost.
When a message "Invalid settings" is displayed below the trend graph, please
modify the loop bandwidth, the horizontal timebase, or other related settings to
make valid measurements.
⚫ Jitter histogram
The histogram shows the distribution of the jitter measurement results.
Gaussian distributions indicate random jitter, and non-Gaussian distributions
indicate the deterministic jitter.
Click Histogram continuously to enable or disable the display of the histogram.
Note: When you select the specified measurement item and enable the display
of the histogram, the selected item will be displayed under the Item menu of
the Histogram setting menu simultaneously. Meanwhile, the jitter analysis
function in the histogram setting menu will also be enabled. The histogram type
will be switched to Jitter. At this time, the statistical count and distribution of the
jitter measurement results will be displayed in columns in the bar histogram at
the screen bottom.
⚫ Auto setting
Used to configure the scale of the trend graph automatically.
Click Auto Setting, and then the vertical scale and offset of the trend graph will
be automatically adjusted to optimal values based on the current configurations,
so that users can get a better observation of the results.
To Enable or Disable the Jitter Measurement Result
In the jitter setting menu, click Result continuously to enable or disable the jitter
measurement result. When enabled, the jitter measurement data results will be
displayed on the screen, as shown in the following figure. You can drag the jitter
Chapter 11 Protocol Decoding RIGOL
DS8000-R User Guide 11-1
Chapter 11 Protocol Decoding
You can use the protocol analysis to discover errors, debug hardware, and accelerate
development easily, ensuring you to accomplish the projects with high speed and
good quality. Protocol decoding is the basis of protocol analysis. Only protocol
analyses with correct protocol decoding are acceptable, and only correct protocol
decoding can identify more error information. DS8000-R provides four bus decoding
modules (Decode 1, Decode 2, Decode 3, and Decode 4) to make common protocol
decoding (including Parallel (standard), RS232 (option), I2C (option), SPI (option),
LIN (option), CAN (option), FlexRay (option), I2S (option), and 1553B (option)) for
the input signals of the analog channels (CH1-CH4). As the decoding functions and
setting methods of Decode1, Decode2, Decode3, and Decode4 are the same, this
chapter takes Decode1 as an example for illustration.
Click on the function navigation icon
at the lower-left corner of the screen to
open the function navigation. Then, click on the "Decode" icon
to open the
decode setting menu.
To get the decoding option information, refer to descriptions in "Appendix A:
Accessories and Options".
If you have purchased the decoding option, activate it according the descriptions in
"To View the Option Information and the Option Installation".
Contents in this chapter:
◼ Parallel Decoding
◼ RS232 Decoding (Option)
◼ I2C Decoding (Option)
◼ SPI Decoding (Option)
◼ LIN Decoding (Option)
◼ CAN Decoding (Option)
◼ FlexRay Decoding (Option)
◼ I2S Decoding (Option)
◼ 1553B Decoding (Option)
RIGOL Chapter 11 Protocol Decoding
11-2 DS8000-R User Guide
Parallel Decoding
Parallel bus consists of clock line and data line. As shown in the figure below, CLK is
the clock line, whereas Bit0 and Bit1 are the 0 bit and 1st bit on the data line
respectively. The oscilloscope will sample the channel data on the rising edge, falling
edge, or the rising/falling edge of the clock and judge each data point (logic "1" or
logic "0") according to the preset threshold level.
Figure 11-1 Schematic Diagram of Parallel Decoding
In the decode setting menu, click Decode1 → Bus Type to select "Parallel".
1
． Enable or disable the bus
Click Bus Status to enable or disable the decoding function.
2
． Clock setting (CLK)
Click Clock to enter the clock line setting menu.
⚫ Set clock channel
Click CLK to select any clock channel. The available choices include OFF
and CH1-CH4. The analog channel (CH1-CH4) can be selected as the clock
source. If "OFF" is selected, no clock channel is set, and sampling is
performed when a hop occurs to the data of the data channel during
decoding.
⚫ Set the clock edge type
Click CLK Edge to select the clock edge type. You can select to sample the
channel data on the rising edge ( ), falling edge ( ), or both edges
(
) of the clock signal.
Rising
: samples the channel data on the rising edge of the clock.
Falling
: samples the channel data on the falling edge of the clock.
Both
: samples the channel data on both the rising edge and the
falling edge of the clock.
⚫ Set the threshold
Chapter 11 Protocol Decoding RIGOL
DS8000-R User Guide 11-3
Click Threshold, then use the pop-up numeric keypad or scroll with the
mouse to set the threshold.
3
． Bus setting
Click Bus to enter the bus setting menu.
⚫ Set the bus
Click BUS to select the digital bus for Parallel decoding, as shown in the
following table.
Bus
Width
Bit X
Channel
Remarks
CH1
1
0
CH1
Width, Bit X, and CH
are set automatically,
and you cannot modify
them.
CH2
1
0
CH2
Width, Bit X, and CH
are set automatically,
and you cannot modify
them.
CH3
1
0
CH3
Width, Bit X, and CH
are set automatically,
and you cannot modify
them.
CH4
1
0
CH4
Width, Bit X, and CH
are set automatically,
and you cannot modify
them.
User
1-4
0 (default)
--
--
⚫ Set the width
When BUS is set to "User", you can set the bus width. Click Width, and use
the pop-up numeric keypad or scroll with the mouse to set the width. The
available range is from 1 to 4. By default, it is 1. When BUS is set to CH1,
CH2, CH3, or CH4, the Width menu is grayed out and disabled.
⚫ Specify data channel for each bit
When "BUS" is greater than 1, you can specify data channel for each bit.
Click Bit X, then use the pop-up numeric keypad or scroll with the mouse to
set the bit of the channel. By default, 0 is selected. Its available range is
from 0 to (width - 1).
Click CH to select a channel source. The analog channel (CH1-CH4) can be
selected as the channel source.
⚫ Set the threshold level
To judge logic "1" and logic "0" of the buses, you need to set a threshold for
each analog channel (CH1-CH4). When the channel signal amplitude is
RIGOL Chapter 11 Protocol Decoding
11-4 DS8000-R User Guide
greater than the preset threshold, it is judged as logic "1"; otherwise logic
"0". Click Threshold, then use the pop-up numeric keypad or scroll with
the mouse to set the threshold.
⚫ Set the endian
Click Endian continuously to select "Normal" or "Invert" as the endian of
the bus.
⚫ Polarity
Click Polarity continuously to select Positive or Negative as the
polarity for data decoding.
4
． Display-related setting
Click Display to enter the display setting menu.
⚫ Set the display format
Click Format to select the display format of the bus data. The available
display formats of the bus data are "Hex", "Dec", "Bin", and "ASCII".
⚫ Adjust the vertical position of the bus
Click Position, and then place the mouse cursor over the menu to scroll
with the mouse or drag the decode label at the left side of the screen to
adjust the vertical display position of the bus.
⚫ Set the label display
Click Label to enable or disable the label display of the Parallel decoding
bus. When enabled, the bus label "Parallel" will be displayed at the
upper-left side of the bus (when the bus display is enabled).
⚫ Event table
Click Event Table to enter the event table setting menu. The event table
displays the detailed decoding information in time order in the form of a
table, so as to better observe the long decoded data. The decoding
information includes the decoded data, the corresponding line number, and
time information.
➢ Open or close the event table: Click Event Table continuously to
enable or disable the event table. When you enable the event table,
the following figure is displayed, as shown in Figure 11-2. You can also
Channel Logic Level
Channel Signal Amplitude
Threshold Level
1
0
0
Chapter 11 Protocol Decoding RIGOL
DS8000-R User Guide 11-5
click on the icon at the upper-right corner of the table to close the
event table.
Figure 11-2 Parallel Decoding Event Table
Note:
⚫ When you adjust the horizontal time base, the waveform displayed
on the screen will also change, and the total number of lines
containing the decoding information in the event table will also be
changed.
⚫ The displayed decoded data information in the bus is related to the
value of the horizontal time base. Reducing the horizontal time
base can help you view the detailed information.
➢ Set the event table format: Click Format to select the display format of
"Data" in the event table. The available formats include "Hex", "Dec",
"Bin", and "ASC".
➢ Set the view type: Click View to select the form of the event table to
be viewed. The available choices include "Packets", "Details", and
"Payload".
If you select "Packets", the time and decoded data are displayed in the
event table. If you select "Details", the detailed data in the specified
row will be displayed in the event table. If "…" appears in the row of
data, it indicates that the decoded data are not fully displayed. At this
time, you can view the details in the "Packets" view. If you select
"Payload", all data in the specified column will be displayed in the event
table. If "…" appears in the specified column of data, it indicates that
the decoded data are not fully displayed. At this time, you can view the
details in the "Packets" view.
➢ Export: If you select "Packets", then set the operating status of the
Line Number Time Decode Name Decoded Data
Event Table
Parallel Bus
RIGOL Chapter 11 Protocol Decoding
11-6 DS8000-R User Guide
oscilloscope to "STOP". You can export time and the corresponding
decoded data. Click Export, the save setting menu is displayed. You
can export the data table of the packets to the internal or external USB
storage device (when detected) in CSV format. For detailed saving
operation, refer to descriptions in "Store and Load".
➢ Jump to: Set the operating status of the oscilloscope to "STOP". Then,
select the data of the specified time from the event table. Click Jump
to and the specified data waveforms are displayed in the center of the
screen.
➢ Decode: The setting of this menu enables you to quickly view the
corresponding event tables of four decode modules (Decode1,
Decode2, Decode3, and Decode4). Click Decode to select a decode
module.
5
． Noise rejection
Click Settings → Noise Reject to enable or disable the noise rejection
function. Noise rejection can remove the data that last not enough time on the
bus and eliminate the burst glitch in the actual circuit. When the noise rejection
is enabled, click Reject Time, then use the pop-up numeric keypad or scroll
with the mouse to set the desired rejection time. The available range of the
rejection time is from 0 s to 1 s.
RS232 Decoding (Option)
RS232 serial bus consists of the transmitting data line (TX) and the receiving data
line (RX).
DeviceA DeviceB
Tx
Rx
Rx Tx
Figure 11-3 Schematic Diagram of RS232 Serial Bus
The industry standard of RS232 uses "Negative Logic", i.g. high level is logic "0" and
low level is logic "1".
1
0 0 0 0
1 1 1 1 1
Figure 11-4 Schematic Diagram of Negative Logic
In RS232, baud rate is used to represent the transmission rate (namely bits per
second) of the data. You need to set the start bit, data bits, check bit (optional), and
Chapter 11 Protocol Decoding RIGOL
DS8000-R User Guide 11-7
stop bit for each frame of data.
Start Bit
Data Bit
Check Bit
Stop Bit
Start Bit: indicates when to output data.
Data Bit: indicates the number of data bits actually contained in each frame of data.
Check Bit: used to check whether the data are properly transmitted.
Stop Bit: indicates when to stop outputting data.
In the decode setting menu, click Decode1 → Bus Type to select "RS232".
1
． Enable or disable the bus
Click Bus Status to enable or disable the decoding function.
2
． Quickly apply RS232 trigger settings to RS232 decoding
Click Copy Trig to copy the current RS232 trigger settings and apply them to
RS232 decoding function (set the corresponding RS232 decoding parameters
automatically). For source channels, copy the source channel of the trigger to
the Tx source channel of the decoding.
3． Set the baud rate
The following methods are available for baud rate:
⚫ Click Baud, then set the user-defined baud rate with the displayed numeric
keypad.
⚫ Click Baud, then select the preset baud rate from the available options. The
available baud rates include 50 bps, 75 bps, 110 bps, 134 bps, 150 bps, 300
bps, and etc.
4
． Source setting
Click Sources to enter the source setting menu.
⚫ Set the Tx source and the threshold
➢ Click Tx to select the desired channel. The available channels include
OFF and CH1-CH4.
➢ When you select the analog channel (CH1-CH4), click Threshold, then
use the pop-up numeric keypad or scroll with the mouse to adjust the
threshold of Tx source. When you modify the threshold of the Tx
source channel, a dotted line displaying the current threshold level is
displayed on the screen. The dotted line disappears in about 2 s after
you stop modifying the threshold.
⚫ Set the Rx source and the threshold
RIGOL Chapter 11 Protocol Decoding
11-8 DS8000-R User Guide
Use the same method to select the Rx source and set the threshold (only
when the Rx source channel is set to an analog channel (CH1-CH4)).
Note: The Tx and Rx source channels cannot be set to "OFF" at the same time.
⚫ Polarity
Click Polarity continuously to select the polarity of data transmission. It
can be set to " " or " ".
➢ : positive logic. High level indicates logic "1"; low level
indicates logic "0".
➢ : negative logic. High level indicates logic "0"; low level
indicates logic "1".
5
． Set data package
Click Settings to enter the data package setting menu.
⚫ Data
Click Data to set the number of data bits actually contained in each frame
of data. The available data bits are 5 bits, 6 bits, 7 bits, 8 bits, and 9 bits.
⚫ Parity
It is used to check whether the data transmission is correct. Click Parity to
select the desired parity mode.
➢ None: indicates that no check bit appears during the transmission.
➢ Even: indicates that the total number of "1" in the data bit and check
bit is an even number. For example, when 0x55 (01010101) is sent, "0"
should be added to the check bit.
➢ Odd: indicates that the total number of "1" in the data bit and check bit
is an odd number. For example, when 0x55 (01010101) is sent, "1"
should be added to the check bit.
⚫ Stop Bit
Click Stop Bit to set the stop bits after each frame of data. It can be set to
1 bit, 1.5 bits, or 2 bits.
⚫ Endian
Click Endian to select "LSB" or "MSB". By default, it is "LSB".
LSB: indicates Least Significant Bit transmission sequence, i.g. the lowest
bit of the data is transmitted first.
MSB: indicates Most Significant Bit transmission sequence, i.g. the highest
bit of the data is transmitted first.
Chapter 11 Protocol Decoding RIGOL
DS8000-R User Guide 11-9
LSB MSB
⚫ Package
Click Package to enable or disable the package display in data
transmission. When enabled, several data blocks will be combined based on
the separator.
⚫ Separator
Click Separator to select the desired package separator in data
transmission. It can be set to 0A(LF), 0D(CR), 20(SP), or 0(NUL).
6
． Display-related setting
Click Display to enter the display setting menu.
⚫ Set the display format
Click Format to select the display format of the bus data. The available
display formats of the bus data are "Hex", "Dec", "Bin", and "ASCII".
⚫ Adjust the vertical position of the bus
Click Position, and then place the mouse cursor over the menu to scroll
with the mouse or drag the decode label at the left side of the screen to
adjust the vertical display position of the bus.
⚫ Set the label display
Click Label to enable or disable the label display of the RS232 decoding bus.
When enabled, the bus label "RS232-TX" and/or "RS232-RX" will be
displayed at the upper-left side of the bus (when the bus display is
enabled).
⚫ Event table
Click Event Table to enter the event table setting menu. The event table
displays the detailed decoding information in time order in the form of a
table, so as to better observe the long decoded data. The decoding
information includes the decoded data (Tx and/or Rx), the corresponding
line number, time, and error information (Tx and/or Rx).
Note: When the Tx and Rx source channels are set to "OFF", information of
the data line is not displayed in the data table.
➢ Open or close the event table: Click Event Table continuously to
enable or disable the event table. You can also click on the icon at
the upper-right corner of the table to close the event table. Besides,
RIGOL Chapter 11 Protocol Decoding
11-10 DS8000-R User Guide
when the operating status is "STOP", you can select a specified line and
view the corresponding decoding information.
Note:
⚫ When you adjust the horizontal time base, the waveform displayed
on the screen will also change, and the total number of lines
containing the decoding information in the event table will also be
changed.
⚫ The displayed decoded data information in the bus is related to the
value of the horizontal time base. Reducing the horizontal time
base can help you view the detailed information.
➢ Set the event table format: Click Format to select the display format of
"Data" (Tx and/or Rx) in the event table. The available formats include
"Hex", "Dec", "Bin", and "ASC".
➢ Set the view type: Click View to select the form of the event table to
be viewed. The available choices include "Packets", "Details", and
"Payload". You can also click the "Packets", "Details", or "Payload" tab
at the top of the event table to select it.
If you select "Packets", the decoded data (Tx/Rx), time, and error
information (Tx/Rx) are displayed in the event table; if you select
"Details", the detailed data in the specified row will be displayed in the
event table. If "…" appears in the row of data, it indicates that the
decoded data are not fully displayed. At this time, you can view the
details in the "Packets" view. If you select "Payload", all data in the
specified column will be displayed in the event table. If "…" appears in
the specified column of data, it indicates that the decoded data are not
fully displayed. At this time, you can view the details in the "Packets"
view.
➢ Export: If you select "Packets", then set the operating status of the
oscilloscope to "STOP". You can export time, the corresponding
decoded data, and etc. Click Export, the save setting menu is
displayed. You can export the data table of the packets to the internal
or external USB storage device (when detected) in CSV format. For
detailed saving operation, refer to descriptions in "Store and Load".
➢ Jump to: Set the operating status of the oscilloscope to "STOP". Then,
select the data of the specified time from the event table. Click Jump
to and the specified data waveforms are displayed in the center of the
screen.
➢ Decode: The setting of this menu enables you to quickly view the
corresponding event tables of four decode modules (Decode1,
Decode2, Decode3, and Decode4). Click Decode to select a decode
module.
7
． Error expressions in decoding
In RS232 decoding, parity error and/or EOF (end of frame) error may occur.
Chapter 11 Protocol Decoding RIGOL
DS8000-R User Guide 11-11
⚫ Parity Error
When a parity error is detected during the decoding, red error report
information will be displayed. For example, when "none" is chosen for the
parity on the transmitter and "odd" is chosen for the parity on the decoder,
the following parity error information
(its display form is related to the
value of the horizontal time base) occurs. Wherein, the number of 1s in the
8-digit figure (01001111) is an odd number, and the parity bit should be 0.
However, the parity bit detected on the Tx is 1; thus a parity error occurs.
⚫ EOF Error
This error is generated when the EOF condition is not met. For example, if
the Stop Bit is set to 1.5, but the actual stop bits is less than 1.5 bits, then
the red error report information
(its display form is related to the value
of the horizontal time base) is displayed in the following figure.
⚫ Parity Error and EOF Error
When both the parity error and the EOF error are detected, the error report
information (its display form is related to the value of the horizontal time
base), as shown in the following figure, will be displayed.
RIGOL Chapter 11 Protocol Decoding
11-12 DS8000-R User Guide
I2C Decoding (Option)
I2C serial bus consists of the clock line (SCL) and the data line (SDA).
SCL: samples SDA on the rising or falling edge of the clock.
SDA: indicates the data channel.
SCL
SDA
Figure 11-5 I2C Serial Bus
In the decode setting menu, click Decode1 → Bus Type to select "I2C".
1
． Enable or disable the bus
Click Bus Status continuously to enable or disable the decoding function.
2
． Quickly apply I2C trigger settings to I2C decoding
Click Copy Trig to copy the clock signal and data signal settings (SCL and SDA)
of the current I2C trigger settings and apply them to I2C decoding function (SCL
and SDA).
3
． Source setting
Click Sources to enter the source setting menu.
⚫ Set the clock channel source and the threshold
➢ Click SCL to select the desired source of the clock channel. The
available channels include CH1-CH4.
➢ Click SCL Thre, then use the pop-up numeric keypad or scroll with the
mouse to adjust the threshold of the clock channel. After modifying the
threshold of the clock channel, a dotted line displaying the current
threshold level is displayed on the screen. The dotted line disappears in
Chapter 11 Protocol Decoding RIGOL
DS8000-R User Guide 11-13
about 2 s after you stop modifying the threshold.
⚫ Set the data channel source and the threshold
➢ Click SDA to select the desired source of the clock channel. The
available channels include CH1-CH4.
➢ Click SDA Thre, then use the pop-up numeric keypad or scroll with the
mouse to adjust the threshold of the clock channel. After modifying the
threshold of the clock channel, a dotted line displaying the current
threshold level is displayed on the screen. The dotted line disappears in
about 2 s after you stop modifying the threshold.
⚫ Exchange sources
Click Exchange continuously to select "SCL/SDA" or "SDA/SCL" to
exchange the sources of the current clock channel and data channel.
4
． Specify whether the address information includes the "R/W" bit
For I2C bus, each frame of data starts with the address information. The address
information includes the read address and the write address. Click R/W
continuously to select whether the address information includes the "R/W" bit.
When "With" is selected, the "R/W" bit will be included in the address
information and located at the lowest bit; when "Without" is selected, the "R/W"
bit will not be included in the address information.
5
． Display-related setting
Click Display to enter the display setting menu.
⚫ Set the display format
Click Format to select the display format of the bus data. The available
display formats of the bus data are "Hex", "Dec", "Bin", and "ASCII".
⚫ Adjust the vertical position of the bus
Click Position, and then place the mouse cursor over the menu to scroll
with the mouse or drag the decode label at the left side of the screen to
adjust the vertical display position of the bus.
⚫ Set the label display
Click Label to enable or disable the label display of the I2C decoding bus.
When enabled, the bus label "I2C" will be displayed at the upper-left side of
the bus (when the bus display is enabled).
⚫ Event table
Click Event Table to enter the event table setting menu. The event table
displays the detailed decoding information in time order in the form of a
table, so as to better observe the long decoded data. The decoding
information includes the decoded data, the corresponding line number, time,
R/W bit, address information, and acknowledgement information.
RIGOL Chapter 11 Protocol Decoding
11-14 DS8000-R User Guide
➢ Open or close the event table: Click Event Table continuously to
enable or disable the event table. When you enable the event table,
the following figure is displayed, as shown in Figure 11-6. Click on the
icon at the upper-right corner of the table to close the event table.
Besides, when the operating status is "STOP", you can select a
specified line and view the corresponding decoding information.
Figure 11-6 I2C Decoding Event Table
Note:
⚫ When you adjust the horizontal time base, the waveform displayed
on the screen will also change, and the total number of lines
containing the decoding information in the event table will also be
changed.
⚫ The displayed decoded data information in the bus is related to the
value of the horizontal time base. Reducing the horizontal time
base can help you view the detailed information.
➢ Set the event table format: Click Format to select the display format of
"Data" in the event table. The available formats include "Hex", "Dec",
"Bin", and "ASC".
➢ Set the view type: Click View to select the form of the event table to
be viewed. The available choices include "Packets", "Details", and
"Payload". You can also click the "Packets", "Details", or "Payload" tab
at the top of the event table to select it.
If you select "Packets", the decoded data, time, and error information
are displayed in the event table. If you select "Details", the detailed
data in the specified row will be displayed in the event table. If "…"
appears in the row of data, it indicates that the decoded data are not
Line Number Time R/W Bit Address Decoded Data Acknowledgement
Event Table
I2C Bus
Chapter 11 Protocol Decoding RIGOL
DS8000-R User Guide 11-15
fully displayed. At this time, you can view the details in the "Packets"
view. If you select "Payload", all data in the specified column will be
displayed in the event table. If "…" appears in the specified column of
data, it indicates that the decoded data are not fully displayed. At this
time, you can view the details in the "Packets" view.
➢ Export: If you select "Packets", then set the operating status of the
oscilloscope to "STOP". You can export time, the corresponding
decoded data, and etc. Click Export, the save setting menu is
displayed. You can export the data table of the packets to the internal
or external USB storage device (when detected) in CSV format. For
detailed saving operation, refer to descriptions in "Store and Load".
➢ Jump to: Set the operating status of the oscilloscope to "STOP". Then,
select the data of the specified time from the event table. Click Jump
to and the specified data waveforms are displayed in the center of the
screen.
➢ Decode: The setting of this menu enables you to quickly view the
corresponding event tables of four decode modules (Decode1,
Decode2, Decode3, and Decode4). Click Decode to select a decode
module.
6
． Address information in decoding
In I2C bus, each frame of data starts with the address information (include the
read address and write address). In the address information, "Read" denotes
the read address (e.g.
) and "Write" denotes the write address (e.g.
) You can also set the address information to include or exclude
the "R/W" bit.
7． Error expressions in decoding
In I2C decoding, when ACK (acknowledgement) is 1, ACK error occurs. When
when the detected ACK is 1, red error report information
(the display form is
Address Information (Read Address)
RIGOL Chapter 11 Protocol Decoding
11-16 DS8000-R User Guide
related to the value of the horizontal time base) is dispalyed.
SPI Decoding (Option)
SPI bus is based on the master-slave configuration and usually consists of chip select
line (CS), clock line (CLK), and data line (SDA). Wherein, the data lines include the
master input/slave output (MISO) data line and master output/slave input (MOSI)
data line. The oscilloscope samples the channel data on the rising or falling edge of
the clock signal. The oscilloscope will also judge each data point (logic "1" or logic "0")
according to the preset threshold level.
Master
Slave
MOSI
CLK
MISO
CS
CLK
SDA
(MISO/MOSI)
Figure 11-7 SPI Serial Bus
In the decode setting menu, click Decode1 → Bus Type to select "SPI".
1
． Enable or disable the bus
Click Bus Status to enable or disable the decoding function.
The detected ACK is 1
Chapter 11 Protocol Decoding RIGOL
DS8000-R User Guide 11-17
2． Quickly apply SPI trigger settings to SPI decoding
Click Copy Trig to copy the SPI trigger settings and apply them to SPI decoding
function (set the corresponding SPI decoding parameters automatically). The
settings available for copy include CS/Timeout mode, CLK, MISO, Slope, and etc.
3
． Mode
Click Mode to enter the mode setting menu. Click Mode to select "Timeout" or
"CS".
⚫ Timeout: you can perform frame synchronization according to the timeout,
and the timeout value must be greater than half of the clock cycle. Click
Timeout, and then use the pop-up numeric keypad or scroll with the
mouse to set the timeout value. The available range of the timeout value is
from 8 ns to 10 s. By default, it is 1 μs.
⚫ CS: contains a chip select line (CS). You can perform frame synchronization
according to CS. When "CS" is selected,
➢ Click CS to select the desired channel. The analog channel (CH1-CH4)
can be selected as the CS channel.
➢ Click CS Polarity continuously to select (Positive) or
(Negative) as the polarity for CS channel.
➢ Click Threshold, then use the pop-up numeric keypad or scroll with
the mouse to set the threshold.
4
． Source setting
Click Sources to enter the source setting menu.
⚫ CLK setting
➢ Click CLK to select the desired source of the clock channel. The analog
channel (CH1-CH4) can be selected.
➢ Click Threshold below the CLK menu, then use the pop-up numeric
keypad or scroll with the mouse to set the threshold level of the clock
channel.
➢ Click Slope continuously to set the instrument to sample MISO and
MOSI on the rising edge (
) or falling edge ( ) of the clock signal.
⚫ MISO and MOSI setting
➢ Click MISO to select the desired MISO data channel. The available
channels include OFF and analog channels (CH1-CH4). When you
select an analog channel (CH1-CH4), click Threshold below the MISO
menu, then use the pop-up numeric keypad or scroll with the mouse to
set the threshold of the MISO data channel.
➢ Click MOSI to select the desired MOSI data channel. The available
channels include OFF and analog channels (CH1-CH4). When you
select an analog channel (CH1-CH4), click Threshold below the MOSI
menu, then use the pop-up numeric keypad or scroll with the mouse to
RIGOL Chapter 11 Protocol Decoding
11-18 DS8000-R User Guide
set the threshold of the MOSI data channel.
Note: MISO and MOSI source channels cannot be both set to "OFF" at
the same time.
5
． Data setting
Click Settings to enter the data setting menu.
⚫ Endian setting
Click Endian to select "LSB" or "MSB". By default, it is "MSB".
LSB: indicates Least Significant Bit transmission sequence, i.g. the lowest
bit of the data is transmitted first.
MSB: indicates Most Significant Bit transmission sequence, i.g. the highest
bit of the data is transmitted first.
⚫ Polarity setting
Click Polarity continuously to select Positive or Negative as the
polarity for data decoding.
⚫ Width setting
Click Width, then use the pop-up numeric keypad or scroll with the mouse
to set the bits of each frame of data. The available range is from 4 to 32. By
default, it is 8.
6． Display-related setting
Click Display to enter the display setting menu.
⚫ Set the display format
Click Format to select the display format of the bus data. The available
display formats of the bus data are "Hex", "Dec", "Bin", and "ASCII".
⚫ Adjust the vertical position of the bus
Click Position, and then place the mouse cursor over the menu to scroll
with the mouse or drag the decode label at the left side of the screen to
adjust the vertical display position of the bus.
⚫ Set the label display
Click Label to enable or disable the label display of the SPI decoding bus.
When enabled, the bus label "SPI-MISO" and/or "SPI-MOSI" will be
displayed at the upper-left side of the bus (when the bus display is
enabled).
⚫ Event table
Click Event Table to enter the event table setting menu. The event table
displays the detailed decoding information in time order in the form of a
table, so as to better observe the long decoded data. The decoding
information includes the decoded data (MISO and/or MOSI), the
Chapter 11 Protocol Decoding RIGOL
DS8000-R User Guide 11-19
corresponding line number, time, and error information (MISO and/or
MOSI).
Note: When the source channel of MISO or MOSI is set to "OFF",
information of the data line is not displayed in the data table.
➢ Open or close the event table: Click Event Table continuously to
enable or disable the event table. When you enable the event table,
the following figure is displayed, as shown in Figure 11-8. You can click
on the icon
at the upper-right corner of the table to close the event
table. Besides, when the operating status is "STOP", you can select a
specified line and view the corresponding decoding information.
Figure 11-8 SPI Decoding Event Table
Note:
⚫ When you adjust the horizontal time base, the waveform displayed
on the screen will also change, and the total number of lines
containing the decoding information in the event table will also be
changed.
⚫ The displayed decoded data information in the bus is related to the
value of the horizontal time base. Reducing the horizontal time
base can help you view the detailed information.
➢ Set the event table format: Click Format to select the display format of
"Data" (MISO and/or MOSI) in the event table. The available formats
include "Hex", "Dec", "Bin", and "ASC".
➢ Set the view type: Click View to select the form of the event table to
be viewed. The available choices include "Packets", "Details", and
"Payload". You can also click the "Packets", "Details", or "Payload" tab
at the top of the event table to select it.
If you select "Packets", the decoded data (MISO and/or MOSI), time,
and error information (MISO and/or MOSI) are displayed in the event
table. If you select "Details", the detailed data in the specified row will
be displayed in the event table. If "…" appears in the row of data, it
Line Number Time MISO Decoding Data MISO Error MOSI Decoding Data MOSI Error
Event Table
SPI Bus
RIGOL Chapter 11 Protocol Decoding
11-20 DS8000-R User Guide
indicates that the decoded data are not fully displayed. At this time,
you can view the details in the "Packets" view. If you select "Payload",
all data in the specified column will be displayed in the event table. If
"…" appears in the specified column of data, it indicates that the
decoded data are not fully displayed. At this time, you can view the
details in the "Packets" view.
➢ Export: If you select "Packets", then set the operating status of the
oscilloscope to "STOP". You can export time and the corresponding
decoded data. Click Export, the save setting menu is displayed. You
can export the data table of the packets to the internal or external USB
storage device (when detected) in CSV format. For detailed saving
operation, refer to descriptions in "Store and Load".
➢ Jump to: Set the operating status of the oscilloscope to "STOP". Then,
select the data of the specified time from the event table. Click Jump
to and the specified data waveforms are displayed in the center of the
screen.
➢ Decode: The setting of this menu enables you to quickly view the
corresponding event tables of four decode modules (Decode1,
Decode2, Decode3, and Decode4). Click Decode to select a decode
module.
LIN Decoding (Option)
The oscilloscope samples the LIN signal, and judges each data point to be logic "1"
or logic "0" according to the preset threshold level. The LIN decoding is required to
specify the LIN signal protocol version.
In the decode setting menu, click Decode1 → Bus Type to select "LIN".
1. Enable or disable the bus
Click Bus Status continuously to enable or disable the decoding function.
2. Quickly apply LIN trigger settings to LIN decoding
Click Copy Trig to copy the LIN trigger settings and apply them to LIN decoding
function (set the corresponding LIN decoding parameters automatically).
3. Set the source and the threshold
⚫ Click Source to select the desired source channel. The available channels
include CH1-CH4.
⚫ Click Threshold, then use the pop-up numeric keypad or scroll with the
mouse to set the threshold of the source channel. When you modify the
threshold of the clock channel, a dotted line displaying the current threshold
Chapter 11 Protocol Decoding RIGOL
DS8000-R User Guide 11-21
level is displayed on the screen. The dotted line disappears in about 2 s
after you stop modifying the threshold.
4. Signal setting
Click Settings to enter the signal setting menu.
⚫ Set baud rate
The following setting methods are available for baud rate:
➢ Click Baud Rate, then set the user-defined baud rate with the
displayed numeric keypad. You can also adjust the baud rate by
scrolling with the mouse.
➢ Click Baud Rate, then select the preset baud rate from the available
options. The available baud rates include 2.4 kbps, 4.8 kbps, 9.6 kbps,
19.2 kbps, and etc.
⚫ Set the parity bit
Click Parity bit continuously to select whether the data contains the parity
bit.
⚫ Set the protocol version
Click Version to select a protocol version that matches the LIN bus signal.
The available versions include 1.X, 2.X, and Both.
5. Display-related setting
Click Display to enter the display setting menu.
⚫ Set the display format
Click Format to select the display format of the bus data. The available
display formats of the bus data are "Hex", "Dec", "Bin", and "ASCII".
⚫ Adjust the vertical position of the bus
Click Position, and then place the mouse cursor over the menu to scroll
with the mouse or drag the decode label at the left side of the screen to
adjust the vertical display position of the bus.
⚫ Set the label display
Click Label continuously to enable or disable the label display of the LIN
decoding bus. When enabled, the bus label "LIN" will be displayed at the
upper-left side of the bus (when the bus display is enabled).
⚫ Event table
Click Event Table to enter the event table setting menu. The event table
displays the detailed decoding information in time order in the form of a
table, so as to better observe the long decoded data. The decoding
information includes the decoded data, the corresponding line number, time,
RIGOL Chapter 11 Protocol Decoding
11-22 DS8000-R User Guide
frame ID, CRC, and error information.
➢ Open or close the event table: Click Event Table continuously to
enable or disable the event table. When you enable the event table,
the following figure is displayed, as shown in Figure 11-9. You can click
on the icon
at the upper-right corner of the table to close the event
table. Besides, when the operating status is "STOP", you can select a
specified line and view the corresponding decoding information.
Figure 11-9 LIN Decoding Event Table
Note:
⚫ When you adjust the horizontal time base, the waveform displayed
on the screen will also change, and the total number of lines
containing the decoding information in the event table will also be
changed.
⚫ The displayed decoded data information in the bus is related to the
value of the horizontal time base. Reducing the horizontal time
base can help you view the detailed information.
➢ Set the event table format: Click Format to select the display format of
"Data" in the event table. The available formats include "Hex", "Dec",
"Bin", and "ASC".
➢ Set the view type: Click View to select the form of the event table to
be viewed. The available choices include "Packets", "Details", and
"Payload". If you select "Packets", the decoded data, time, and error
information are displayed in the event table. If you select "Details", the
detailed data in the specified row will be displayed in the event table. If
"…" appears in the row of data, it indicates that the decoded data are
not fully displayed. At this time, you can view the details in the
"Packets" view. If you select "Payload", all data in the specified column
will be displayed in the event table. If "…" appears in the specified
Line Number Time Frame ID Decoded Data CRC Error
Event Table
LIN Bus
Chapter 11 Protocol Decoding RIGOL
DS8000-R User Guide 11-23
column of data, it indicates that the decoded data are not fully
displayed. At this time, you can view the details in the "Packets" view.
➢ Export: If you select "Packets", then set the operating status of the
oscilloscope to "STOP". You can export time and the corresponding
decoded data. Click Export, the save setting menu is displayed. You
can export the data table of the packets to the internal or external USB
storage device (when detected) in CSV format. For detailed saving
operation, refer to descriptions in "Store and Load".
➢ Jump to: Set the operating status of the oscilloscope to "STOP". Then,
select the data of the specified time from the event table. Click Jump
to and the specified data waveforms are displayed in the center of the
screen.
➢ Decode: The setting of this menu enables you to quickly view the
corresponding event tables of four decode modules (Decode1,
Decode2, Decode3, and Decode4). Click Decode to select a decode
module.
6. Interpret the decoded LIN data
⚫ Break (Sync Break): expressed in Hex, displayed as a pink patch.
⚫ SYNC (Sync): expressed in Hex, displayed in dark yellow-green.
⚫ ID (Frame ID): expressed in Hex, displayed in yellow-green.
⚫ Data (Data): its display format is the same as that of the bus data (Hex, Dec,
Bin, or ASCII), displayed as a black patch.
⚫ CRC (Cyclic Redundancy Check): expressed in Hex, displayed in light
yellow-green. When errors occur, it is displayed as a red patch.
⚫ Wakeup (wake up symbol): displayed as a tangerine patch.
7. Error expressions in decoding
In LIN decoding, the parity error, checksum error, or sync error may occur.
⚫ Parity Error
If the parity error is detected, frame ID and parity bit (when the signal is set
to include the parity bit) will be displayed in red, as shown in the figure
below.
Break Sync ID Data CRC
Chapter 11 Protocol Decoding RIGOL
DS8000-R User Guide 11-25
CAN Decoding (Option)
The oscilloscope samples the CAN signal at the specified sample position. The
oscilloscope will also judge each data point (logic "1" or logic "0") according to the
preset threshold level. You need to specify the CAN signal type and sample position
for CAN decoding.
In the decode setting menu, click Decode1 → Bus Type to select "CAN".
1. Enable or disable the bus
Click Bus Status continuously to enable or disable the decoding function.
2. Quickly apply CAN trigger settings to CAN decoding
Click Copy Trig to copy the CAN trigger settings and apply them to CAN
decoding function (set the corresponding CAN decoding parameters
automatically).
3. Set the source and the threshold
⚫ Click Source to select the desired source channel. The available channels
include CH1-CH4.
⚫ Click Threshold, then use the pop-up numeric keypad or scroll with the
mouse to set the threshold of the source channel. When you modify the
threshold of the clock channel, a dotted line displaying the current threshold
level is displayed on the screen. The dotted line disappears in about 2 s
after you stop modifying the threshold.
4. Signal setting
Sync Error
RIGOL Chapter 11 Protocol Decoding
11-26 DS8000-R User Guide
Click Settings to enter the signal setting menu.
⚫ Set the signal type
Click Signal to select a signal type that matches the CAN bus signal. The
available signal types include CAN_H, CAN_L, Rx, Tx, and Diff.
➢ CAN_H: indicates the actual CAN_H bus signal.
➢ CAN_L: indicates the actual CAN_L bus signal.
➢ Rx: indicates the Receive signal from the CAN bus transceiver.
➢ Tx: indicates the Transmit signal from the CAN bus transceiver.
➢ Diff: The CAN differential bus signals connected to an analog source
channel by using a differential probe. Connect the probe's positive lead
to the CAN_H bus signal and connect the negative lead to the CAN_L
bus signal.
⚫ Specify the standard signal rate
The following setting methods are available for baud rate:
➢ Click Baud, then set the user-defined baud rate with the displayed
numeric keypad. You can also adjust the baud rate by scrolling with the
mouse.
➢ Click Baud, then select the preset baud rate from the available options.
The available baud rates include 10 kbps, 20 kbps, 33.3 kbps, 50 kbps,
and etc.
⚫ Sample Position:
Sample position is a point within a bit’s time. The oscilloscope samples the
bit level at this point. The sample position is represented by the proportion
of "the time from the start of the bit to the sample position" to the "bit time",
as shown in the figure below.
Figure 11-10 Sample Position
Click Sample Position, then use the pop-up numeric keypad or scroll with
the mouse to set the sample position. The settable range is from 10% to
90%.
5. Display-related Setting
Click Display to enter the display setting menu.
One Bit
60%
70%
80%
Chapter 11 Protocol Decoding RIGOL
DS8000-R User Guide 11-27
⚫ Set the display format
Click Format to select the display format of the bus data. The available
display formats of the bus data are "Hex", "Dec", "Bin", and "ASCII".
⚫ Adjust the vertical position of the bus
Click Position, and then place the mouse cursor over the menu to scroll
with the mouse or drag the decode label at the left side of the screen to
adjust the vertical display position of the bus.
⚫ Set the label display
Click Label to enable or disable the label display of the CAN decoding bus.
When enabled, the bus label "CAN" will be displayed at the upper-left side
of the bus (when the bus display is enabled).
⚫ Event table
Click Event Table to enter the event table setting menu. The event table
displays the detailed decoding information in time order in the form of a
table, so as to better observe the long decoded data. The decoding
information includes the decoded data, the corresponding line number, time,
frame ID, data length code (DLC), cyclic redundancy check (CRC), and
Acknowledgement (ACK) information.
➢ Open or close the event table: Click Event Table continuously to
enable or disable the event table. When you enable the event table,
the following figure is displayed, as shown in Figure 11-11. You can
also click on the icon
at the upper-right corner of the table to close
the event table. Besides, when the operating status is "STOP", you can
select a specified line and view the corresponding decoding
information.
Figure 11-11 CAN Decoding Event Table
Line Number Time Frame ID DLC Decoded Data CRC ACK
Event Table
CAN Bus
RIGOL Chapter 11 Protocol Decoding
11-28 DS8000-R User Guide
Note:
⚫ When you adjust the horizontal time base, the waveform displayed
on the screen will also change, and the total number of lines
containing the decoding information in the event table will also be
changed.
⚫ The displayed decoded data information in the bus is related to the
value of the horizontal time base. Reducing the horizontal time
base can help you view the detailed information.
➢ Set the event table format: Click Format to select the display format of
"Data" in the event table. The available formats include "Hex", "Dec",
"Bin", and "ASC".
➢ Set the view type: Click View to select the form of the event table to
be viewed. The available choices include "Packets", "Details", and
"Payload". You can also tap "Packets", "Details", or "Payload" at the top
of the event table to select it.
If you select "Packets", the decoded data, time, and other information
are displayed in the event table. If you select "Details", the detailed
data in the specified row will be displayed in the event table. If "…"
appears in the row of data, it indicates that the decoded data are not
fully displayed. At this time, you can view the details in the "Packets"
view. If you select "Payload", all data in the specified column will be
displayed in the event table. If "…" appears in the specified column of
data, it indicates that the decoded data are not fully displayed. At this
time, you can view the details in the "Packets" view.
➢ Export: If you select "Packets", then set the operating status of the
oscilloscope to "STOP". You can export time and the corresponding
decoded data. Click Export, the save setting menu is displayed. You
can export the data table of the packets to the internal or external USB
storage device (when detected) in CSV format. For detailed saving
operation, refer to descriptions in "Store and Load".
➢ Jump to: Set the operating status of the oscilloscope to "STOP". Then,
select the data of the specified time from the event table. Click Jump
to and the specified data waveforms are displayed in the center of the
screen.
➢ Decode: The setting of this menu enables you to quickly view the
corresponding event tables of four decode modules (Decode1,
Decode2, Decode3, and Decode4). Click Decode to select a decode
module.
6. Interpret the decoded CAN data
⚫ Frame ID: expressed in Hex, displayed as a dark yellow-green patch.
⚫ DLC (Data Length Code): expressed in Hex, displayed as a blue-green
patch.
⚫ Data: its display format is the same as that of the bus data (Hex, Dec, Bin,
Chapter 11 Protocol Decoding RIGOL
DS8000-R User Guide 11-29
or ASCII), displayed as a green patch.
⚫ CRC (Cyclic Redundancy Check): expressed in Hex, displayed in
yellow-green. When errors occur, it is displayed as a red patch.
⚫ ACK (Acknowledgement): when effective, displayed as a light yellow-green
patch; when errors (ACK is detected to be 1) occur, displayed as a red
patch.
⚫ R (Remote frame): displayed as a tangerine patch.
⚫ Stuff (Bit filling error): displayed as a red patch.
FlexRay Decoding (Option)
FlexRay is a type of differential serial bus configured with three consecutive
segments (i.g. header, payload, and trailer). The oscilloscope samples the FlexRay
signal at the specified sample position and judges each data point as logic "1" or
logic "0" according to the preset threshold level. The FlexRay decoding is required to
specify the signal type and baud rate.
In the decode setting menu, click Decode1 → Bus Type to select "FlexRay".
1. Enable or disable the bus
Click Bus Status continuously to enable or disable the decoding function.
2. Quickly apply FlexRay trigger settings to FlexRay decoding
Click Copy Trig to copy the FlexRay trigger settings and apply them to FlexRay
decoding function (set the corresponding FlexRay decoding parameters
automatically).
3. Set the source and the threshold
⚫ Click Source to select the desired source channel. The available channels
include CH1-CH4.
Frame ID DLC Data CRC ACK
RIGOL Chapter 11 Protocol Decoding
11-30 DS8000-R User Guide
⚫ Click Threshold, then use the pop-up numeric keypad or scroll with the
mouse to set the threshold of the source channel. When you modify the
threshold of the channel, a dotted line displaying the current threshold level
is displayed on the screen. The dotted line disappears in about 2 s after you
stop modifying the threshold.
4. Signal setting
Click Settings to enter the signal setting menu.
⚫ Channel selection
Click Channel continuously to select a channel ("A" or "B") that matches
the actual FlexRay bus signal.
⚫ Specify the signal rate
Click Baud to open the baud rate list (2.5 Mbps, 5 Mbps, and 10 Mbps), and
select a preset baud rate that matches the actual FlexRay bus signal.
⚫ Set the signal type
Click Signal to select a signal type that matches the actual FlexRay bus
signal. The available signal types include BP, BM, and RX/TX.
⚫ Sample Position:
Sample position is a point within a bit’s time. The oscilloscope samples the
bit level at this point. The sample position is represented by the proportion
of "the time from the start of the bit to the sample position" to the "bit time",
as shown in the figure below.
Figure 11-12 Sample Position
Click Sample Position, then use the pop-up numeric keypad or scroll with
the mouse to set the sample position. The settable range is from 10% to
90%.
5. Display-related setting
Click Display to enter the display setting menu.
⚫ Set the display format
Click Format to select the display format of the bus data. The available
One Bit
60%
70%
80%
Chapter 11 Protocol Decoding RIGOL
DS8000-R User Guide 11-31
display formats of the bus data are "Hex", "Dec", "Bin", and "ASCII".
⚫ Adjust the vertical position of the bus
Click Position, and then place the mouse cursor over the menu to scroll
with the mouse or drag the decode label at the left side of the screen to
adjust the vertical display position of the bus.
⚫ Set the label display
Click Label continuously to enable or disable the label display of the
FlexRay decoding bus. When enabled, the bus label "Flexray" will be
displayed at the upper-left side of the bus (when the bus display is
enabled).
⚫ Event table
Click Event Table to enter the event table setting menu. The event table
displays the detailed decoding information in time order in the form of a
table, so as to better observe the long decoded data. The decoding
information includes the decoded data, the corresponding line number, time,
frame ID, and Payload Length (PL).
➢ Open or close the event table: Click Event Table continuously to
enable or disable the event table. When you enable the event table,
the following figure is displayed, as shown in Figure 11-13. You can
also click on the icon at the upper-right corner of the table to close
the event table. Besides, when the operating status is "STOP", you can
select a specified line and view the corresponding decoding
information.
Figure 11-13 FlexRay Decoding Event Table
Note:
⚫ When you adjust the horizontal time base, the waveform displayed
Line Number Time Frame ID PL Header CRC CYC Decoded Data Frame CRC
Event Table
FlexRay Bus
RIGOL Chapter 11 Protocol Decoding
11-32 DS8000-R User Guide
on the screen will also change, and the total number of lines
containing the decoding information in the event table will also be
changed.
⚫ The displayed decoded data information in the bus is related to the
value of the horizontal time base. Reducing the horizontal time
base can help you view the detailed information.
➢ Set the event table format: Click Format to select the display format of
"Data" in the event table. The available formats include "Hex", "Dec",
"Bin", and "ASC".
➢ Set the view type: Click View to select the form of the event table to
be viewed. The available choices include "Packets", "Details", and
"Payload". You can also click the "Packets", "Details", or "Payload" tab
at the top of the event table to select it.
If you select "Packets", the decoded data, time, and other information
are displayed in the event table. If you select "Details", the detailed
data in the specified row will be displayed in the event table. If "…"
appears in the row of data, it indicates that the decoded data are not
fully displayed. At this time, you can view the details in the "Packets"
view. If you select "Payload", all data in the specified column will be
displayed in the event table. If "…" appears in the specified column of
data, it indicates that the decoded data are not fully displayed. At this
time, you can view the details in the "Packets" view.
➢ Export: If you select "Packets", set the operating status of the
oscilloscope to "STOP". Click Export, the save setting menu is
displayed. You can export the data table of the packets to the internal
or external USB storage device (when detected) in CSV format. For
detailed saving operation, refer to descriptions in "Store and Load".
➢ Jump to: Set the operating status of the oscilloscope to "STOP". Then,
select the data of the specified time from the event table. Click Jump
to and the specified data waveforms are displayed in the center of the
screen.
➢ Decode: The setting of this menu enables you to quickly view the
corresponding event tables of four decode modules (Decode1,
Decode2, Decode3, and Decode4). Click Decode to select a decode
module.
6. Interpret the decoded FlexRay frame data
⚫ TSS: transmission start sequence, displayed as a pink patch.
⚫ Sync Frame: displayed as a pink patch.
⚫ ID (Frame ID): expressed in Hex, displayed as a blue-green patch.
⚫ PL (Payload Length): expressed in Hex, displayed as a dark blue patch.
⚫ HCRC (Header Cyclic Redundancy Check): expressed in Hex, displayed as a
yellow-green patch. When CRC error occurs, it is displayed as a red patch.
⚫ CYC (Cycle Number): expressed in Hex, displayed as a light blue patch.
⚫ Data: Its display format is the same as that of the bus data (Hex, Dec, Bin,
or ASCII), displayed as a green patch.
Chapter 11 Protocol Decoding RIGOL
DS8000-R User Guide 11-33
⚫ TCRC (Tail Cyclic Redundancy Check): expressed in Hex, displayed as a
yellow-green patch. When CRC errors occur, it is displayed as a red patch.
I2S Decoding (Option)
The oscilloscope samples the I2S signal and judges each data point as logic "1" or
logic "0" according to the preset threshold level. I2S decoding is required to specify
the serial clock, channel signal, and the data's source channel. You need to set
Alignment, WS Low, and other parameters.
In the decode setting menu, click Decode1 → Bus Type to select "I2S".
1. Enable or disable the bus
Click Bus Status continuously to enable or disable the decoding function.
2. Quickly apply I2S trigger settings to I2S decoding
Click Copy Trig to copy the I2S trigger settings and apply them to I2S decoding
function (set the corresponding I2S decoding parameters automatically).
3. Source Setting
Click Sources to enter the source setting menu.
⚫ Set the serial clock channel source, threshold, and clock edge
➢ Click SCLK to select the desired channel. The available channels
include CH1-CH4.
➢ Click SCLK Thre below SCLK, then use the pop-up numeric keypad or
scroll with the mouse to set the threshold of the SCLK. When you
modify the threshold of the clock channel, a dotted line displaying the
current threshold level is displayed on the screen. The dotted line
disappears in about 2 s after you stop modifying the threshold.
➢ Click SCLK Edge continuously to select "Rising( )" or "Falling( )"
as the desired clock edge.
⚫ Set the WS source and the threshold
➢ Click WS to select the desired channel. The available channels include
TSS Sync Frame Frame PL HCRC CYC Data TCRC
RIGOL Chapter 11 Protocol Decoding
11-34 DS8000-R User Guide
CH1-CH4.
➢ Click WS Thre below WS, then use the pop-up numeric keypad or
scroll with the mouse to set the threshold of the WS signal. When you
modify the WS threshold, a dotted line displaying the current threshold
level is displayed on the screen. The dotted line disappears in about 2 s
after you stop modifying the threshold.
⚫ Set the data channel source and the threshold
➢ Click Data to select the desired data channel source. The available
channels include CH1-CH4.
➢ Click Data Thre below Data, then use the pop-up numeric keypad or
scroll with the mouse to set the threshold of the data signal. When you
modify the threshold of the data signal, a dotted line displaying the
current threshold level is displayed on the screen. The dotted line
disappears in about 2 s after you stop modifying the threshold.
4. Bus Setting
Click Settings to enter the bus setting menu.
⚫ Set the word size
Click Word Size, then use the pop-up numeric keypad or scroll with the
mouse to set the word size. Its range is from 4 to 32.
⚫ Set the receiver word size
Click Receive, then use the pop-up numeric keypad or scroll with the
mouse to set the receiver word size. Its range is from 4 to 32.
⚫ Alignment
Click Alignment to select the alignment way for data signal. The available
alignment ways include I2S, LJ, and RJ.
⚫ Set the WS Low
Click WS Low continuously to select "Left" or "Right".
⚫ Endian
Click Endian to select "LSB" or "MSB". By default, it is "MSB".
⚫ Polarity setting
Click Data Polarity continuously to select Positive or Negative as
the polarity for data decoding.
5. Display-related setting
Click Display to enter the display setting menu.
Chapter 11 Protocol Decoding RIGOL
DS8000-R User Guide 11-35
⚫ Set the display format
Click Format to select the display format of the bus data. The available
display formats of the bus data are "Hex", "Dec", "Bin", and "ASCII".
⚫ Adjust the vertical position of the bus
Click Position, and then place the mouse cursor over the menu to scroll
with the mouse or drag the decode label at the left side of the screen to
adjust the vertical display position of the bus.
⚫ Set the label display
Click Label to enable or disable the label display of the I2S decoding bus.
When enabled, the bus label "I2S" will be displayed at the upper-left side of
the bus (when the bus display is enabled).
⚫ Event table
Click Event Table to enter the event table setting menu. The event table
displays the detailed decoding information in time order in the form of a
table, so as to better observe the long decoded data. The decoding
information includes the decoded left channel data, right channel data, the
corresponding line number, and time.
➢ Open or close the event table: Click Event Table continuously to
enable or disable the event table. When you enable the event table,
the following figure is displayed, as shown in Figure 11-14. You can
click on the icon
at the upper-right corner of the table to close the
event table. Besides, when the operating status is "STOP", select a
specified line and view the corresponding decoding information.
Figure 11-14 I2S Decoding Event Table
Note:
⚫ When you adjust the horizontal time base, the waveform displayed
Line Number Time Left Channel Data Right Channel Data
Event Table
I2S Bus
RIGOL Chapter 11 Protocol Decoding
11-36 DS8000-R User Guide
on the screen will also change, and the total number of lines
containing the decoding information in the event table will also be
changed.
⚫ The displayed decoded data information in the bus is related to the
value of the horizontal time base. Reducing the horizontal time
base can help you view the detailed information.
➢ Set the event table format: Click Format to select the display format of
"Data" in the event table. The available formats include "Hex", "Dec",
"Bin", and "ASC".
➢ Set the view type: Click View to select the form of the event table to
be viewed. The available choices include "Packets", "Details", and
"Payload". You can also tap "Packets", "Details", or "Payload" at the top
of the event table to select it.
If you select "Packets", the decoded data, time, and other information
are displayed in the event table. If you select "Details", the detailed
data in the specified row will be displayed in the event table. If "…"
appears in the row of data, it indicates that the decoded data are not
fully displayed. At this time, you can view the details in the "Packets"
view. If you select "Payload", all data in the specified column will be
displayed in the event table. If "…" appears in the specified column of
data, it indicates that the decoded data are not fully displayed. At this
time, you can view the details in the "Packets" view.
➢ Export: If you select "Packets", you can export time and the
corresponding decoded data. Set the operating status of the
oscilloscope to "STOP". Click Export, the save setting menu is
displayed. You can export the data table of the packets to the internal
or external USB storage device (when detected) in CSV format. For
detailed saving operation, refer to descriptions in "Store and Load".
➢ Jump to: Set the operating status of the oscilloscope to "STOP". Then,
select the data of the specified time from the event table. Click Jump
to and the specified data waveforms are displayed in the center of the
screen.
➢ Decode: The setting of this menu enables you to quickly view the
corresponding event tables of four decode modules (Decode1,
Decode2, Decode3, and Decode4). Click Decode to select a decode
module.
1553B Decoding (Option)
The oscilloscope samples the 1553B signal, and judges each data point to be logic
"1" or logic "0" according to the preset threshold level. 1553B decoding is required to
specify the data channel source and the threshold.
In the decode setting menu, press Decode1 → Bus Type to select "1553B".
Chapter 11 Protocol Decoding RIGOL
DS8000-R User Guide 11-37
1. Enable or disable the bus
Click Bus Status continuously to enable or disable the decoding function.
2. Quickly apply 1553B trigger settings to 1553B decoding
Click Copy Trig to copy the 1553B trigger settings and apply them to 1553B
decoding function (set the corresponding 1553B decoding parameters
automatically).
3. Set the data channel source and the threshold
⚫ Click Data to select the desired data channel source. The available
channels include CH1-CH4.
⚫ Click Threshold, then use the pop-up numeric keypad or scroll with the
mouse to set the threshold of the source channel. When you modify the
threshold of the channel, a dotted line displaying the current threshold level
is displayed on the screen. The dotted line disappears in about 2 s after you
stop modifying the threshold.
4. Display-related setting
Click Display to enter the display setting menu.
⚫ Set the display format
Click Format to select the display format of the bus data. The available
display formats of the bus data are "Hex", "Dec", "Bin", and "ASCII".
⚫ Adjust the vertical position of the bus
Click Position, and then place the mouse cursor over the menu to scroll
with the mouse or drag the decode label at the left side of the screen to
adjust the vertical display position of the bus.
⚫ Set the label display
Click Label to enable or disable the label display of the 1553B decoding bus.
When enabled, the bus label "1553B" will be displayed at the upper-left side
of the bus (when the bus display is enabled).
⚫ Event table
Click Event Table to enter the event table setting menu. The event table
displays the detailed decoding information in time order in the form of a
table, so as to better observe the long decoded data. The decoding
information includes the decoded data, word type, the corresponding line
number, time, and error information.
➢ Open or close the event table: Click Event Table continuously to
enable or disable the event table. When you enable the event table,
the following figure is displayed, as shown in Figure 11-15. You can
RIGOL Chapter 11 Protocol Decoding
11-38 DS8000-R User Guide
click on the icon at the upper-right corner of the table to close the
event table. Besides, when the operating status is "STOP", select a
specified line and view the corresponding decoding information.
Figure 11-15 1553B Decoding Event Table
Note:
⚫ When you adjust the horizontal time base, the waveform displayed
on the screen will also change, and the total number of lines
containing the decoding information in the event table will also be
changed.
⚫ The displayed decoded data information in the bus is related to the
value of the horizontal time base. Reducing the horizontal time
base can help you view the detailed information.
➢ Set the event table format: Click Format to select the display format of
"Data" in the event table. The available formats include "Hex", "Dec",
"Bin", and "ASC".
➢ Set the view type: Click View to select the form of the event table to
be viewed. The available choices include "Packets", "Details", and
"Payload". You can also click the "Packets", "Details", or "Payload" tab
at the top of the event table to select it.
If you select "Packets", the decoded data, time, and other information
are displayed in the event table. If you select "Details", the detailed
data in the specified row will be displayed in the event table. If "…"
appears in the row of data, it indicates that the decoded data are not
fully displayed. At this time, you can view the details in the "Packets"
view. If you select "Payload", all data in the specified column will be
displayed in the event table. If "…" appears in the specified column of
data, it indicates that the decoded data are not fully displayed. At this
time, you can view the details in the "Packets" view.
Line Number Time Word Type Data Error
Event Table
1553B Bus
Chapter 11 Protocol Decoding RIGOL
DS8000-R User Guide 11-39
➢ Export: If you select "Packets", you can export time and the
corresponding decoded data. Set the operating status of the
oscilloscope to "STOP". Click Export, the save setting menu is
displayed. You can export the data table of the packets to the internal
or external USB storage device (when detected) in CSV format. For
detailed saving operation, refer to descriptions in "Store and Load".
➢ Jump to: Set the operating status of the oscilloscope to "STOP". Then,
select the data of the specified time from the event table. Click Jump
to and the specified data waveforms are displayed in the center of the
screen.
➢ Decode: The setting of this menu enables you to quickly view the
corresponding event tables of four decode modules (Decode1,
Decode2, Decode3, and Decode4). Click Decode to select a decode
module.
5. Interpret the decoded 1553B data
⚫ C/S: command/status word. It is displayed as a blue-green patch.
⚫ RTA: remote terminal address of the command/status word. It is displayed
as a tangerine patch.
⚫ C/S data: the rest data value of the command/status word. Its display
format is the same as that of the bus data (Hex, Dec, Bin, or ASCII),
displayed as a green patch.
⚫ Parity bit: displayed as a yellow-green patch; when errors occur, displayed
as a red patch.
⚫ Data word data: data of the data word. Its display format is the same as
that of the bus data (Hex, Dec, Bin, or ASCII), displayed as a green patch.
C/S Word RTA C/S Data Parity Bit Data Word Data Word Data Parity Bit
Chapter 12 Reference Waveform RIGOL
DS8000-R User Guide 12-1
Chapter 12 Reference Waveform
DS8000-R series oscilloscope provides 10 reference waveform positions (Ref1-Ref10).
In the actual test process, you can compare the signal waveform with the reference
waveform to locate the failure.
Contents in this chapter:
◼ To Enable Ref Function
◼ To Select the Reference Channel
◼ To Select the Ref Source
◼ To Adjust the Ref Waveform Display
◼ To Save to Internal Memory
◼ To Clear the Display of the Reference Waveform
◼ To View Details of the Reference Waveform
◼ To Reset the Reference Waveform
◼ Color Setting
◼ Label Setting
◼ To Export to Internal or External Memory
◼ To Import from Internal or External Memory
◼ Binary Data Format (.bin)
RIGOL Chapter 12 Reference Waveform
12-2 DS8000-R User Guide
To Enable Ref Function
Click on the function navigation icon
at the lower-left corner of the screen to
open the function navigation. Then click on the "Ref" icon to enable the
reference waveform function.
When the Ref function is enabled, you can select a different color for each reference
waveform, set the source of each reference channel, adjust the vertical scale and
offset of the reference waveform, save the reference waveform to the internal or
external memory, and recall it when needed.
Note: When the horizontal time base is set to XY, the reference waveform function is
disabled.
To Select the Reference Channel
Click Current to select the desired reference waveform channel (Ref1-Ref10). Ref1
is enabled by default.
To Select the Ref Source
Click Source to select the desired reference waveform source (CH1-CH4 or
Math1-Math4).
Note: Only the currently enabled channel can be selected as the source channel of
the reference waveform.
To Adjust the Ref Waveform Display
After clicking SaveToRef, you can adjust the vertical scale and offset of the
reference waveform specified under Current.
⚫ Click VScale, then use the pop-up numeric keypad or scroll with the mouse to
set the vertical scale of the reference waveform.
⚫ Click VOffset, then use the pop-up numeric keypad or scroll with the mouse to
set the vertical offset of the reference waveform.
Chapter 12 Reference Waveform RIGOL
DS8000-R User Guide 12-3
To Save to Internal Memory
Click SaveToRef to save the displayed waveform for the specified source to the
internal memory as the reference waveform.
Note: This operation only saves the reference waveform to the volatile memory, and
the waveform will be cleared at power-off.
To Clear the Display of the Reference Waveform
Click Clear to clear the display of the current reference waveform on the screen.
Meanwhile, the VScale and VOffset menus for the reference waveform are grayed
out and disabled.
Note: This operation only clears the display of the reference waveform on the screen,
and the reference waveform is still saved in the memory.
To View Details of the Reference Waveform
Click More → Details, and the detailed information about all the reference
waveforms will be displayed on the screen in the form of a list. Click Details again to
close the details list. You can also click on the icon
at the right-upper corner of
the table to close it.
To Reset the Reference Waveform
Click More → Reset, and the reference waveform is restored to the position where
the source channel waveform is located when the SaveToRef operation was
executed.
RIGOL Chapter 12 Reference Waveform
12-4 DS8000-R User Guide
Color Setting
DS8000-R series oscilloscope provides five colors (gray, green, blue, red, and orange)
to mark the reference waveforms of different channels in order to distinguish the
reference waveforms of different reference waveform channels.
Click Color to select the color of the reference waveform of the channel. The GND
icon and the label at the left side of the waveform of the currently selected channel
will be filled with the specified color. For example,
and .
Label Setting
Click More → Label to enter the label setting menu. You can use the built-in label in
the library or manually input a label. Three input methods are available for you to
input a label name, including Chinese, English, and Traditional Chinese.
⚫ Click Display continuously to enable or disable the display of the reference
waveform label. If it is enabled, the label will be displayed at the left side of the
waveform. If the current channel is REFn (n=1,2, …10), then the default label of
the reference waveform is REFn (n=1, 2, …10).
⚫ Click Library to select the preset label. The available preset labels include
Default, ACK, ADDR, BIT, CLK, and etc.
⚫ Click Label, and the label editing interface is automatically displayed. You can
input the label manually. For the label editing methods, refer to descriptions in
"Channel Label".
To Export to Internal or External Memory
You can also save the current reference waveform to the internal memory or external
USB storage device. The file format of the reference waveform is ".ref", ".bin", or
".csv".
Click More → Export to enter the reference waveform file saving interface. Please
refer to descriptions in "Store and Load" to save the reference waveform to the
internal or external memory. Only when the reference waveform is saved, can this
export function be valid.
Note: DS8000-R series oscilloscope only supports the flash memory USB storage
device of FAT32 format.
Chapter 12 Reference Waveform RIGOL
DS8000-R User Guide 12-5
To Import from Internal or External Memory
You can also import the stored reference waveform file from the internal memory or
external USB storage device to the instrument and display the file on the screen.
Click More → Import to enter the reference waveform file loading interface. Please
refer to descriptions in "Store and Load" to import the reference waveform to the
instrument and display it on the screen.
Note: DS8000-R series oscilloscope only supports the flash memory USB storage
device of FAT32 format.
Binary Data Format (.bin)
Binary data format stores waveform data in binary format and provides data headers
that describe these data. As data is displayed in binary format, its file size is much
smaller than the ASCII format. If several channels are enabled, then all the displayed
channels will be saved (save the first channel then save the second, and then it goes
on like this until all the displayed channels are saved).
In BIN file format, the data are displayed as follows:
― CH1 data
― CH2 data
― CH3 data
― CH4 data
― Digital Channel Data
― Math Waveform Data
Binary Header Format
1. File Header
There is only one file header in a binary file. The file header contains the
following information.
Cookie
Two-byte characters, RG, indicating that the file is the RIGOL
binary data file format.
Version
Two bytes, indicating the file version.
File Size
A 4-byte integer, indicating the number of bytes in the file. It
includes the header.
Number of
Waveforms
A 4-byte integer, indicating the number of waveforms that are
stored in the file.
RIGOL Chapter 12 Reference Waveform
12-6 DS8000-R User Guide
2. Waveform Header
It is possible to store several waveforms in the file. Each stored waveform has a
waveform header. When several channels are stored, each channel can be
considered as a separate waveform. The waveform header contains the
information about the type of waveform data that are stored following the
waveform data header.
Header Size
A 4-byte integer, indicating the number of bytes in the
header.
Waveform
Type
A 4-byte integer, indicating the type of the waveform stored
in the file.
0 = Unknown
1 = Normal
2 = Peak Detection
3 = Average
4 = Not Used
5 = Not Used
6 = Logic
Number of
Waveform
Buffers
A 4-byte integer, indicating the number of waveform buffers
required to read the data.
Number of
Points
A 4-byte integer, indicating the number of waveform points in
the data.
Count
A 4-byte integer, indicating the number of hits at each time
interval during waveform recording when using a certain
sample mode (e.g. Average) to create the waveforms. For
example, when averaging, a count of 4 indicates that each
waveform data point in the waveform recording has been
averaged at least 4 times. The default value is 0.
X Display
Range
A 4-byte float, indicating the X-axis duration of the waveform
that is displayed. For time-domain waveforms,
it indicates the duration of time across the display. If the
value is zero, then no data has been acquired.
X Display
Origin
A 8-byte double, indicating the X-axis value at the left edge of
the screen. For time-domain waveforms, it indicates the time
at the start of the display. The value is treated as a double
precision 64-bit float point number. If the value is zero, then
no data has been acquired.
X Increment
A 8-byte double, indicating the duration between data points
on the X axis. For time-domain waveforms,
it indicates the time between points. If the value is zero, then
no data has been acquired.
X Origin
A 8-byte double, indicating the X-axis value of the first data
point in the data recording. For time-domain waveforms, it
indicates the time of the first point. The value is treated as a
Chapter 12 Reference Waveform RIGOL
DS8000-R User Guide 12-7
double precision 64-bit float point number. If the value is
zero, then no data has been acquired.
X Units
A 4-byte integer, indicating the unit of measurement for X
values in the acquired data.
0 = Unknown
1 = Volts (V)
2 = Seconds (s)
3 = Constant
4 = Amps (A)
5 = dB
6 = Hz
Y Units
A 4-byte integer, indicating the unit of measurement for Y
values in the acquired data. The possible values are listed
above under X Units.
Date
A 16-byte character array, not used
Time
A 16-byte character array, not used
Frame
A 24-byte character array, indicating the model number and
serial number of the oscilloscope in the format:
MODEL#:SERIAL#.
Waveform
Label
A 16-byte character array that contains the label assigned to
the waveform.
3. Waveform Data Header
A waveform may have multiple data sets. Each waveform data set has a
waveform data header. The waveform data header consists of information about
the waveform data set. The header is stored before the data set.
Header Size
A 4-byte integer, indicating the number of bytes in
the waveform data header.
Buffer Type
A 2-byte integer, indicating the type of the
waveform data stored in the file.
0 = Unknown
1 = Normal 32-bit float data
2 = Maximum float data
3 = Minimum float data
4 = Not Used
5 = Not Used
6 = Digital unsigned 8-bit character data (for
digital channels)
Bytes Per Point
A 2-byte short integer, indicating the number of
bytes per data point.
Buffer Size
A 4-byte integer, indicating the size of the buffer
required to hold the data points.
Note: DS8000-R series does not support the digital channel.
Chapter 13 Pass/Fail Test RIGOL
DS8000-R User Guide 13-1
Chapter 13 Pass/Fail Test
During the product design and manufacturing process, you usually need to monitor
the variations of the signal or judge whether the product is up to standard. The
pass/fail test function of DS8000-R series oscilloscope can accomplish this task
perfectly.
Contents in this chapter:
◼ To Enable or Disable the Pass/Fail Test
◼ To Start or Stop the Pass/Fail Test Operation
◼ To Select the Source
◼ To Create a Mask
◼ To Save a Mask
◼ To Load a Mask
◼ To Set the Output Form of the Test Results
◼ To Enable or Disable the Display of the Statistics of the Test Results
◼ Statistics Reset
RIGOL Chapter 13 Pass/Fail Test
13-2 DS8000-R User Guide
To Enable or Disable the Pass/Fail Test Function
Click on the function navigation icon
at the lower-left corner of the screen to
open the function navigation. Then, click on the "Pass/Fail" icon to open the
pass/fail test setting menu.
In the menu, click Enable continuously to enable or disable the pass/fail test
function.
Note: The pass/fail test function cannot be enabled in the following conditions:
when the time base mode is "XY" or "ROLL"; when the delay sweep is enabled.
To Start or Stop the Pass/Fail Test Operation
After the Pass/Fail test function is enabled, click Operate continuously to start or
stop the test operation.
During the test process, the oscilloscope will test the waveforms, display the test
information, and output the test failure information based on the current settings.
You can set the test mask, the display status of the test information, and the output
form of a failed test based on the selected source channel for the test. Then save the
test mask range to the internal or external memory, and then recall it when needed.
For the details, please refer to the following section.
Note:
⚫ Only when the pass/fail test function is enabled, can you start or stop the
pass/fail test operation, enable or disable the display of the test information,
save and recall the test mask range.
⚫ After starting the test operation, you can neither modify the source channel nor
adjust the test mask.
To Select the Source
Before selecting the source, connect the signal under test to the analog channel
input terminal of the oscilloscope. Click Source to select the desired source channel.
The available source channels include the analog channel (CH1-CH4).
Note: Only the channels that have been enabled currently can be selected.
Chapter 13 Pass/Fail Test RIGOL
DS8000-R User Guide 13-3
To Create a Mask
Click Mask → Create to self-define the mask of the pass/fail test. Click Range to
select the mask range. You can select "Screen" or "Cursor" as the mask region. The
default is "Screen".
⚫ If "Screen" is selected under Range, then the whole waveform display area is
considered to be the mask region. Click X Mask and Y Mask respectively. Use
the pop-up numeric keypad or scroll with the mouse to adjust the horizontal
tolerance range and vertical tolerance range of the test mask. During the
adjustment, two white curves would be displayed in the interface to show the
outline of the current mask. Click Create to apply the currently created mask
(the region not covered by blue within the screen).
⚫ When "Cursor" is selected, two cursors (used to specify the current test mask
range) will be displayed on the screen. Cursor A is at the left and Cursor B is at
the right. Click CursorA and CursorB respectively, and scroll with the mouse to
adjust the positions of both Cursor A and Cursor B. Also you can click CursorAB
and scroll with the mouse to adjust the two cursors synchronously (the spacing
between Cursor A and Cursor B remains unchanged). Then, refer to the above
methods to adjust the horizontal and vertical tolerance ranges, as well as create
a mask (the region not covered by blue within the cursor region).
To Save a Mask
When the pass/fail test function is enabled, you can save the current test mask range
to the internal memory or external USB storage device (when detected) in "*.pf"
format.
Click Mask → Save to enter the file saving interface. Please refer to descriptions in
"Store and Load" to save the test mask file to the internal or external memory.
To Load a Mask
When the pass/fail test function is enabled, you can load the test mask files from the
internal memory or external USB storage device (when detected) and apply them to
the current pass/fail test function.
Click Mask → Load to enter the file loading interface. Please refer to descriptions in
"Store and Load" to load the specified test mask files (in *.pf format) and apply
them to the current pass/fail test function.
RIGOL Chapter 13 Pass/Fail Test
13-4 DS8000-R User Guide
To Set the Output Form of the Test Results
Click Option to enter the "Option" menu. You can set what the oscilloscope will
execute when test results are detected according to your needs.
⚫ Set the output event and Aux output
➢ Click Output Event to select "Fail" or "Pass".
➢ Click Aux Output continuously to enable or disable the Aux output. If
enabled, open the function navigation menu, and then click Utility →
System, and then the AUX Out is automatically set to "PassFail". When a
successful or failed event is detected, a pulse will be output from the
rear-panel [TRIG OUT] connector. If the Aux output is disabled, click
Utility → System, and then the AUX Out is automatically set to "TrigOut".
The output of the rear-panel [TRIG OUT] connector is irrelevant with the
pass/fail test.
⚫ Set the output polarity and output pulse width
Click Polarity continuously to select "Positive" or "Negative". Then click Pulse,
use the pop-up numeric keypad or scroll with the mouse to set the pulse width.
Its range is from 100 ns to 10 ms. By default, it is 1 μs.
⚫ Set the error action
Click Err Action to set the operation that the oscilloscope will execute once a
failed test is detected.
➢ Stop: indicates stopping test when a failed test event is found.
➢ Beeper: indicates that the beeper sounds an alarm when a failed test
event is found (irrelevant with the on/off status of the beeper).
➢ Screenshot: performs the screenshot operation when a failed test event is
found. If an external storage device is detected, the screenshot will be
saved to the external storage device directly. Otherwise, it will be saved to
the local disk.
Note: If "Screenshot" is selected under Err Action, the test will be
stopped forcibly. After capturing the screenshot, the test will continue.
To Enable or Disable the Display of the Statistics
of the Test Results
Click Information continuously to enable or disable the display of the statistics of
the test results. You can also click on the icon
at the right-upper corner of the
statistics window to close it.
The test results statistics include the number of failed frames, the number of
successful frames, and total number of frames, as shown in the figure below.
Chapter 14 Waveform Recording & Playing RIGOL
DS8000-R User Guide 14-1
Chapter 14 Waveform Recording & Playing
Waveform recording & playing function can play the recorded waveforms of the
analog input channels (CH1-CH4), enabling you to analyze the waveforms better.
Note: The horizontal time base must be set to "YT" mode during waveform
recording.
Contents in this chapter:
◼ Common Settings
◼ Record Options
◼ Play Options
RIGOL Chapter 14 Waveform Recording & Playing
14-2 DS8000-R User Guide
Common Settings
Click on the function navigation icon
at the lower-left corner of the screen to
open the function navigation. Then, click on the "Record" icon to open the
waveform recording function setting menu.
1. Waveform Recording
Click Record continuously to enable the waveform recording function. Before
recording the waveform, you can refer to descriptions in "Record Options" to
set the waveform recording parameters. Click Record to start recording the
waveform. The record icon turns "
" from " " automatically. During the
recording, the current real-time recording information is displayed on the screen,
as shown in Figure 14-1. In the figure, the data at the left side of the slash is the
current frame. Its value changes constantly (the value under the Current menu
is changing constantly too), and the data at the right of the slash indicate the
number of frames for recording. The time difference △T at the upper-right
corner indicates the time different between the current frame and the first frame.
After the recording is completed, "
" automatically turns out to be " ". The
recording is stopped automatically. During the recording, you can double-click
any place on the screen to stop recording manually.
Figure 14-1 Recording Process Information
2. Play
Click Playing to start playing the recorded waveforms. " " automatically turns
out to be "
". For details about playing, refer to descriptions in "Play Options".
During the waveform recording, the current frame changes accordingly (the
value of the parameter Current changes accordingly). After playing is
completed, "
" automatically turns out to be " " automatically. During the
playing process, you can also double-click any place on the screen to stop
playing manually.
3. Current Frame
Click Current, then use the pop-up numeric keypad or scroll with the mouse to
set the current frame. At this time, the waveform of the current frame is
displayed on the screen.
Time Difference
Current Frame Recording Frames
Chapter 14 Waveform Recording & Playing RIGOL
DS8000-R User Guide 14-3
4. Set Transition
Click Jump To continuously to select to jump to the recorded end frame ( Last)
or the recorded start frame (
First). For settings of the start and end frames,
refer to descriptions in "Play Options".
Record Options
During the waveform recording, the oscilloscope records the waveforms of the
currently enabled channel at a specified interval until you manually stop the
recording operation or the number of recorded frames has reached the set value.
Note: Before starting the recording operation, turn on the desired channel and
adjust the waveform display to the desired state. When starting the recording
operation, you can neither enable/disable the channel output nor adjust the
waveform display.
Before recording the waveforms, you can click More → Setting to select "Record"
to set the following parameters.
1. Recording Interval
The recording interval indicates the time interval between the frames during the
recording process.
Click Interval, then use the pop-up numeric keypad or scroll with the mouse to
set the time interval between frames. The available range is from 10 ns to 10 s.
2. Recording Frames
The recording frames refer to the number of frames that can be recorded
actually. After starting the recording operation, the oscilloscope stops the
recording operation automatically when the number of recorded frames reaches
the set value.
Click Frames, then use the pop-up numeric keypad or scroll with the mouse to
set the number of recorded frames. The available range is from 1 to the
maximum number of frames that can be recorded currently (available in the
Max Frames menu). Click Set to Max to set the number of recorded
waveform frames to the maximum number of frames automatically.
3. Max Frames
The menu shows the maximum number of frames that can be recorded currently.
As the capacity of the waveform memory is fixed, the more the number of points
each frame of waveform has, the less the number of waveform frames that can
be recorded. Therefore, the maximum number of recorded frames is related to
the currently selected "memory depth" (refer to "Memory Depth"). The
current memory depth refers to the number of waveform points per frame.
Memory Depth = Sample Rate x Horizontal Time Base x Number of Grids in the
RIGOL Chapter 14 Waveform Recording & Playing
14-4 DS8000-R User Guide
Horizontal Direction. Therefore, the maximum number of frames of waveform
recording is also related to the "Sample Rate" and "Horizontal Time Base". This
oscilloscope provides ceaseless recording for a maximum of 450,000 frames of
real-time waveforms.
4. Beeper
Click Beeper continuously to set whether the beeper sounds when the
recording is completed.
⚫
: the beeper sounds at the end of recording.
⚫
: the beeper does not sound at the end of recording.
Play Options
Waveform playing function can play back the waveforms currently recorded. Before
playing back the waveforms, you can click More → Setting to select "Play" to set
the following parameters.
1. Play Mode
Click Mode continuously to set the playback mode to (cycle) or
(single).
⚫
: plays back repeatedly until you stop it manually.
⚫
: plays for a single time, and then stops automatically.
2. Playback Sequence
Click Sequence continuously to select the playback sequence to (playback
clockwise) or
(playback counterclockwise).
⚫
: plays from the start frame to the end frame.
⚫
: plays from the end frame to the start frame.
3. Playback Interval
The playback interval indicates the time interval between the frames during the
playing process.
Click Interval, then use pop-up numeric keypad or scroll with the mouse to set
the time interval between frames. The available range is from 5 ms to 10 s.
4. Start Frame
Click Start Frame, then use pop-up numeric keypad or scroll with the mouse to
set the start frame for playing back the waveforms.
5. End Frame
Click End Frame, then use pop-up numeric keypad or scroll with the mouse to
set the end frame for playing back the waveforms.
Chapter 15 Search and Navigation Function RIGOL
DS8000-R User Guide 15-1
Chapter 15 Search and Navigation
Function
The search function allows you to search for relevant events based on the search
condition that you set. The navigation function includes the recording & playing
navigation, time navigation, and event navigation.
Contents in this chapter:
◼ Search Function
◼ Navigation Function
RIGOL Chapter 15 Search and Navigation Function
15-2 DS8000-R User Guide
Search Function
The search function enables you to search the channel edge, Pulse trigger, Runt
trigger, Slope trigger, RS232 trigger, I2C trigger, or SPI trigger. Click on the function
navigation icon
at the lower-left corner of the screen to open the function
navigation. Then, click on the "Search" icon to open the search setting menu.
To Enable or Disable the Search Function
Click Search continuously to enable or disable the search function.
To Select the Search Type and Set the Parameters
Click Type to select the desired type (Edge, Pulse, Runt, Slope, RS232, I2C, or SPI).
⚫ Edge: Click Type to select "Edge" as the search type. For Edge Set menu
settings, refer to descriptions in "Edge Trigger". Click Threshold to enter the
threshold setting menu. Use the pop-up numeric keypad or scroll with the
mouse to set the threshold.
⚫ Pulse: Click Type to select "Pulse" as the search type. For Pulse Set menu
settings, refer to descriptions in "Pulse Trigger". Click Threshold to enter the
threshold setting menu. Use the pop-up numeric keypad or scroll with the
mouse to set the threshold.
⚫ Runt: Click Type to select "Runt" as the search type. For Runt Set menu
settings, refer to descriptions in "Runt Trigger". Click Threshold to enter the
threshold setting menu. Use the pop-up numeric keypad or scroll with the
mouse to set Threshold A and Threshold B.
⚫ Slope: Click Type to select "Slope" as the search type. For Slope Set menu
settings, refer to descriptions in "Slope Trigger". Click Threshold to enter the
threshold setting menu. Use the pop-up numeric keypad or scroll with the
mouse to set Threshold A and Threshold B.
⚫ RS232: Click Type to select "RS232" as the search type. For RS232 Set menu
settings, refer to descriptions in "RS232 Trigger (Option)". Click Threshold
to enter the threshold setting menu. Use the pop-up numeric keypad or scroll
with the mouse to set the threshold.
⚫ I2C: Click Type to select "I2C" as the search type. For I2C Set menu settings,
refer to descriptions in "I2C Trigger (Option)". Click Threshold to enter the
threshold setting menu. Use the pop-up numeric keypad or scroll with the
mouse to set the thresholds of SCL and SDA.
Chapter 15 Search and Navigation Function RIGOL
DS8000-R User Guide 15-3
⚫ SPI: Click Type to select "SPI" as the search type. For SPI Set menu settings,
refer to descriptions in "SPI Trigger (Option)". Click Threshold to enter the
threshold setting menu. Use the pop-up numeric keypad or scroll with the
mouse to set the thresholds of CLK, MISO, and CS.
To Copy Trigger
⚫ Copy to Trigger
Click More → To Trigger to copy the selected search type to the same trigger
type. For example, if the current search type is "Edge", click To Trigger to copy
the edge search settings to the "Edge Trigger" settings.
⚫ From Trigger
Click More → From Trigger to copy from the trigger settings of the selected
search type to the search settings. For example, if the current trigger type is
"Edge Trigger", click From Trigger to copy from the Edge trigger settings to
the "Edge" search settings.
Note: If you select "From Trigger", you need to set the search type first, and
then copy the trigger type settings from the trigger menu.
To Open or Close the Mark Table
Click MarkTable continuously to enable or disable the display of the mark table. The
mark table is shown as below. You can also click on the icon
at the right-upper
corner of the table to close it.
RIGOL Chapter 15 Search and Navigation Function
15-4 DS8000-R User Guide
To Navigate
Click Navigation, then use the pop-up numeric keypad or scroll with the mouse to
set the event No. to navigate the event. You can also use the Web Control method to
make navigations at a step of 1. For details, refer to descriptions in "Navigation
Function".
To Save
You can save the event mark data to the internal memory or external USB storage
device in "*.csv" format.
Click More → Save events to enter the file saving interface. Please refer to
descriptions in "Store and Load" to save the event mark data to the internal or
external memory.
Note: DS8000-R only supports the flash memory USB storage device of FAT32
format.
Navigation Function
When you control the oscilloscope in the Web Control mode, you can click the Pre,
NSTop, or Next keys at the right side of the operation interface to realize the
navigation function. The navigation function includes the recording & playing
navigation, time navigation, and event navigation.
⚫ Recoding & Playing Navigation
When you enable the waveform recording function and complete the waveform
recording operation, you can play the recorded waveforms by clicking the
navigation keys. Click the Pre key to play the recorded waveforms in reverse
order; click the Next key to play the recorded waveforms in normal order; click
the NStop key to stop playing.
⚫ Time Navigation
After the data acquisition stops, you can play the captured data waveforms in a
fast and continuous way. Click the Pre key to play the previous recorded
waveforms; click the Next key to play the next recorded waveforms; click the
NStop key to stop playing. Besides, click the Pre key or the Next key
repeatedly can accelerate the playing of the waveforms, so that you can quickly
locate the acquired data waveforms.
Note: The time navigation function is only available when the time base mode is
"YT" and the instrument stays in "STOP" status.
Chapter 15 Search and Navigation Function RIGOL
DS8000-R User Guide 15-5
⚫ Event Navigation
When you enable the navigation function and complete the event search, you
can use the navigation combination keys to quickly navigate the specific event in
the event mark table. Click the Pre key to navigate to the previous event (the
serial number in the mark table decreases); click the Next key to navigate to
the next event (the serial number in the mark table increases); the NStop key
does not work for the event navigation.
Chapter 16 Display Control RIGOL
DS8000-R User Guide 16-1
Chapter 16 Display Control
In the display control setting menu, you can set the parameters such as the
waveform display type, persistence time, intensity, grid type, grid brightness, and
etc.
Contents in this chapter:
◼ To Select the Display Type
◼ To Set the Persistence Time
◼ To Set the Waveform Intensity
◼ To Set the Screen Grid
◼ To Set the Grid Brightness
◼ Scale
◼ Color Grade
◼ Waveform Freeze
RIGOL Chapter 16 Display Control
16-2 DS8000-R User Guide
To Select the Display Type
Click on the function navigation icon
at the lower-left corner of the screen to
open the function navigation. Then, click on the "Display" icon
to open the
display setting menu. Click Type continuously to set the waveform display mode to
"Vector" or "Dots".
⚫ Vector display: indicates that the sample points are connected by lines and
displayed. In most cases, this mode can provide the most vivid waveform for you
to view the steep edge of the waveform (such as square waveform).
⚫ Dots display: displays the sample points directly. You can directly view each
sample point and use the cursor to measure the X and Y values of the sample
point.
To Set the Persistence Time
Click Persis.Time to set the persistence time for the oscilloscope. The available
values are Min, 100 ms, 200 ms, 500 ms, 1 s, 2 s, 5 s, 10 s, and Infinite.
The following part introduces the waveform effects of a Sine wave frequency sweep
signal in a different persistence time.
1. Min
Enables to view waveform changing in high refresh rate.
2. Specific Values
Enables to view glitches that change relatively slowly or glitches with lower
occurrence probability. The persistence time can be set to 100 ms, 200 ms, 500
ms, 1 s, 2 s, 5 s, or 10 s.
3. Infinite
In this mode, the oscilloscope displays the waveform newly acquired without
clearing the waveforms acquired formerly. The waveforms acquired formerly will
be displayed in relatively low-brightness color and the newly acquired
waveforms will be displayed in normal brightness and color. Infinite persistence
can be used to measure noise and jitter and to capture incidental events.
To Set the Waveform Intensity
Click Intensity, then use the pop-up numeric keypad or scroll with the mouse to set
the waveform intensity. The default is 50%, and the range available is from 1% to
100%.
Chapter 16 Display Control RIGOL
DS8000-R User Guide 16-3
To Set the Screen Grid
Click Grid to set the grid type. You can select "FULL", "HALF", "NONE", or "IRE".
⚫ FULL: turns the background grid and coordinate on.
⚫ HALF: turns the background grid off.
⚫ NONE: turns the background grid and coordinate off.
⚫ IRE: only available for testing the video signal (i.g. the trigger type is set to
"Video" trigger, and the vertical scale is set to 140 mV).
When "IRE" is selected, the screen displays the vertical graticule in IRE and
marks it at the left side of the screen. Its range is from -40 IRE to +100 IRE.
Meanwhile, 0.35 V and 0.7 V levels are displayed at the right side of the screen,
as shown in the following figure.
To Set the Grid Brightness
Click Brightness, then use the pop-up numeric keypad or scroll with the mouse to
set the grid intensity. The default is 20%, and the range available is from 1% to
100%.
Scale
Click Show Scale continuously to enable or disable the scale display on the screen.
By default, it is set to "OFF".
RIGOL Chapter 16 Display Control
16-4 DS8000-R User Guide
Color Grade
Click More → Color Grade to enable or disable the color grade display of the analog
channel waveforms on the screen. By default, it is set to "OFF". When enabled,
different colors are displayed on the screen to indicate the times of data acquisition
or acquisition probability.
Waveform Freeze
Click More → Waveform Freeze to enable or disable waveform freeze function. If
enabled, the waveform display is frozen. The oscilloscope displays the waveform
after multiple sampling and superposition when sampling is stopped by pressing
RUN/STOP on the front panel. If disabled, the last triggered waveform is displayed.
Chapter 17 Function/Arbitrary Waveform Generator (Option) RIGOL
DS8000-R User Guide 17-1
Chapter 17 Function/Arbitrary Waveform
Generator (Option)
DS8000-R series has an optional built-in single-channel, 25 MHz signal source, which
integrates the signal source and the oscilloscope into one, providing great
convenience for engineers who need to use the signal source and oscilloscope at the
same time. This chapter introduces how to use the built-in signal source.
Contents in this chapter:
◼ To Output Basic Waveforms
◼ To Output the Arbitrary Waveform
◼ Modulation
◼ Sweep
◼ Burst
RIGOL Chapter 17 Function/Arbitrary Waveform Generator (Option)
17-2 DS8000-R User Guide
To Output Basic Waveforms
Click the AWG label at the bottom of the screen to enable/disable the output of
the [GEN] connector on the rear panel, and enter the Function/Arbitrary Waveform
Generator setting interface. DS8000-R series' built-in Function/Arbitrary Waveform
Generator can output a variety of basic waveforms, including Sine, Square, Ramp,
Pulse, DC, Noise, Sinc, Exp.Rise, Exp.Fall, ECG, Gauss, Lorentz, Haversine, and Arb.
To Output Sine
Click Wave to select "Sine". At this time, you can set the parameters for the sine
waveform.
1. Set the frequency or period
Click the Frequency/Period menu to select "Frequency" or "Period". Select the
desired item, and use the pop-up numeric keypad or scroll with the mouse to set
the frequency or period value of the current signal. Different waveforms have
different frequency or period (reciprocal of the frequency) ranges.
Sine: 100 mHz to 25 MHz
Square: 100 mHz to 15 MHz
Ramp: 100 mHz to 100 kHz
Pulse: 100 mHz to 1 MHz
DC and Noise: no frequency parameter.
2. Set the amplitude or high level
Click the Amplitude/High Level menu to select "Amplitude" or "High Level".
Select the desired item, and use the pop-up numeric keypad or scroll with the
mouse to set the amplitude or high level value of the current signal. Note that if
you select "Amplitude" for this menu, then the menu below the Amplitude is
automatically turns out to be "Offset"; if you select "High Level" for this menu,
then the menu below the High Level is automatically turns out to be "Low
Level". When Impedance is set to "HighZ", the available range of the amplitude is
from 20 mVpp to 5 Vpp; when Impedance is set to "50Ω", the available range of
the amplitude is from 10 mVpp to 2.5 Vpp.
3. Set the offset or low level
Click the Offset/Low Level menu to select "Offset" or "Low Level". Select the
desired item, and use the pop-up numeric keypad or scroll with the mouse to set
the offset or low level value of the current signal. When Impedance is set to
"HighZ", the available range of the offset is from (-2.5 V+currently set amplitude
value/2) to (2.5 V- currently set amplitude value/2); when Impedance is set to
"50Ω", the available range of the offset is from (-1.25 V+currently set amplitude
value/2) to (1.25 V- currently set amplitude value/2).
Chapter 17 Function/Arbitrary Waveform Generator (Option) RIGOL
DS8000-R User Guide 17-3
4. Set the start phase
Click Start Phase, then use the pop-up numeric keypad or scroll with the mouse
to set the start phase of the current signal. Its available range is from 0° to 360°.
5. Setting options
Click Settings to enter the setting options menu. You can set the parameters
such as modulation, sweep, burst, and impedance.
⚫ Modulation, sweep, and burst
Click Type to select "None", "Modulation", "Sweep", or "Burst". For details
about modulation, sweep, and burst, refer to descriptions in "Modulation",
"Sweep", and "Burst".
Note: When "Pulse", "DC", or "Noise" is selected under Wave, this menu is
not available.
⚫ Set the impedance
Click Impedance continuously to set the output impedance of the
Function/Arbitrary Waveform Generator. It can be set to "HighZ" or "50Ω".
To Output Square
Click Wave to select "Square". At this time, you can set the parameters for the
square waveform. For setting methods, refer to descriptions in "To Output Sine".
The duty cycle of the square waveform is a fixed value 50%.
To Output Ramp
Click Wave to select "Ramp". At this time, you can set the parameters for the ramp
waveform. For setting methods, refer to descriptions in "To Output Sine". This
section only introduces "Symmetry".
Symmetry is defined as the percentage that the rising period of the ramp takes up in
the whole period, as shown in the figure below.
T
t
Symmetry=t/T*100%
Figure 17-1 Symmetry Definition
RIGOL Chapter 17 Function/Arbitrary Waveform Generator (Option)
17-4 DS8000-R User Guide
Click Settings → Symmetry, then use the pop-up numeric keypad or scroll with
the mouse to set the symmetry of the ramp waveform. The settable range is from
1% to 100%.
To Output Pulse
Click Wave to select "Pulse". At this time, you can set the parameters for the pulse
waveform. For setting methods, refer to descriptions in "To Output Sine". This
section only introduces "Duty Cycle".
Duty cycle is defined as the percentage that the high level takes up in the whole
pulse period, as shown in the figure below.
T
t
Duty Cycle=t/T*100%
Figure 17-2 Duty Cycle Definition
Click Settings → Duty Cycle, then use the pop-up numeric keypad or scroll with
the mouse to set the duty cycle of the current pulse signal. Its settable range is from
2% to 98%.
To Output DC
Click Wave to select "DC". At this time, you can set the offset and impedance of the
DC signal.
1. Set the offset
Click Offset, then use the pop-up numeric keypad or scroll with the mouse to
set the offset value of the current DC signal. When the current impedance is set
to HighZ, the settable range of offset is from -2.5 V to +2.5 V; when the
impedance is set to 50 Ω, the settable range of offset is from -1.25 V to +1.25 V.
2. Set the impedance
Click Impedance continuously to set the output impedance of the
Function/Arbitrary Waveform Generator. It can be set to "HighZ" or "50Ω".
Chapter 17 Function/Arbitrary Waveform Generator (Option) RIGOL
DS8000-R User Guide 17-5
To Output Noise
Click Wave to select "Noise". At this time, you can set the amplitude/high level,
offset/low level, and impedance of the noise signal. For detailed setting methods,
refer to relevant contents in "To Output Sine".
Sinc
Click Wave to select "Sinc". You can set the parameters for the Sinc waveform (as
shown in the figure below). For setting methods, refer to descriptions in "To Output
Sine".
Figure 17-3 Sinc
Exp.Rise
Click Wave to select "Exp.Rise ". At this time, you can set the parameters for the
Exp.Rise waveform (as shown in the figure below). For setting methods, refer to
descriptions in "To Output Sine".
Figure 17-4 Exp.Rise
RIGOL Chapter 17 Function/Arbitrary Waveform Generator (Option)
17-6 DS8000-R User Guide
Exp.Fall
Click Wave to select "Exp.Fall". At this time, you can set the parameters for the
Exp.Fall waveform (as shown in the figure below). For setting methods, refer to
descriptions in "To Output Sine".
Figure 17-5 Exp.Fall
ECG
Click Wave to select "ECG". At this time, you can set the parameters for the ECG
waveform (as shown in the figure below). For setting methods, refer to descriptions
in "To Output Sine".
Figure 17-6 ECG
Gauss
Click Wave to select "Gauss". At this time, you can set the parameters for the Gauss
waveform (as shown in the figure below). For setting methods, refer to descriptions
in "To Output Sine".
Chapter 17 Function/Arbitrary Waveform Generator (Option) RIGOL
DS8000-R User Guide 17-7
Figure 17-7 Gauss
Lorentz
Click Wave to select "Lorentz". At this time, you can set the parameters for the
Lorentz waveform (as shown in the figure below). For setting methods, refer to
descriptions in "To Output Sine".
Figure 17-8 Lorentz
Haversine
Click Wave to select "Haversine". At this time, you can set the parameters for the
Haversine waveform (as shown in the figure below). For setting methods, refer to
descriptions in "To Output Sine".
RIGOL Chapter 17 Function/Arbitrary Waveform Generator (Option)
17-8 DS8000-R User Guide
Figure 17-9 Haversine
To Output the Arbitrary Waveform
DS8000-R series oscilloscope allows you to define the arbitrary waveform and save it
to the internal or external memory. The user-defined waveform can contain 2 to
16,384 data points (i.g. 2 pts to 16 kpts).
Click Wave to select "Arb". At this time, you can set the parameters for the arbitrary
waveform.
To Load the Channel and Waveform
1. Load the Channel
Click Load from CH to enter the channel loading menu. You can set the
channel signal required to be loaded.
⚫ Channel selection
Click Channel to select the desired channel (CH1-CH4).
⚫ Set the waveform range
Click Region continuously to set the waveform in the "Cursor" or "Screen"
region for load. When "Cursor" is selected, click to select Cursor A or
Cursor B, and scroll with the mouse to adjust the positions of the two
cursors respectively. Click to select Cursor AB, and scroll with the mouse
to adjust the positions of cursors A and B at the same time to determine the
waveform range.
⚫ Load
Click Load to load the set channel signal.
2. Load the Waveform
Click Load Stored to enter the waveform loading interface. In the disk
Chapter 17 Function/Arbitrary Waveform Generator (Option) RIGOL
DS8000-R User Guide 17-9
management interface, select the waveform from the internal memory or the
external memory. The waveform file is suffixed with "*.arb". Then, click Load to
load the selected waveform. For details, refer to descriptions in "Store and
Load".
To Create the Waveform
You can create arbitrary waveforms according to your needs. Click Create to enter
the waveform creation menu. Meanwhile, the waveform editor is displayed on the
screen.
⚫ Set the frequency or period
Click to select Frequency or Period. For detailed setting methods, refer to
descriptions in "To Output Sine".
⚫ Set the amplitude or high level
Click to select Amplitude or High Level. For detailed setting methods, refer to
descriptions in "To Output Sine".
⚫ Set the offset and low level
Click to select Offset or Low Level. For detailed setting methods, refer to
descriptions in "To Output Sine".
⚫ Set the initial number of points
The initial number of points indicates the number of editable points. By default,
the number of editable points of arbitrary waveforms created can be preset to 2.
Point 1 is fixed at 0 s and Point 2 is fixed at the middle of the period. Click Init
Points, then use the pop-up numeric keypad or scroll with the mouse to set the
number of editable points for the arbitrary waveform. The maximum number of
editable points supported by the system is 16,384 (16 kpts).
⚫ Linear interpolation
Click Linear Interp to enable or disable the linear interpolation between the
defined points of the waveform.
➢ ON: the waveform editor connects two points using a straight line.
➢ OFF: the waveform editor will keep a constant voltage level between two
points and create a ladder-like waveform.
⚫ Edit points
Click Edit Points to enter the point editing menu. You can specify the voltage
value for each waveform point to define the waveforms.
➢ Current Point
Click PointX, then use the pop-up numeric keypad or scroll with the mouse
to select the points to be edited. The available range is from 1 to the
RIGOL Chapter 17 Function/Arbitrary Waveform Generator (Option)
17-10 DS8000-R User Guide
number of initial points.
➢ Voltage
Click Voltage, then use the pop-up numeric keypad or scroll with the
mouse to set the voltage value of the current point. Its available range is
from -2.5 V to +2.5 V.
➢ Insert
Click Insert to insert a new editable point between the current editing
point and the next editing point. The number of initial points adds 1
automatically. You can click Insert continuously to increase the editable
points gradually.
➢ Delete
Click Delete to delete the current point from the waveform, and connect
the remaining points with the current interpolation method.
➢ Zoom
Click Zoom continuously to enable or disable the zoom function of
horizontal time base.
➢ Apply
Click Apply to apply the current settings for the currently edited arbitrary
waveforms and output the edited waveforms.
⚫ Save the arbitrary waveform
Click Save to enter the file saving interface. Please refer to descriptions in
"Store and Load" to save the currently edited waveform file to the internal or
external memory in "*.arb" format (you can overwrite the original file or save
the currently edited waveform again).
To Edit Waveforms
You can edit the waveforms in the current volatile memory. Click Edit to enter the
waveform editing menu.
⚫ Set the frequency or period
Click to select Frequency or Period. For detailed setting methods, refer to
descriptions in "To Output Sine".
⚫ Set the amplitude or high level
Click to select Amplitude or High Level. For detailed setting methods, refer to
descriptions in "To Output Sine".
⚫ Set the offset and low level
Click to select Offset or Low Level. For detailed setting methods, refer to
descriptions in "To Output Sine".
⚫ Linear Interpolation
Click Linear Interp to enable or disable the linear interpolation between the
Chapter 17 Function/Arbitrary Waveform Generator (Option) RIGOL
DS8000-R User Guide 17-11
defined points of the waveform.
➢ ON: enables the linear interpolation. The waveform editor connects two
defined points by using a straight line.
➢ OFF: disables the linear interpolation. The waveform editor will keep a
constant voltage level between two points and create a ladder-like
waveform.
⚫ Edit Points
Click Edit Points to enter the point editing menu. You can specify the voltage
value for each waveform point to define the waveforms.
➢ Current Point
Click PointX, then use the pop-up numeric keypad or scroll with the mouse
to select the points to be edited. The available range is from 1 to the
number of initial points.
➢ Voltage
Click Voltage, then use the pop-up numeric keypad or scroll with the
mouse to set the voltage value of the current point. Its available range is
from -2.5 V to +2.5 V.
➢ Insert
Click Insert to insert a new editable point between the current editing
point and the next editing point. The number of initial points adds 1
automatically. You can click Insert continuously to increase the editable
points gradually.
➢ Delete
Click Delete to delete the current point from the waveform, and connect
the remaining points with the current interpolation method.
➢ Zoom
Click Zoom continuously to enable or disable the zoom function of
horizontal time base.
➢ Apply
Click Apply to apply the current settings for the currently edited arbitrary
waveforms and output the edited waveforms.
⚫ Save the arbitrary waveform
Click Save to enter the file saving interface. Please refer to descriptions in
"Store and Load" to save the currently edited waveform file to the internal or
external memory in "*.arb" format (you can overwrite the original file or save
the currently edited waveform again).
Modulation
The built-in Function/Arbitrary Waveform Generator of DS8000-R series oscilloscope
supports amplitude modulation (AM), frequency modulation (FM), and
frequency-shift keying modulation (FSK). A modulated waveform consists of a carrier
RIGOL Chapter 17 Function/Arbitrary Waveform Generator (Option)
17-12 DS8000-R User Guide
waveform and a modulating waveform. The carrier waveform is the waveform output
from the Function/Arbitrary Waveform Generator, and the modulating signal can be
the built-in sine, square, triangle waveform, or noise signal.
Click Settings → Type to select "Modulation".
Click Type to select the desired modulation type. The available modulation types
include AM, FM, and FSK.
AM
AM (Amplitude Modulation), namely the amplitude of the carrier waveform changes
with the amplitude of the modulating waveform, as shown in the figure below.
Figure 17-10 Amplitude Modulation
1. Select the Modulating Waveform
Click Waveform to select the desired modulating waveform. The available
modulating waveforms include Sine, Square, Triangle, and Noise.
2. Set the Modulation Frequency
Click Frequency, then use the pop-up numeric keypad or scroll with the mouse
to set the frequency of the modulation signal. The available range is from 1 Hz
to 50 kHz.
3. Set the Modulation Depth
The modulation depth refers to the strength of the AM and is expressed in
Modulating
Signal
Carrier Signal
Modulated
Waveform
Chapter 17 Function/Arbitrary Waveform Generator (Option) RIGOL
DS8000-R User Guide 17-13
percentage. Click AM Depth, then use the pop-up numeric keypad or scroll with
the mouse to set the AM depth of the modulating waveform. The available range
is from 0% to 120%. When it is set to 0%, the output amplitude is half of the
carrier amplitude. When it is set to 100%, the output amplitude equals the
carrier amplitude. When it is set to a value greater than 100%, envelop
distortion will occur, which must be avoided in actual circuit; at this point, the
output of the instrument will not exceed 2.5 Vpp (the load is 50 Ω).
FM
FM (Frequency Modulation), namely the frequency of the carrier waveform changes
with that of the modulating waveform, as shown in the figure below.
Figure 17-11 Frequency Modulation
1. Select the Modulating Waveform
Click Waveform to select the desired modulating waveform. The available
modulating waveforms include Sine, Square, Triangle, and Noise.
2. Set the Modulation Frequency
Click Frequency, then use the pop-up numeric keypad or scroll with the mouse
to set the frequency of the modulation signal. The available range is from 1 Hz
to 50 kHz.
3. Set the Frequency Offset
Click Deviation, then use the pop-up numeric keypad or scroll with the mouse
to set the frequency deviation of modulating waveform from the carrier
frequency. The available range of the frequency deviation is from 100 mHz to
the frequency of the current carrier waveform.
Modulating
Signal
Carrier Signal
Modulating
Waveform
RIGOL Chapter 17 Function/Arbitrary Waveform Generator (Option)
17-14 DS8000-R User Guide
FSK
FSK (Frequency-shift Keying) is a modulation method that uses the digital signal to
control the carrier frequency changes. It is one of the modulation methods that have
been early used in information transmission. Its advantages lie in good performance
in anti-noise and anti-attenuation, and it has been widely used in low and medium
rate of data transmission.
1. Set the Modulation Polarity
Click Polarity continuously to select "Positive" or "Negative" of the modulating
waveform to control the frequency output.
2. Set the Modulation Frequency
Click FSK Rate, then use the pop-up numeric keypad or scroll with the mouse
to set the frequency of the modulation signal. The available range is from 1 Hz
to 50 kHz.
3. Set the Hopping Frequency
Hopping frequency indicates the frequency of the modulating waveform. The
range of the hopping frequency is from 100 mHz to the maximum frequency of
the carrier waveform. By default, it is 10 kHz. Click Hop Freq, then use the
pop-up numeric keypad or scroll with the mouse to set the hopping frequency.
Sweep
The built-in Function/Arbitrary Waveform Generator of DS8000-R series oscilloscope
supports the sweep function. In the sweep mode, the Function/Arbitrary Waveform
Generator outputs from the start frequency to the end frequency at a specified
sweep time. DS8000-R series supports 3 sweep modes: Linear, Log, and Step. You
are allowed to set the parameters such as Start Keep, End Keep, and Return Time.
Internal and Manual trigger sources are supported. The sweep output is available for
Sine, Square, Ramp, and Arb (DC excluded) waveforms.
Click Settings → Type to select "Sweep".
1. Set the Sweep Type
Click Sweep Type to select the desired sweep type. The available sweep types
include Linear, Log, and Step.
⚫ Linear: the frequency of the signal changes linearly.
⚫ Log: the frequency of the signal changes in log form.
⚫ Step: the frequency of the signal changes with ladder-like step.
2. Sweep Settings
Click Settings to enter the sweep setting menu.
Chapter 17 Function/Arbitrary Waveform Generator (Option) RIGOL
DS8000-R User Guide 17-15
⚫ Set start frequency and end frequency
Start frequency and end frequency indicate the upper and lower limits of
the sweep frequency. The Function/Arbitrary Waveform Generator always
sweeps from the start frequency to the end frequency, and then returns
back to the start frequency.
➢ When start frequency is smaller than the end frequency, the
Function/Arbitrary Waveform Generator sweeps from low frequency to
high frequency.
➢ When start frequency is greater than the end frequency, the
Function/Arbitrary Waveform Generator sweeps from high frequency
to low frequency.
➢ When start frequency is equal to the end frequency, the
Function/Arbitrary Waveform Generator outputs at a fixed frequency.
Click Start Freq, then use the pop-up numeric keypad or scroll with the
mouse to set the start frequency. Click End Freq, then use the pop-up
numeric keypad or scroll with the mouse to set the end frequency. By
default, the start frequency is 100 Hz, and the end frequency is 1 kHz. The
ranges of start frequency and end frequency for different sweep waveforms
are different. After modifying the "Start Freq" and "End Freq", the
Function/Arbitrary Waveform Generator will restart to output from the
specified "Start Freq".
⚫ Start Keep
Start keep indicates the time that the output signal keeps outputting at the
"Start Freq" after the sweep starts. After the start keep time expires, the
Function/Arbitrary Waveform Generator will continue outputting at a
different frequency based on the current sweep type.
Click Start Keep, then use the pop-up numeric keypad or scroll with the
mouse to set the start keep time. The default is 0 s, and the range is from 0
s to 500 s.
⚫ End Keep
End keep indicates the time that the output signal continues outputting at
the "End Freq" after the Function/Arbitrary Waveform Generator sweeps
from "Start Freq" to "End Freq".
Click End Keep, then use the pop-up numeric keypad or scroll with the
mouse to set the end keep time. The default is 0 s, and the range is from 0
s to 500 s.
⚫ Set the step
When the sweep type is set to "Step", this menu is enabled and can be
settable. Click Step number, then use the pop-up numeric keypad or scroll
with the mouse to set the step value. By default, it is 2. Its available range
RIGOL Chapter 17 Function/Arbitrary Waveform Generator (Option)
17-16 DS8000-R User Guide
is from 2 to 1,000.
⚫ Set the trigger source
The trigger sources of the sweep can be Internal or Manual. When the
Function/Arbitrary Waveform Generator receives a trigger signal, a sweep
output is generated, and then it waits for another trigger signal.
Click Trig Source to select the desired trigger source. The available trigger
sources include Internal and Manual.
➢ Internal: The Function/Arbitrary Waveform Generator outputs
continuous sweep waveforms.
➢ Manual: When you click Manual Trig for one time, one sweep is
immediately launched for the corresponding channel.
3. Set the Sweep Time
Click Sweep Time, then use the pop-up numeric keypad or scroll with the
mouse to set the sweep time. By default, it is 1 s. Its available range is from 1
ms to 500 s. After modifying the sweep time, the Function/Arbitrary Waveform
Generator will restart to output from the specified "Start Freq".
4. Set the Return Time
Return time indicates the time that the output signal restores from "End Freq" to
"Start Freq" after the Function/Arbitrary Waveform Generator sweeps from
"Start Freq" to "End Freq" and the "End Keep" time expires.
Click Return Time, then use the pop-up numeric keypad or scroll with the
mouse to set the return time. By default, it is 0 s. Its available range is from 0 s
to 500 s.
Burst
The built-in Function/Arbitrary Waveform Generator of DS8000-R series oscilloscope
supports outputting the burst waveforms with a specified number of cycles. It
supports using internal and manual trigger sources to control the output of the burst
waveforms. Two burst types are supported: N Cycle and Infinite.
Click Settings → Type to select "Burst".
1. Set the Burst Type
Click Burst Type to select the desired burst type. The available burst types
include N Cycle and Infinite.
⚫ N Cycle: outputs the burst waveforms with a specified number of cycles
once receiving the trigger signal.
⚫ Infinite: sets the number of cycles to Infinite. It outputs continuous
waveforms once receiving the trigger signal.
Chapter 17 Function/Arbitrary Waveform Generator (Option) RIGOL
DS8000-R User Guide 17-17
2. Set the Number of Cycles
When the burst type is set to "N Cycle", you need to set the number of cycles.
Click Cycles, then use the pop-up numeric keypad or scroll with the mouse to
set the number of cycles. For the Infinite burst type, the Cycles menu is
disabled and grayed out.
3. Set the Burst Delay
Burst delay indicates the time from when receiving the trigger signal to starting
to output N Cycle of bursts or Infinite burst.
Click Delay, then use the pop-up numeric keypad or scroll with the mouse to set
the desired delay time. The range of the delay time is related to the burst cycles,
waveform frequency, and burst period.
4. Burst Setting
Click Settings to enter the burst setting menu.
⚫ Set the trigger source
The trigger sources of the burst can be Internal or Manual. When the
Function/Arbitrary Waveform Generator receives a trigger signal, a burst
output is generated, and then it waits for another trigger signal.
Click Trig Source to select the desired trigger source. The available trigger
sources include Internal and Manual. For the Infinite burst type, the Trig
Source menu is disabled and grayed out. You can only initiate an trigger
manually.
➢ Internal: The Function/Arbitrary Waveform Generator outputs
continuous N cycle bursts.
➢ Manual: When you click Manual Trig for one time, one burst output is
immediately launched for the channel. For the Infinite burst type, the
Cycles menu is disabled and grayed out.
⚫ Set the burst period
It is defined as the time from the beginning of one burst to that of another
burst.
Click Burst Period, then use the pop-up numeric keypad or scroll with the
mouse to set the desired burst period. Its available range is from 1 us to
500 s. By default, it is 10 ms.
Chapter 18 Store and Load RIGOL
DS8000-R User Guide 18-1
Chapter 18 Store and Load
You can save the current settings, waveforms, screen image, and parameters of the
oscilloscope in internal memory or external storage device (such as USB storage
device) in various formats and load the stored settings or waveforms when needed.
You can also copy a new file of the specified type as well as delete and rename the
specified type of file in the internal memory or external USB storage device via the
disk management menu.
Note: DS8000-R only supports the flash memory USB storage device of FAT32
format.
Contents in this chapter:
◼ Storage System
◼ Storage Type
◼ Load Type
◼ Internal Storage and Load
◼ External Storage and Load
◼ Disk Management
◼ Factory Settings
RIGOL Chapter 18 Store and Load
18-2 DS8000-R User Guide
Storage System
Click on the function navigation icon at the lower-left corner of the screen to
open the function navigation. Then click on the "Storage" icon to enter the store
and load setting interface. It provides two USB interfaces on the front panel and two
USB HOST interfaces on the rear panel, which can all be connected to the USB
storage device for external storage. The USB storage devices connected are marked
as "Removable USB Disk(D)", "Removable USB Disk(E)", "Removable USB Disk(F)",
and "Removable USB Disk(G)", respectively.
Storage Type
The file types for storage include image, waveform, and setups. The storage
descriptions of each type are as follows.
1. Image
Click Save Image → Format to select the image type. Save the screen image
to the internal or external memory in "*.png", "*.bmp", "*.jpg", or "*.tif"
format.
After selecting this type:
➢ Click File Name to input the file name to be saved. For filename input,
refer to descriptions in "To Create a Folder". Click Storage → More →
Auto Name to select "ON", then the filename is generated automatically. If
the filename that you input is the same as the existing filename, a prompt
message will be displayed, reminding you that the existing file will be
overwritten and asking you whether to continue or not.
➢ Click Invert to enable or disable the invert function.
➢ Click Color to select the desired storage color. It can be set to "Gray" or
"Color".
➢ Click NewFolder to create a new storage folder. For details, refer to
descriptions in "To Create a Folder".
➢ Click Window to display or hide the disk management interface.
➢ Click Save to save the set image file.
➢ Click Storage → More → Header to select "ON" or "OFF". If you select
"ON", the instrument model, firmware version number, serial number, and
the image creation date will be displayed in the header of the image when
you save the image file.
Chapter 18 Store and Load RIGOL
DS8000-R User Guide 18-3
2. Wave
Click Save Wave to enter the waveform storage setting interface. Save the
main setting information (e.g. "On/Off" state of the channel, vertical scale, and
horizontal time base) and waveform data of all enabled channels to the internal
or external memory.
After selecting this type:
➢ Click Data Source to select "Screen" or "Memory".
➢ Click Format to select the format of the waveform storage, such as "*.bin",
"*.csv", and "*.wfm" (when "Memory" is selected under Data Source).
➢ Click File Name to input the file name to be saved. For filename input,
refer to descriptions in "To Create a Folder". Click Storage → More →
Auto Name to select "ON", then the filename is generated automatically. If
the filename that you input is the same as the existing filename, a prompt
message will be displayed, reminding you that the existing file will be
overwritten and asking you whether to continue or not.
➢ Click Channel, and then the available storage channels include CH1-CH4.
Only when you select "Memory" under Data Source and the format is
"*.bin" or "*.csv", can you set the storage channel.
➢ Click NewFolder to create a new storage folder. For details, refer to
descriptions in "To Create a Folder".
➢ Click Save to save the set waveform file.
➢ Click Window to display or hide the disk management interface. When
"Memory" is selected under Data Source and the format is "*.csv", you
need to click More → Window.
➢ Click More → Time information to enable or disable the display of the
time information in the waveform data. If enabled, the time information for
the waveform data will be displayed. If disabled, the time information for
the waveform data will not be displayed. Only when you select "Memory"
under Data Source and the format is "*.csv", can you set the time
information.
3. Setup
Click Save Setup to enter the setup setting interface. Save the setups of the
oscilloscope to the internal or external memory in "*.stp" format. The stored
setups can be recalled.
After selecting this type:
➢ Click File Name to input the file name to be saved. For filename input,
Tip
After a USB storage device (FAT32 format, flash memory) is connected, you can
control the instrument through the Web Control page. Click Quick at the right
section of the operation interface to save the file. You can select to save to the
internal memory or the external USB storage device. By default, it is saved to the
external memory.
RIGOL Chapter 18 Store and Load
18-4 DS8000-R User Guide
refer to descriptions in "To Create a Folder". Click Storage → More →
Auto Name to select "ON", then the filename is generated automatically. If
the filename that you input is the same as the existing filename, a prompt
message will be displayed, reminding you that the existing file will be
overwritten and asking you whether to continue or not.
➢ Click NewFolder to create a new storage folder. For details, refer to
descriptions in "To Create a Folder".
➢ Click Window to display or hide the disk management interface.
➢ Click Save to save the set setup file.
Load Type
This oscilloscope provides two load types: waveform load and setup load. The
descriptions of each load type are as follows.
1. Waveform Load
Click Load Wave to load the waveforms from the internal memory or the external
USB disk. The default file type is "*.wfm", and no other options are available. Load
the file from the memory, then click Load to load the selected file.
2. Setup Load
Click Load Setup to load the setups from the internal memory or the external USB
disk. The default file type is "*.stp", and no other options are available. Load the file
from the memory, then click Load to load the selected file.
Internal Storage and Load
The internal memory supports the storage and load of the image file, waveform file,
setup file, reference waveform file, and pass/fail test mask file.
1. Save the Specified Oscilloscope Setups to the Internal Memory (Take
Save Setup as an Example)
1) Connect a signal to the oscilloscope and obtain the stable display of
waveforms.
2) Click Storage → Save Setup to enter the setup storage interface. The disk
management interface is displayed automatically. By default, "Local Disk(C)"
is selected.
3) Click to enter the internal memory storage interface.
4) Select the desired storage location. Clicking
can go to the previous
location. Besides, you can also click NewFolder to create a new storage
Chapter 18 Store and Load RIGOL
DS8000-R User Guide 18-5
folder. For details, refer to descriptions in "To Create a Folder".
5) Click File Name to name the setup file for storage. For details, refer to
descriptions in "To Create a Folder". Click Storage → More → Auto
Name to select "ON", then the filename is generated automatically. If the
filename that you input is the same as the existing filename, a prompt
message will be displayed, reminding you that the existing file will be
overwritten and asking you whether to continue or not.
6) Click Save to save the set setup file to the selected folder in "*stp" format.
Tip
⚫ After saving the reference waveform, click Ref → More → Export to enter
the disk management interface of reference waveform file storage.
⚫ Click Utility → PassFail to enable the pass/fail test function. Then click
Mask → Save to enter the disk management interface of pass/fail test mask
file storage.
2. Load the Setup File from the Internal Memory (Take Load Setup as an
Example)
1) Click Storage → Load Setup to enter the setup load interface. The disk
management interface is displayed automatically. By default, "Local Disk(C)"
is selected.
2) Click to enter the internal memory storage interface.
3) Select the desired storage location. Clicking
can go to the previous
location.
4) Select the file to be loaded (the default file type is in "*stp" format). Then,
the Load menu is enabled. Click Load to load the selected file.
Tip
⚫ Click Ref → More → Import to enter the disk management interface of
reference waveform file load.
⚫ Click Utility → PassFail to enable the pass/fail test function. Then click
Mask → Load to enter the disk management interface of pass/fail test mask
file load.
RIGOL Chapter 18 Store and Load
18-6 DS8000-R User Guide
External Storage and Load
Before external storage and recall, ensure that the USB disk is properly connected.
The external memory supports image saving, waveform saving, setup saving,
waveform loading, and setup loading.
1. Save the Specified Type of File to the External USB Storage Device
(Take Waveform Saving as an Example)
1) Connect a signal to the oscilloscope and obtain the stable display of
waveforms.
2) Click Storage → Save Wave to enter the waveform storage interface. The
disk management interface is displayed automatically.
3) Click to select one disk from "Removable USB Disk(D/E/F/G…)" to open the
external disk storage interface. Clicking
can go to the previous
location. Besides, you can also click NewFolder to create a new storage
folder. For details, refer to descriptions in "To Create a Folder".
4) To set the waveform saving, refer to descriptions of "Wave" in "Storage
Type".
5) Click Save to save the waveform file to the selected folder in the specified
save format.
2. Load the Specified Type of File from the External USB Storage Device
(Take Waveform Loading as an Example)
1) Click Storage → Load Wave to enter the waveform loading interface. The
disk management interface is displayed automatically.
2) Click to select one disk from "Removable USB Disk(D/E/F/G…)" to open the
external disk storage interface. Clicking
can go to the previous
location.
3) After selecting a file to be loaded, then the Load menu is enabled. Click
Load to load the selected file.
Disk Management
Click Storage → Disk to turn on the disk management interface as shown in Figure
18-1. The disk currently selected is displayed in red shading. Click to open the
selected disk.
Chapter 18 Store and Load RIGOL
DS8000-R User Guide 18-7
Figure 18-1 Disk Management Interface
Execute the following operations through the disk management menu:
⚫ To Select a File Type
⚫ To Create a Folder
⚫ To Delete a File or Folder
⚫ To Copy and Paste a File or Folder
⚫ To Rename a File or Folder
⚫ To Clear the Internal Memory Safely
To Select a File Type
Except the image storage, waveform storage, and setup storage, the oscilloscope
can also save the files of advanced applications.
Click Storage → Disk → File Type to select the desired file type. The default is
"*.*". In the current path, only the file whose suffix of its file name matches that of
the file type selected will be displayed in the current path.
To Create a Folder
Before using the external disk, make sure that a USB storage device (FAT32 format,
flash memory) is connected correctly.
In the disk management interface, click to select the storage location. By default, the
internal memory "Local Disk(C)" is selected. Click NewFolder to enter the interface,
as shown in Figure 18-2.
RIGOL Chapter 18 Store and Load
18-8 DS8000-R User Guide
Figure 18-2 To Create a Folder
This oscilloscope supports Chinese/English input method. The length of the folder
name is limited to 22 bytes (one Chinese character occupies two bytes). The
following part introduces how to input a folder name using Chinese/English input
method.
English Input Method
For example, create a folder with the name "Filename".
1. Select English Input Method
If the current input method is "En/中/繁", please go to Step 2. If the current
input method is "中/繁/En" or "繁/En/中", click to select the input switch key
"En/中/繁". "En" is located first and highlighted.
Name Input Area Virtual Keypad
Upper/Lower
Case Switch
Input Method
Switch
Chapter 18 Store and Load RIGOL
DS8000-R User Guide 18-9
2. Clear the Name Input Area
If there is no character in the "Name Input Area", please go to Step 3. If there
are characters in the "Name Input Area", click the Delete key
to delete all
the characters in the name input area in order.
3. Input the First Character "F"
1) If the current setting is uppercase input, please go to Step 2). If the current
setting is lowercase input, click "Caps" to switch to the uppercase input.
2) Click to select "F". The character is displayed in the name input area.
4. Input the Other Characters
Use the same method to input the remaining letters "ilename" by referring to
Step 3. Pay attention to the upper-lower case of the letters when inputting them.
5. Modify or Delete the Unwanted Characters that Have Been Entered.
While entering a filename, you can modify or delete the unwanted character if
necessary. To delete the input characters, select and click the delete key
in
the virtual keypad. To modify the input characters, delete the unwanted
characters and input the desired characters again. If the character to be
modified is in the middle, click the delete key
to delete the characters
starting from the last one to the character to be modified, then input the new
character again.
You can also directly move the cursor to the character required to be modified or
deleted, and then input the desired character again or delete the unwanted
character.
6. After finishing the input, click OK. The oscilloscope will create a folder or a
specified type of file with this name under the current directory.
Simplified Chinese (or Traditional Chinese) Input Method
For example, create a folder with the name "文件名". Note that the input method of
traditional Chinese is the same as that of the simplified Chinese.
RIGOL Chapter 18 Store and Load
18-10 DS8000-R User Guide
1. Chinese Input Method
If the current input method is "中/繁/En", please go to Step 2. If the current
input method is "En/中/繁" or "繁/En/中", click the input switch key to switch to
"中/繁/En". "中" is located first and highlighted.
2. Clear the Pinyin Input Area and Name Input Area
If there is no character in the "Pinyin Input Area" and "Name Input Area", please
go to Step 3. If there are characters in the "Name Input Area" and "Pinyin Input
Area", click to select the delete key
to delete all the characters in the name
input area in order.
3. Input the First Chinese Character "
文"
1) Input the pinyin "wen" in the "Pinyin Input Area"
Click to select the first letter "w" in the pinyin "wen" to input "w" in the
"Pinyin Input Area". Use the same method to input the remaining letters
"en" in the pinyin "wen". After finishing the input, the Chinese characters
available are displayed in the "Chinese Character Selecting Area".
2) Select the desired Chinese character from the "Chinese Character Selecting
Area"
Click to select "文", and then "文" is input in the "Name Input Area". If the
Chinese character is not found in the current page, click
to go to the
next page until you find the desired character.
4. Input the Other Characters
Refer to Step 3 and use the same method to input the remaining Chinese
characters "件名" in sequence.
5. Modify or Delete the Unwanted Characters that Have Been Entered
When inputting the filename, you can modify or delete the filename characters
input in the "Name Input Area" as well as delete the pinyin characters input in
Name Input Area Chinese Character Selection Area Pinyin Input Area Virtual Keypad
Go to Previous
Page
Upper/Lower
Case Switch
Input Method
Switch
Go to
Next Page
Chapter 18 Store and Load RIGOL
DS8000-R User Guide 18-11
the "Pinyin Input Area". To delete the input characters, select and click the
delete key
in the virtual keypad. To modify the input characters, delete the
unwanted characters and input the desired characters again. If the character to
be modified is in the middle, click the delete key
to delete the characters
starting from the last one to the character to be modified, then input the new
character again.
You can also directly move the cursor to the character required to be modified or
deleted, and then input the desired character again or delete the character.
6. After finishing the input, click OK. The oscilloscope will create a folder or a
specified type of file with this name under the current directory.
To Delete a File or Folder
1. Delete a File or Folder from the Internal Memory
1) Click Storage → Disk to open the internal memory "Local Disk(C)".
2) Scroll with the mouse to select the file or the folder to be deleted.
3) Click Delete, and then a confirmation dialog box is displayed. Click "Yes" to
delete the file or the folder.
2. Delete a File or Folder from the External Memory
1) Click Storage → Disk to open the external memory.
2) Scroll with the mouse to select the file or the folder to be deleted.
3) Click Delete, and then a confirmation dialog box is displayed. Click "Yes" to
delete the file or the folder.
To Copy and Paste a File or Folder
1) Click Storage → Disk to select a path.
2) Scroll with the mouse to select the file or folder to be copied and pasted.
3) Click Copy to copy the selected file or folder.
4) Select the destination disk, then click Paste to paste the selected file or folder.
Tip
If characters already exist in the Pinyin input area, when deleting the
characters in the name input area, the characters in the Pinyin input area will
be deleted first.
Tip
When you delete a directory where a file or a folder exists, the directory cannot be
deleted.
RIGOL Chapter 18 Store and Load
18-12 DS8000-R User Guide
To Rename a File or Folder
1) Click Storage → Disk to select the internal or external memory.
2) Scroll with the mouse to select the file or folder to be renamed.
3) Click Rename, and then the filename input interface is displayed. For the
filename input method, refer to descriptions in "To Create a Folder".
To Clear the Internal Memory Safely
1) Click Storage → Disk → More.
2) Click SecurityClear, and then a prompt message "Execute secure memory
wipe?" for confirming security clear is displayed.
3) Click OK to clear all the files stored in the internal memory.
Export
Click Export to export the selected file to the external memory.
Factory Settings
Click Storage → More → Default, then a prompt message "Restore default
settings?" is displayed. Click OK to restore the oscilloscope to the factory default
settings, as shown in the table below.
Tip
If the destination directory has the same file or folder that you want to paste,
then a prompt message "File or directory exists" is displayed. You are not
allowed to execute the copy and paste operation.
Chapter 18 Store and Load RIGOL
DS8000-R User Guide 18-13
Table 18-1 Factory Settings
Parameter
Factory Settings
Horizontal
Vertical
Acquire
Trigger
Display
AWG (Gen)
Cursor
Storage
Utility
Math
Protocol Decoding (Decode)
Ref
Horizontal
Horizontal Time
Base
1 μs
Horizontal Position
0 s
Delayed Sweep
Off
Timebase Mode
YT
Fine
Off
Horizontal
Expansion
Center
Vertical
Vertical Scale
100 mV
Vertical Offset
0 V
CH1
On
CH2
Off
CH3
Off
CH4
Off
Channel Coupling
DC
BW Limit
Off
Attenuation
1X
Input Impedance
1 MΩ
Invert
Off
Fine
Off
Channel Unit
[V]
Display Label
Off
Ch-Ch Skew
0 s
Offset Cal
0 V
Acquire
Acquisition Mode
Normal
Memory Depth
1 M
RIGOL Chapter 18 Store and Load
18-14 DS8000-R User Guide
Anti-Aliasing
Off
Trigger
Trigger Type
Edge Trigger
Source Selection
CH1
Edge Type
Rising
Trigger Mode
Auto
Trigger Coupling
DC
Trigger Holdoff
8 ns
Noise Rejection
Off
Display
Display Type
Vector
Persistence Time
Min
Intensity
50%
Grid
FULL
Brightness
20%
Show Scale
Off
Color Grade
Off
Waveform Freeze
On
AWG (Gen)
[1]
Gen
Off
Status Display
Off
Gen
Wave
Sine
Output
Off
Frequency
1 kHz
Amplitude
500 mV
Offset
0 V
Start Phase
0°
Type
None
Impedance
HighZ
Cursor
Mode
Off
Manual
Select
Y
Source
CH1
AY
100 mV
BY
-100 mV
Vertical Unit
Source
Hori. Unit
s
Region
Main
Chapter 18 Store and Load RIGOL
DS8000-R User Guide 18-15
Track
AX Source
CH1
BX Source
CH1
AX
-1 μs
BX
1 μs
Track
X
XY
AX
-233.3 mV
BX
100 mV
AY
-233.3 mV
BY
-100 mV
Measure
Indicator
Off
Storage
Auto Name
ON
Header
ON
Save Image
Format
*.png
Invert
OFF
Color
Color
Window
Show
Save Wave
Data Source
Screen
Format
*.csv
Window
Show
Save Setup
File Type
*.stp
Window
Show
Load Wave
File Type
*.wfm
Load Setup
File Type
*.stp
Disk
File Type
*.*
Utility
Beeper
OFF
PassFail
Enable
OFF
Source
CH1
Operate
Stop
Range
Screen
X Mask
0.24 div
RIGOL Chapter 18 Store and Load
18-16 DS8000-R User Guide
Y Mask
0.48 div
Load File Type
*.pf
Save File Type
*.pf
File Name
RigolDS0
Window
Show
Information
OFF
Aux Output
OFF
Output Event
Fail
Polarity
Positive
Pulse
1 μs
Err Action
None
Record
Record
OFF
Record
Play
Record
Interval
10 ns
Beeper
Current
0
Play
Mode
Sequence
Interval
100 ms
Current
0
Jump To
First
System
Power On
Default
Power status
Switch Off
AUX Out
TrigOut
Ref Clock
OFF
Key Locker
Unlocked
HDMI Output
ON
HDMI Resolution
1280x720
Screen Saver
Off
SelfCal
Window
Open
Auto Config
Peak to Peak
OFF
CH
All
Overlay
OFF
Coupling
OFF
Printer
Copies
3
Paper Size
A4
Chapter 18 Store and Load RIGOL
DS8000-R User Guide 18-17
Ink Saver
ON
Printer
HP/Laserjet
Email
Attachment
Screen
Quick Settings
Operation
Save Image
Format
*.png
Invert
OFF
Color
Color
Math
Invert
OFF
Expand
GND
Display Label
OFF
Library
ADD
Label Editing
ADD
A+B
Operation
OFF
SourceA
CH1
SourceB
CH1
Offset
0 V
Scale
500 mV
A-B
Operation
OFF
SourceA
CH1
SourceB
CH1
Offset
0 V
Scale
500 mV
A×B
Operation
OFF
SourceA
CH1
SourceB
CH1
Offset
0 U
Scale
500 mU
A÷B
Operation
OFF
SourceA
CH1
SourceB
CH1
Offset
0 U
Scale
500 mU
FFT
Operation
OFF
Source
CH1
Offset
0 dBV
RIGOL Chapter 18 Store and Load
18-18 DS8000-R User Guide
Scale
2 dBV
Unit
dBm/dBV
X
Start-End
Start Freq
0 Hz
Stop Freq
10 MHz
Window Function
Hanning
Peak Search
OFF
Peak Number
5
Threshold
5.5 dBV
Excursion
1.8 dBV
Table Order
Amp Order
A&&B
Operation
OFF
SourceA
CH1
SourceB
CH1
Wave Size
Medium
Thre.CH1
0 V
Thre.CH2
0 V
Thre.CH3
0 V
Thre.CH4
0 V
Sensitivity
0.3 Div
A||B
Operation
OFF
SourceA
CH1
SourceB
CH1
Wave Size
Medium
Thre.CH1
0 V
Thre.CH2
0 V
Thre.CH3
0 V
Thre.CH4
0 V
Sensitivity
0.3 Div
A^B
Operation
OFF
SourceA
CH1
SourceB
CH1
Wave Size
Medium
Thre.CH1
0 V
Thre.CH2
0 V
Thre.CH3
0 V
Thre.CH4
0 V
Sensitivity
0.3 Div
!A
Operation
OFF
SourceA
CH1
Chapter 18 Store and Load RIGOL
DS8000-R User Guide 18-19
Wave Size
Medium
Thre.CH1
0 V
Thre.CH2
0 V
Thre.CH3
0 V
Thre.CH4
0 V
Sensitivity
0.3 Div
Intg
Operation
OFF
Source
CH1
Offset
0 v*s
Scale
500 mv*s
Bias
0
Invert
OFF
Diff
Operation
OFF
Source
CH1
Offset
0 v/s
Scale
500 mv/s
Smooth
5
Invert
OFF
Sqrt
Operation
OFF
Source
CH1
Offset
0 U
Scale
500 mU
Invert
OFF
Lg
Operation
OFF
Source
CH1
Offset
0 U
Scale
500 mU
Invert
OFF
Ln
Operation
OFF
Source
CH1
Offset
0 U
Scale
500 mU
Invert
OFF
Exp
Operation
OFF
Source
CH1
Offset
0 U
Scale
500 mU
Invert
OFF
RIGOL Chapter 18 Store and Load
18-20 DS8000-R User Guide
Abs
Operation
OFF
Source
CH1
Offset
0 V
Scale
500 mU
Invert
OFF
Low Pass
Operation
OFF
Source
CH1
Offset
0 V
Scale
500 mV
ωc
50 MHz
Invert
OFF
High Pass
Operation
OFF
Source
CH1
Offset
0 V
Scale
500 mV
ωc
50 MHz
Invert
OFF
Band Pass
Operation
OFF
Source
CH1
Offset
0 V
Scale
500 mV
ωc1
50 MHz
ωc2
100 MHz
Invert
OFF
Band Stop
Operation
OFF
Source
CH1
Offset
0 V
Scale
500 mV
ωc1
50 MHz
ωc2
100 MHz
Invert
OFF
AX+B
Operation
OFF
Source
CH1
Offset
0 V
Scale
500 mV
A
1
B
0
Invert
OFF
Chapter 18 Store and Load RIGOL
DS8000-R User Guide 18-21
Protocol Decoding (Decode)
Bus Type
Parallel
Bus Status
OFF
Format
Hex
Label
ON
Event Table
OFF
Noise Reject
OFF
CLK
OFF
RS232
Bus Status
OFF
Baud
9.6 kbps
Tx
CH1
Threshold
0 V
Rx
OFF
Polarity
Endian
LSB
Data
8 bits
Stop Bit
1 bit
Parity
None
Package
OFF
Separator
0(NUL)
I2C
Bus Status
OFF
SCL
CH1
SCL Thre
0 V
SDA
CH2
SDA Thre
0 V
Exchange
SCL/SDA
R/W
Without
SPI
Bus Status
OFF
Mode
Timeout
Timeout
1 μs
CLK
CH1
Threshold
0 V
Slope
Rising
MISO
CH2
Threshold
0 V
MOSI
OFF
Polarity
Width
8
Endian
MSB
LIN
Bus Status
OFF
RIGOL Chapter 18 Store and Load
18-22 DS8000-R User Guide
Source
CH1
Threshold
0 V
Baud
19.2 kbps
Parity
Without
Version
Both
CAN
Bus Status
OFF
Source
CH1
Threshold
0 V
Signal
CAN_L
Baud
1 Mbps
Sample Position
50%
FlexRay
Bus Status
OFF
Source
CH1
Threshold
0 V
Channel
A
Baud
10 Mbps
Signal
BP
Sample Position
50%
I2S
Bus Status
OFF
SCLK
CH1
SCLK Thre
0 V
SCLK Edge
Rising
WS
CH2
WS Thre
0 V
Data
CH3
Data Thre
0 V
Word Size
4
Receive
4
Alignment
I2S
WS Low
Left
Endian
MSB
Data Polarity
1553B
Bus Status
OFF
Data
CH1
Threshold
0 V
Ref
Current
Ref1
Source
CH1
VScale
1 V
Chapter 19 System Utility Function Setting RIGOL
DS8000-R User Guide 19-1
Chapter 19 System Utility Function Setting
In the system function setting menu, you can set the parameters for the remote
interface and the system-related parameters.
Contents in this chapter:
◼ Remote Interface Configuration
◼ System-related
RIGOL Chapter 19 System Utility Function Setting
19-2 DS8000-R User Guide
Remote Interface Configuration
DS8000-R series can communicate with the PC via the USB, LAN, or GPIB (requiring
to work with RIGOL's USB-GPIB interface converter) interface. Before using the
remote interfaces, configure the corresponding interface according to the
introductions in the following section.
Click on the function navigation icon at the lower-left corner of the screen to
open the function navigation. Then click on the "Utility" icon to enter the "Utility"
setting menu. Click LAN to set the interface.
LAN Configuration
Before using the LAN bus, use a network cable to connect the oscilloscope to your
local area network. The network interface of the oscilloscope is on the rear panel.
Click IO → LAN to open the LAN Settings interface, as shown in the following figure.
You can view the current network settings and configure the network parameters.
Figure 19-1 LAN Network Connection Setting Interface
Network Status
Different prompts will be displayed according to the current network connection
status.
⚫ Network Config Succeeded!
⚫ Acquiring IP...
⚫ IP Conflict!
Network Status
Current IP Config.
Type
MAC Address
VISA Descriptor
IP Config. Type
Network Parameters
Web Control Info.
Chapter 19 System Utility Function Setting RIGOL
DS8000-R User Guide 19-3
⚫ Disconnected!
⚫ DHCP Config Failed!
⚫ Read Status Fail!
⚫ Connected!
⚫ Invalid IP!
⚫ IP lost!
⚫ Please wait...
IP Configuration Type
The configuration type of the IP address can be DHCP, Auto IP, or Static IP. For
different IP configuration types, the configurations for IP address and other network
parameters are different.
DHCP
Click IP Config Type to select "DHCP". When DHPC is valid, the DHCP server in the
current network will assign the network parameters (e.g. IP address, Subnet,
Gateway, and DNS) for the oscilloscope.
Auto IP
Click IP Config Type to select "Auto IP". In auto IP mode, the oscilloscope will get
the IP address (ranging from 169.254.0.1 to 169.254.255.254) and the subnet mask
(255.255.0.0) automatically according to the current network configuration. Only
when "DHCP" is not selected or failed to be connected, can "Auto IP" be valid.
Static IP
Click IP Config Type to select "Static IP". Note: when this type is valid, you need to
disable DHCP and Auto IP manually. At this time, the "IP", "SubMask", "Gateway",
and "DNS" menu items are added. Thus, you can self-define the network parameters
(e.g. IP address) of the oscilloscope.
1. Set IP Address
The format of the IP address is nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn. The range of the first segment
(nnn) of the address is from 0 to 255 (except 127); wherein, the valid range is
from 0 to 223. The range for the other three segments is from 0 to 255. You are
recommended to ask your network administrator for an IP address available.
Click IP, and then the numeric keypad is displayed. Use the numeric keys to
input the desired IP address. This setting will be saved to the non-volatile
memory; if "Power On" is set to "Last", then DHCP and Auto IP are disabled at
the next power-on. The oscilloscope will load the preset IP address
automatically.
RIGOL Chapter 19 System Utility Function Setting
19-4 DS8000-R User Guide
2. Set the Subnet Mask
The format of the subnet mask is nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn; wherein, the range of "nnn"
is from 0 to 255. You are recommended to ask your network administrator for a
subnet mask available.
Click SubMask, and then the numeric keypad is displayed. Use the numeric
keys to input the desired subnet mask. This setting will be saved in the
non-volatile memory; if "Power On" is set to "Last", then DHCP and Auto IP are
disabled at the next power-on. The oscilloscope will load the preset subnet mask
automatically.
3. Set the Gateway
You can set this parameter in Static IP mode.
The format of the gateway is nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn. The range of the first segment
(nnn) is from 0 to 223 (except 127), and the range for the other three segments
is from 0 to 255. You are recommended to ask your network administrator for a
gate address available.
Click Gateway, and then the numeric keypad is displayed. Use the numeric
keys to input the desired subnet mask. This setting will be saved in the
non-volatile memory; if "Power On" is set to "Last", then DHCP and Auto IP are
disabled at the next power-on. The oscilloscope will load the preset gateway
automatically.
4. Set the DNS
You can set this parameter in Static IP mode.
The format of the DNS address is "nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn". The range for the first
segment (nnn) of the address is from 0 to 223 (except 127); and the range for
the other three segments is from 0 to 255. You are recommended to ask your
network administrator for an address available.
Click DNS, and then the numeric keypad is displayed. Use the numeric keys to
input the desired DNS address. Generally, you do not need to set the DNS,
therefore this parameter setting can be ignored.
Apply the Network Parameter Setting
Click Apply to apply the current network parameter setting.
Tip
⚫ When the three IP configuration types are all turned on, the priority of the
parameter configuration from high to low is "DHCP", "Auto IP", and "Static
IP".
⚫ The three IP configuration types cannot be all turned off at the same time.
Chapter 19 System Utility Function Setting RIGOL
DS8000-R User Guide 19-5
MAC Address
For each oscilloscope, the MAC address is unique. When assigning the IP address for
the oscilloscope, the system uses the MAC address to identify the instrument.
VISA Address
Displays the VISA address currently used by the oscilloscope.
Web Control Information
Displays the user name and password for network configuration of the oscilloscope
through the LXI webpage.
Tip: Connect the oscilloscope to the local area network. Start up Ultra Sigma, and
then right-click the resource name and select "LXI-Web" to load the LXI webpage.
You can also directly input the IP address of the oscilloscope into the address bar of
the browser to load the LXI webpage.
To Set mDNS
Click mDNS continuously to enable or disable the multicast Domain Name System
(mDNS). This system is used to provide the function of DNS server for service
discovery in a small network without a DNS server.
To Set Host Name
Click Host Name to input the host name. For the host name input method, refer to
relevant descriptions in "To Create a Folder".
To Set the GPIB Address
Before using the GPIB bus to control the oscilloscope, use the USB-GPIB interface
converter (an option that requires to be ordered separately) to extend the GPIB
interface, and then use the GPIB cable to connect the instrument to the PC.
Click on the function navigation icon at the lower-left corner of the screen to
open the funciton navigaiton. Click on the Utility icon to enter the "Utility"
setting menu. Click IO → GPIB to set the GPIB address. Use the pop-up numeric
keypad to input the GPIB address. Its settable range is from 1 to 30. By default, it is
1.
RIGOL Chapter 19 System Utility Function Setting
19-6 DS8000-R User Guide
To Set HDMI
Sets the status and parameters of the HDMI video output interface on the rear panel.
Note that only when the HDMI interface is connected, can this menu be enabled.
Click HDMI to enter the HDMI setting menu.
⚫ Click Output continuously to enable or disable the video output.
➢ ON: You can connect the instrument to an external display via this interface
to better observe the waveform display from the external display.
➢ OFF: disables the interface.
⚫ Click Resolution to set the screen resolution. The available resolution includes
640x480, 720x480, and 1280x720.
SFP+ Configuration
First use the optical fiber cable to connect the oscilloscope to your LAN via the
rear-panel SFP+ interface.
Click IO → SFP+ to open the "SFP+" setting menu. The SFP+ setting window is
displayed, as shown in the figure below. You can view the current network settings
and configure the network parameters.
Figure 19-2 SFP+ Network Connection Setting Interface
1. To Enable or Disable the SFP+ Network Configuration Window
Click Display to enable or disable the display of the SFP+ network configuration
window.
2. To Set the Local IP
Click Local IP, and then the numeric keypad is displayed. Use the numeric keys
to input the desired IP address. This setting will be saved to the non-volatile
memory. The oscilloscope will load the preset IP address automatically at the
next power-on.
Chapter 19 System Utility Function Setting RIGOL
DS8000-R User Guide 19-7
3. To Set the Local Port
Click Local Port, and then the numeric keypad is displayed. Use the numeric
keys to input the local port. The range of the port number is from 1 to 65535.
This setting will be saved to the non-volatile memory. The oscilloscope will load
the preset local port automatically at the next power-on.
4. To Set the Remote IP
Click Remote IP, and then the numeric keypad is displayed. Use the numeric
keys to input the desired remote IP address. This setting will be saved to the
non-volatile memory. The oscilloscope will load the preset remote IP address
automatically at the next power-on.
5. To Set the Remote Port
Click Remote Port, and then the numeric keypad is displayed. Use the numeric
keys to input the remote port. The range of the port number is from 1 to 65535.
This setting will be saved to the non-volatile memory. The oscilloscope will load
the preset remote port automatically at the next power-on.
6. To Enable or Disable the SFP+ Interface
Click SFP+. If the SFP+ interface is currently disabled, a prompt message
"Open the optical port?" is displayed when you click this menu. If the SFP+
interface is currently enabled, a prompt message "Close the optical port?" is
displayed when you click this menu. Click OK or Cancel to confirm or cancel
your setting.
Note: When the SFP+ interface is enabled, the search function, the precision
measurement mode, rectangular drawing, zone trigger, and the statistics
function under the pass/fail test are disabled.
7. To Apply the SFP+ Parameter Setting
Click Apply to validate the current network parameter setting.
USB Connection
The oscilloscope can communicate with a PC via the USB DEVICE interface on the
rear panel. No parameters are required to be configured.
RIGOL Chapter 19 System Utility Function Setting
19-8 DS8000-R User Guide
System-related
Beeper
When the beeper is enabled, you can hear the sound of the beeper when the
following conditions occur:
⚫ Press a key on the front panel
⚫ Use the mouse to operate on the screen
⚫ When a prompt message is displayed
Click Utility, and then click Beeper continuously to select "ON" ( ) or "OFF" ( ).
By default, it is OFF.
Language
This oscilloscope supports menus in multiple languages. Both Chinese and English
are available for the display of the help information, prompt messages, and interface.
Click Utility → Language to select the desired language.
System Information
Click Utility → System → About to view the system information of the oscilloscope,
including the manufacturer, product model, serial number, etc.
You can also view the system information of the oscilloscope in the "Help" system
menu.
Power On
You can set the system configuration to be recalled when the oscilloscope is powered
on again after power-off.
Click Utility → System, and then click Power On continuously to select "Last" or
"Default". By default, it is "Default".
⚫ Last: returns to the setting of the system at last power-off.
⚫ Default: returns to the factory setting of the system.
Chapter 19 System Utility Function Setting RIGOL
DS8000-R User Guide 19-9
Power Status
Use the power line to connect the oscilloscope to the AC power and then turn on the
power switch to power on the instrument. You can set the power status after it is
powered on.
Click Utility → System, and then click Power status to select "Switch On" or
"Switch Off".
⚫ Switch Off: after the oscilloscope is connected to power, you need to press the
Power key on the front panel to power on the instrument.
⚫ Switch On: After the oscilloscope is connected to power, it will be powered on
immediately.
Note: Whatever the option you select, you still can press the Power key on the front
panel to turn on or off the instrument.
Aux Output
You can set the type of the signal output from the [TRIG OUT] connector on the
rear panel.
Click Utility → System, and then click the AUX Out key continuously to select
"TrigOut" or "PassFail".
⚫ Trigger Output
After this type is selected, at each trigger (hardware trigger), the oscilloscope
outputs a signal from the [TRIG OUT] connector on the rear panel that can
reflect the current capture rate of the oscilloscope. Connect this signal to a
waveform display device, measure the signal frequency. It is found that the
measurement result is the same as the current capture rate.
⚫ Pass/Fail
When this type is selected, the instrument can output a positive or negative
pulse via the [TRIG OUT] connector when a successful or failed event is
detected. Refer to descriptions in "To Set the Output Form of the Test
Results". When you enable the Aux output, the AUX Out menu is
automatically set to "PassFail". When the AUX Out menu is automatically set to
"TrigOut", then in the pass/fail test menu, the Aux Out function is automatically
disabled.
Ref Clock
This oscilloscope can output the internal 10 MHz sample clock signal from the
RIGOL Chapter 19 System Utility Function Setting
19-10 DS8000-R User Guide
rear-panel [10M In/Out] connector, and it can also receive the external 10 MHz
clock signal from the connector. This function can be used for the synchronization of
multiple oscilloscopes.
Click Utility → System → Ref Clock to select the desired clock type.
⚫ OFF: disables the reference clock function.
⚫ Clock Input: receives the external 10 MHz clock signal from the rear-panel [10M
In/Out] connector.
Help
Click Utility → System → Help to enter the "Help" function menu.
⚫ Click About to view the system information of the oscilloscope.
⚫ Click Content to enter the built-in help system.
⚫ Click Option list to view the name of the installed option and other detailed
information about the option from the option list.
⚫ Click Option install to install the desired option. For detailed installation
procedures, refer to descriptions in "To View the Option Information and
the Option Installation".
⚫ Click Online upgrade to perform online upgrading for the system software. For
the method of online upgrade, refer to "Tip" in "Rear Panel Overview"
section.
Note: If you connect the oscilloscope to the network via the LAN interface,
every Monday you power on the instrument, the oscilloscope will check whether
the latest version of the upgrade software is available on the RIGOL official
website. If yes, a red spot appears at the upper-left corner of the Online
upgrade menu, prompting you that the latest upgrade version is available and
you can perform online upgrade.
⚫ Click Local upgrade, then a dialog box "Upgrade system firmware?" is
displayed. Click OK to perform local upgrading for the system software (required
to insert the USB disk that contains the software installation package); click
Cancel to cancel local upgrading operation.
Self-calibration
The self-calibration program can quickly make the oscilloscope to work in an optimal
state to get the precise measurement results. You can perform self-calibration at any
time, especially when the changes of the ambient temperature reach or above 5℃.
Make sure that the oscilloscope has been warmed up or operating for more than 30
minutes before the self-calibration.
Disconnect all the input channels, then click Utility → System → SelfCal, and the
self-calibration interface is displayed, as shown in the following figure.
Chapter 19 System Utility Function Setting RIGOL
DS8000-R User Guide 19-11
Figure 19-3 Self-calibration Interface
⚫ Click Start, and then the oscilloscope will start to execute the self-calibration
program.
⚫ After the self-calibration program is launched, the Exit menu does not function.
You can double-click any place on the screen to stop the self-calibration.
⚫ Click Window continuously to open or close the self-calibration information
window. You can also click on the icon
at the upper-right corner of the
self-calibration information window to close the window.
Note: After the self-calibration starts, the "Calibration" window is displayed. The
status shows "Waiting", indicating that the instrument is calibrating. At this time, to
cancel the calibration, double-click any place on the screen. Then, the calibration
status is changed to "Abort". Click Start again, and the oscilloscope starts to
calibrate again. After the calibration has been completed, the status shows "Stop"
again. During the self-calibration, most of the menus are disabled.
Auto Config
Click Utility → More → Auto Config, and set the parameters for the Auto key at
the right section of the Web Control page. For detailed settings, refer to descriptions
in "Quick Measurement after AUTO".
Print Setting
Connect the oscilloscope to the local area network via the network cable. The
RIGOL Chapter 19 System Utility Function Setting
19-12 DS8000-R User Guide
DS8000-R series supports printing the whole screen to the network printer. You can
connect the oscilloscope to the printer directly via the USB DEVICE interface on the
rear panel. Then, you can set the print parameters on the oscilloscope to control the
printer to output the corresponding picture.
Click Utility → More → Printer to enter the printer setting menu. After the printer
is properly connected, you need to set the network configurations for printing, and
then set the printer parameters.
1. Network Configuration
Click Setting to enter the network configuration menu.
⚫ Select the Printer
Click Printer to select the printer model.
⚫ Set the IP Address
Click Printer IP to set each segment of the IP address for the printer. Click
the mouse to switch among the segments. Scroll up and down with the
mouse to adjust the value of each segment of the IP address.
⚫ Set the Port
Click Printer Port to adjust the port number. Use the pop-up numeric
keypad to input the port number.
⚫ Network Test
Click Test to test whether the network is connected. If connected, a prompt
message "Network connected" is displayed.
⚫ Print Test Page
Click Print test page to carry out the print test. The print progress is also
displayed on the screen.
2. Set the Printer Parameters
⚫ Print
After the printer parameters are set, click Print to execute the print
operation.
⚫ Copies
Click Copies to set the number of copies to be printed. Use the pop-up
numeric keypad or scroll with the mouse to set it. The settable range is from
1 to 99. By default, it is 3.
⚫ Paper Size
The Paper Size menu is grayed out and disabled. The paper size
supported by the oscilloscope is only A4.
⚫ Ink Saver
Chapter 19 System Utility Function Setting RIGOL
DS8000-R User Guide 19-13
Click Ink Saver continuously to enable or disable the ink saver setting. If
disabled, you need to set Color. Click Color continuously to select "Gray"
or "Color".
Email
This oscilloscope supports sending files via emails. Click Utility → More → Email to
enter the email setting menu.
1. Set the Email Server
Click Settings to enter the email server login setting menu. The following
window is displayed. After the setting, click OK to complete the server login. To
cancel login, click Cancel to exit or click on the icon
at the upper-right
corner of the window to exit. If you exit the server setting window, you can click
SMTP, Port, UserName, or PassWord to reopen the window.
⚫ Set SMTP
Click SMTP to set the mail transmission protocol. For detailed settings of
mail transmission protocol, refer to descriptions in "To Create a Folder".
⚫ Set the port
Click Port to set the protocol port in the pop-up numeric keypad. Its range
is from 1 to 65535.
⚫ Set the user name
Click UserName to set the user name of the server. For detailed setting
methods for the user name, refer to descriptions in "To Create a Folder".
⚫ Set the password
Click PassWord to set the password of the server. For detailed setting
methods for the password, refer to descriptions in "To Create a Folder".
⚫ Email test
Click Test to test whether the e-mail server is properly set.
⚫ Restore default settings
RIGOL Chapter 19 System Utility Function Setting
19-14 DS8000-R User Guide
Click Default to restore the settings of receiver and mail settings to
defaults.
2. Set the Receiver
Click Receiver to display the receiver input interface, and you can edit the email
address of the receiver. For detailed input methods of the receiver email address,
refer to descriptions in "To Create a Folder".
3. Upload Attachment
Click Attachment to select the attachment type to be uploaded. The available
attachments include "Screen", "Setup", and "Other". If you select "Other", you
also need to click File Select to select the file to be uploaded.
4. Send the Mail
Click Send Mail to send the edited email to the receiver.
Key Locker
You can set whether to lock all the function keys (except the Power key). Click
Utility → More → Key Locker to select "Locked" or "Unlocked". By default, it is
unlocked.
⚫ Locked: indicates that all operation keys of the oscilloscope (except the Power
key on the front panel) are locked. You cannot do any operation on the screen
with the mouse.
⚫ Unlocked: unlocks the function keys. You are allowed to operate on the screen.
To unlock the keyboard, perform any one of the following operations.
1. Restart the oscilloscope by pressing the Power key.
2. Send the command (:SYSTem:LOCKed 0) with the Ultra Sigma software. For
details, refer to
DS8000-R Programming Guide
.
3. Click the Touch key in the Web Control operation page.
Quick Operation
Click Utility → More → Quick settings to enter the quick key operation menu.
1. Image Saving
When the Quick shortcut key is set to "Save Image", click Quick at the right
section of the operation interface in the Web Control page to capture the screen.
⚫ Operation Type
Chapter 19 System Utility Function Setting RIGOL
DS8000-R User Guide 19-15
Click Operation to select "Save Image".
⚫ Image Format
Click Format to select the image format. The image formats include "*.png",
"*.bmp", "*.jpg", and "*.tif".
⚫ Invert
Click Invert continuously to enable or disable the invert function.
⚫ Color
Click Color continuously to set the color of the saved image to "Color" or
"Gray".
2. Waveform Saving
When the Quick shortcut key is set to "Save Wave", click Quick at the right
section of the operation interface in the Web Control page to save the waveform.
⚫ Operation Type
Click Operation to select "Save Wave".
⚫ Data Source
Click Data Source continuously to select "Memory" or "Screen" as the
source of the saved waveform.
⚫ Format
Click Format to select the waveform format. When Data Source is "Screen",
the available formats are "*.bin" and "*.csv". When Data Source is "Memory",
the available formats are "*.bin", "*.csv", and "*wfm".
⚫ Storage Channel
If "Memory" is selected under Data Source, you need to set the storage
channel. Click Channel to select the storage channel. The available storage
channels include CH1-CH4.
3. Setup Saving
When the Quick shortcut key is set to "Save Setup", click Quick at the right
section of the operation interface in the Web Control page to save the setup of
the oscilloscope.
Click Operation to select "Save Setup".
4. All Measurement
When the Quick shortcut key is set to "All Measure", click Quick at the right
section of the operation interface in the Web Control page to measure all the
parameters of the current measurement source.
RIGOL Chapter 19 System Utility Function Setting
19-16 DS8000-R User Guide
⚫ Operation Type
Click Operation to select "All Measure".
⚫ All Measurement
Click All Measure to select the desired measurement channel. The available
measurement channels include OFF and CH1-CH4.
5. Statistics Reset
When the Quick shortcut key is set to "Stat Reset", click Quick at the right
section of the operation interface in the Web Control page to make statistics
reset of measurement or pass/fail test reset.
⚫ Operation Type
Click Operation to select "Stat Reset".
⚫ Statistics Reset
Click Stat Reset to select the function that requires statistics reset. You can
select "Measure" or "PassFail".
6. Print
When the Quick shortcut key is set to "Print", click Quick at the right section of
the operation interface in the Web Control page to print the screen image of the
oscilloscope.
Click Operation to select "Print".
7. Email
When the Quick shortcut key is set to "Email", click Quick at the right section of
the operation interface in the Web Control page to send the file through email.
Click Operation to select "Email".
8. Record
When the Quick shortcut key is set to "Record", click Quick at the right section
of the operation interface in the Web Control page to record the waveform.
Click Operation to select "Record".
9. Save Group
When the Quick shortcut key is set to "Save Group", click Quick at the right
section of the operation interface in the Web Control page to save group.
⚫ Operation Type
Click Operation to select "Save Group".
⚫ Storage Option
Chapter 19 System Utility Function Setting RIGOL
DS8000-R User Guide 19-17
Click Group to select the desired storage option. The storage options include
"Save Image", "Save Wave", and "Save Setup".
Screen Saver
When the oscilloscope enters the idle state and holds for a certain period of time, the
screen saver program will be enabled.
Click More → Screen Saver to enter the screen saver setting menu. The available
screen saver types include "Off", "Picture", and "Text". The screen saver program is
disabled by default.
1. Select the Screen Saver
⚫ If you select "Off" under Screen Saver, it indicates that the screen saver is
disabled.
⚫ If you select "Picture" under Screen Saver, click Select Picture to select
the file. The file types include "*.png", "*.bmp", "*.jpg", and "*.tif".
⚫ If you select "Text" under Screen Saver, click Text, and then the filename
input interface is displayed, e.g. inputting "RIGOL Scope". For details, refer
to descriptions in "To Create a Folder".
2. Set the Wait Time
Click Time to Start to set the screen saver time. Also, you can use the pop-up
numeric keypad or scroll with the mouse to input the screen saver time. The
available range is from 1 min to 999 min. By default, it is 30 min.
3. Preview
Click Preview to view the set screen saver.
4. Default
Click Default to restore the screen saver to the default settings.
Self-check
The oscilloscope supports key test.
Click Utility → More → More → Self Check to enter the self-check menu.
Click Key Test to enter the keyboard test interface (virtual keypad of the front
panel). At this time, you can press the keys on the front panel to check whether the
virtual keys are highlighted. If yes, it indicates that the keys work normally; if no, it
indicates that there's something wrong with the keys. Press RUN/STOP on the front
panel for three consecutive times to exit the keyboard test interface. You can also
click the screen for three times to exit the keyboard test interface.
RIGOL Chapter 19 System Utility Function Setting
19-18 DS8000-R User Guide
System Time
The system time is displayed at the lower-right side of the screen in "hh:mm
(hour:minute)" format. When you save the waveform, the output file will contain the
time information.
Click Utility → More → More → Time to open the time setting menu.
1. Set the System Time
(1) Click Show Time to open or close the system time interface.
(2) Set "year": Click Year to set it. Use the pop-up numeric keypad to input the
numeric value or scroll with the mouse to set it.
(3) Set "month": Click Month to set it. Use the pop-up numeric keypad to input
the numeric value or scroll with the mouse to set it.
(4) Set "day": Click Day to set it. Use the pop-up numeric keypad to input the
numeric value or scroll with the mouse to set it.
(5) Set "Hour": Click Hour to set it. Use the pop-up numeric keypad to input
the numeric value or scroll with the mouse to set it.
(6) Set "Minute": Click Minute to set it. Use the pop-up numeric keypad to
input the numeric value or scroll with the mouse to set it.
The setting range of each item of the system time conforms to the convention.
⚫ Year: 2017 to 2099
⚫ Month: 01 to 12
⚫ Date: 01 to 31 (28, 29, or 30)
⚫ Hour: 00 to 23
⚫ Minute: 00 to 59
⚫ Second: 00 to 59
2. Apply the Currently Set System Time
Click Apply to validate the current settings. The time at the lower-right side of
the screen will be updated.
Default Option
Used to determine whether the impedance is modified while configuring the
oscilloscope to restore its default settings. To restore its default settings, two
methods are available.
⚫ Click the function navigation icon to open the function navigation. Click Storage
→ More → Default.
⚫ Click the Default key at the right section of the operation interface in Web
Control page.
Click Utility → More → More → Default Option, then enter the default option
Chapter 19 System Utility Function Setting RIGOL
DS8000-R User Guide 19-19
menu. Click Keep Impedance continuously to enable or disable the impedance
keep function. If you select ON, after you click Default, the impedance value that
you set remains unchanged and other settings will be restored to the default settings.
If you select OFF, after you click Default, the impedance value will be restored to its
default value 1 MΩ.
Chapter 20 Remote Control RIGOL
DS8000-R User Guide 20-1
Chapter 20 Remote Control
The oscilloscope can be remotely controlled in the following three methods:
User-defined Programming
You can program and control the oscilloscope by using the SCPI (Standard
Commands for Programmable Instruments) commands. For details about the
relevant commands and programming, refer to
DS8000-R Programming Guide
.
PC Software
You can use the PC software to send commands to control the oscilloscope remotely.
RIGOL Ultra Sigma is recommended. You can download the software from RIGOL
official website (www.rigol.com).
Operation Procedures:
(1) Set up communication between the instrument and PC.
(2) Run Ultra Sigma and search for the instrument resource.
(3) Open the remote command control panel to send commands.
Web Control
DS8000-R series digital oscilloscope supports Web Control. When the instrument is
connected to the internet, Web Control can display the waveform interface of the
oscilloscope in a real-time manner. You can migrate the instrument control and
waveform analysis to the control terminals (e.g. PC, mobile, and iPad) through Web
Control to realize remote control of the instrument. When you log in to the Web
Control for the first time, use the user name "admin" (without quotation marks) and
the password "rigol" (without quotation marks).
The oscilloscope can communicate with the PC via the following interfaces:
◼ Remote Control via USB
◼ Remote Control via LAN
◼ Remote Control via GPIB
This chapter will illustrate how to use RIGOL's Ultra Sigma software to remotely
control the oscilloscope via various interfaces. Note: When communicating with the
PC via GPIB, the oscilloscope does not support large data transmission operation
such as screen shot and waveform reading.
CAUTION
Before setting up communication, please turn off the instrument to avoid
causing damage to the communication interfaces.
RIGOL Chapter 20 Remote Control
20-2 DS8000-R User Guide
Remote Control via USB
1. Connect the device
Use a USB cable to connect the oscilloscope (USB DEVICE interface) with the PC
(USB HOST interface).
2. Install the USB driver
This oscilloscope is a USB-TMC device. After you connect the oscilloscope to the
PC properly and power it on for the first time (the oscilloscope will be
automatically configured with the USB interface). In this case, "Found New
Hardware Wizard" dialog box appears on the PC. Please install "USB Test and
Measurement Device (IVI)" according to the instructions. The steps are as
follows:
1
2
RIGOL Chapter 20 Remote Control
20-4 DS8000-R User Guide
3. Search for the device resource
Start up Ultra Sigma and the software will automatically search for the resource
currently connected to the PC via the USB interface. You can also click
to search for the resource.
4. View the device resource
The searched instrument resource will be under the directory of "RIGOL Online
Resource", with the model of the instrument and the USB interface information
being displayed as follows.
7
Chapter 20 Remote Control RIGOL
DS8000-R User Guide 20-5
5. Control the instrument remotely
Right-click the resource name "DS8204-R
(USB0::0x1AB1::0x0516::DS8R820400003::INSTR)" and select "SCPI Panel
Control" to turn on the remote command control panel, through which you can
send commands and read data.
RIGOL Chapter 20 Remote Control
20-6 DS8000-R User Guide
Remote Control via LAN
1. Connect the device
Use the network cable to connect the oscilloscope to your local area network
(LAN).
2. Configure network parameters
Configure the network parameters of the oscilloscope according to "LAN
Configuration".
3. Search for the device resource
Start up Ultra Sigma and click
to open the panel as shown in the
figure below. Click and the software searches for the instrument
resource currently connected to LAN. The resource found is displayed at the
right of the panel. Click to add it. Besides, you can input the IP
address of the instrument manually into the text field under "Manual Input LAN
Instrument IP", then click
. If the instrument passes the test, click
to add the instrument to the LAN instrument resource list in the right
section; if the instrument fails the test, please check whether the IP address that
you input is correct, or use the auto search method to add the instrument
resource.
4. View the device resource
The resources found will appear under the "RIGOL Online Resource" directory.
For example, DS8204-R (TCPIP::172.16.3.14::INSTR).
5. Control the instrument remotely
Right-click the resource name "DS8204-R (TCPIP::172.16.3.14::INSTR)" and
select "SCPI Panel Control" to turn on the remote command control panel,
through which you can send commands and read data.
6. Load LXI webpage
As this oscilloscope conforms to LXI CORE 2011 DEVICE standards, you can load
LXI webpage through Ultra Sigma (right-click the instrument resource name and
Chapter 20 Remote Control RIGOL
DS8000-R User Guide 20-7
select "LXI-Web"). Various important information about the instrument
(including the model, manufacturer, serial number, description, MAC address,
and IP address) will be displayed on the webpage. You can also directly input
the IP address of the oscilloscope in the address bar of the PC browser to load
the LXI webpage.
Remote Control via GPIB
1. Connect the device
Use the USB-GPIB interface converter to extend the GPIB interface for the
oscilloscope, and then use the GPIB cable to connect the oscilloscope to the PC
to realize remote control.
2. Install the driver of GPIB card
Correctly install the driver of the GPIB card which has been connected to the PC.
3. To Set the GPIB Address
Set the GPIB address of the oscilloscope according to the description in "To Set
the GPIB Address".
4. Search for the device resource
Start Ultra Sigma, and then click
. A window is displayed as shown in
Figure (a). Click and the software searches for the instrument
resource currently connected to the PC via the GPIB interface. The resource
found is displayed at the right of the window as shown in Figure (b). Click
to add it.
(a)
RIGOL Chapter 20 Remote Control
20-8 DS8000-R User Guide
(b)
Note: If you want to remove the resource, select the resource and then click
to remove it.
If the resource cannot be searched automatically:
⚫ Select the GPIB card address of the PC from the drop-down box of
"GPIB0::" and select the GPIB address set in the oscilloscope from the
drop-down box of "0::INSTR".
⚫ Click
to check whether the GPIB communication works
normally; if not, please follow the corresponding prompt messages to
handle it.
5. View the device resource
The searched instrument resource will be under the directory of "RIGOL Online
Resource", as shown in the following figure.
6. Control the instrument remotely
Right-click the resource name "DS8204-R (GPIB0::18::INSTR)", and select
"SCPI Panel Control" to open the remote command control panel. Then you can
send commands and read data through the panel.
Chapter 21 Troubleshooting RIGOL
DS8000-R User Guide 21-1
Chapter 21 Troubleshooting
The commonly encountered failures of the oscilloscope and their solutions are listed
below. If the following problems occur, locate and resolve the problems according to
the following steps. If the problems still persist, contact RIGOL and provide your
instrument information to us.
1. The screen is still dark after pressing the power key.
(1) Check whether the power switch is really on.
(2) Check whether the power is correctly connected.
(3) Check whether the fuse is burned out. If the fuse needs to be changed,
please use the specified fuse.
(4) Restart the instrument after finishing the above inspections.
(5) If it still does not work correctly, please contact RIGOL.
2. No waveform of the signal is displayed on the screen.
(1) Check whether the probe is properly connected to the item under test.
(2) Check whether there are signals generated from the item to be tested (you
can connect the probe compensation output signal to the faulty channel to
locate the problem, and then determine whether the channel or the item to
be tested has a problem).
(3) Resample the signal.
3. The display of waveform is ladder-like.
(1) The horizontal time base might be too low. Increase the horizontal time
base to improve the display effects.
(2) If the display type is "Vector", the lines between the sample points may
cause ladder-like display results. Click on the function navigation icon
at the lower-left corner of the screen to open the function navigation. Then
click the "Display" icon to enter the display setting menu. Click Type
continuously to select "Dots".
4. The USB storage device cannot be recognized.
(1) Check whether the USB storage device can work normally.
(2) Make sure the USB storage device used is FAT32-format Flash storage type,
as this instrument does not support USB3.0 storage device and hardware
storage type.
(3) Check whether the capacity of the USB storage device is too large. It is
recommended that the capacity of the USB storage device should not
exceed 8 GB for this oscilloscope.
(4) Restart the instrument and insert the USB storage device to check it.
(5) If the USB storage device still cannot work normally, please contact
RIGOL.
Chapter 22 Appendix RIGOL
DS8000-R User Guide 22-1
Chapter 22 Appendix
Appendix A: Accessories and Options
Order Information
Order No.
Model
DS8204-R (2 GHz, 10 GSa/s, 500 Mpts, 4CH compact
digital oscilloscope)
DS8204-R
DS8104-R (1 GHz, 10 GSa/s, 500 Mpts, 4CH compact
digital oscilloscope)
DS8104-R
DS8034-R (350 MHz, 5 GSa/s, 500 Mpts, 4CH compact
digital oscilloscope)
DS8034-R
Standard Accessories
USB cable
CB-USBA-USBB-FF
-150
Power cord conforming to the standard of the destination
country
——
Rack mount kit
RM1011 & RM1012
Recommended Accessories
Passive high-impedance probe (500 MHz BW)
RP3500A
Passive high-impedance probe (350 MHz BW)
PVP2350
Passive low-impedance probe (1.5 GHz BW)
RP6150A
Active single-ended/differential probe (2.5 GHz BW)
PVA7250
Active differential probe (1.5 GHz BW)
RP7150
Active differential probe (800 MHz BW)
RP7080
Active single-ended probe (1.5 GHz BW)
RP7150S
Active single-ended probe (800 MHz BW)
RP7080S
50 Ω impedance matching device (2W, 1 GHz)
ADP0150BNC
Power analysis phase difference correction jig
RPA246
64CH synchronization module
DS SYNC64
2-way power splitter (DC to 4 GHz)
PRSC42
10 GE Communication Option
High-speed data communication option
DS8000-R HSDC
Software Tool
Software development kit (open source, available to
download from RIGOL official website)
——
Bundle Option
Function and application bundle option, including
DS8000-R-COMP, DS8000-R-EMBD, DS8000-R-AUTO,
DS8000-R-FLEX, DS8000-R-AUDIO, DS8000-R-AERO,
DS8000-R-AWG, DS8000-R-JITTER and DS8000-R-PWR
DS8000-R-BND
Serial Protocol Analysis Option
PC serial bus trigger and analysis (RS232/UART)
DS8000-R-COMP
RIGOL Chapter 22 Appendix
22-2 DS8000-R User Guide
Embedded serial bus trigger and analysis (I2C, SPI)
DS8000-R-EMBD
Auto serial bus trigger and analysis (CAN, LIN)
DS8000-R-AUTO
FlexRay serial bus trigger and analysis (FlexRay)
DS8000-R-FLEX
Audio serial bus trigger and analysis (I2S)
DS8000-R-AUDIO
MIL-STD-1553 serial bus trigger and analysis
(MIL-STD-1553)
DS8000-R-AERO
Measurement Application Option
25 MHz arbitrary waveform generator
DS8000-R-AWG
Built-in power analysis (required to purchase the RPA246
phase deviation correction jig)
DS8000-R-PWR
Real-time eye diagram and jitter analysis (option, only
available for DS8104-R and DS8204-R)
DS8000-R-JITTER
Note:
For all the accessories and options, please contact the local office of RIGOL.
Chapter 22 Appendix RIGOL
DS8000-R User Guide 22-3
Appendix B: Warranty
RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. (hereinafter referred to as RIGOL) warrants that
the product will be free from defects in materials and workmanship within the
warranty period. If a product proves defective within the warranty period, RIGOL
guarantees free replacement or repair for the defective product.
To get repair service, please contact with your nearest RIGOL sales or service office.
There is no other warranty, expressed or implied, except such as is expressly set
forth herein or other applicable warranty card. There is no implied warranty of
merchantability or fitness for a particular purpose. Under no circumstances shall
RIGOL be liable for any consequential, indirect, ensuing, or special damages for any
breach of warranty in any case.
Index RIGOL
DS8000-R User Guide 1
Index
+Duty ...................................... 6-27
+Rate ...................................... 6-31
+Width .................................... 6-26
Acquisition Mode ........................ 4-5
AM ........................................ 17-12
Anti-Aliasing ............................. 4-10
Area ........................................ 6-31
AutoIP ..................................... 19-3
Aux Output .............................. 19-9
Average ..................................... 4-5
Bandwidth Limit .......................... 2-5
Blackman-Harris ......................... 6-8
Built-in Waveform ..................... 17-5
Channel Coupling ........................ 2-4
Channel Label ................... 2-10, 2-11
DC .......................................... 17-4
DC offset voltage ...................... 17-2
Default Gateway ....................... 19-4
Delay ....................................... 6-28
Delay Calibration ......................... 2-9
Delay Trigger ............................ 5-26
Delayed Sweep .................... 3-2, 3-3
Domain Name Server ................ 19-4
Dots ........................................ 16-2
Duration Trigger ....................... 5-18
Duty ........................................ 17-4
-Duty ....................................... 6-27
ECG ......................................... 17-6
Edge Trigger ............................... 5-8
Edge Type ................................ 5-30
Edit Waveforms ...................... 17-10
End of Frame Error ....... 11-11, 11-12
Exp.Fall .................................... 17-6
Factory Settings ...................... 18-12
Fall Time .................................. 6-26
Falling Edge Count .................... 6-28
Flattop ....................................... 6-8
FM .............................. 17-13, 17-14
Frequency ........................ 6-26, 17-2
Gauss ...................................... 17-7
GPIB ........................................ 19-5
Hamming ................................... 6-8
Hanning ..................................... 6-8
Horizontal Expansion ................. 4-10
Horizontal Position ...................... 3-2
I2C Decoding .......................... 11-12
I2C Trigger ............................... 5-34
I2S Trigger ............................... 5-46
Idle Time .................................. 5-30
Impedance ............................... 17-3
IP Address ................................ 19-3
Lorentz ..................................... 17-7
MAC ........................................ 19-5
mDNS ...................................... 19-5
Memory Depth ........................... 4-9
Modulating Waveform .... 17-12, 17-13
Modulation ............................. 17-11
Modulation Depth .................... 17-12
Modulation Deviation ............... 17-13
Modulation Frequency ... 17-12, 17-13,
17-14
Negative Pulse Count ................. 6-27
Network Status ......................... 19-2
Noise ....................................... 17-5
Noise Rejection .......................... 5-6
Normal ...................................... 4-5
Nth Edge Trigger ....................... 5-30
Overshoot................................. 6-31
Parallel Decoding ....................... 11-2
Pattern Setting ................. 5-16, 5-18
Peak Detection ........................... 4-6
Period ...................................... 6-26
Period Area ............................... 6-32
Persistence Time ....................... 16-2
Phase ....................................... 6-28
Polarity .............................. 5-9, 5-51
Positive Pulse Count .................. 6-27
Preshoot ................................... 6-31
Probe Ratio .......................... 2-5, 2-6
Pulse ........................................ 17-4
Pulse Condition .......................... 5-9
Pulse Polarity ............................ 5-22
Pulse Trigger .............................. 5-9
Pulse Width Setting ................... 5-10
Qualifier ................................... 5-22
Ramp ....................................... 17-3
RIGOL Index
2 DS8000-R User Guide
-Rate ....................................... 6-31
Rectangular ............................... 6-8
Ref Clock ................................. 19-9
Rise Time ................................ 6-26
Rising Edge Count .................... 6-27
Roll ........................................... 4-4
RS232 Decoding ....................... 11-6
RS232 Trigger .......................... 5-32
Runt Trigger ............................. 5-22
Sample Point 5-40, 5-45, 11-26, 11-30
Sample Rate .............................. 4-7
Setup&Hold Trigger................... 5-28
Sine ........................................ 17-2
Slope Condition ........................ 5-11
Slope Time Setting ................... 5-12
Slope Trigger ............................ 5-11
SPI Decoding .......................... 11-16
SPI Trigger ............................... 5-37
Square .................................... 17-3
Start Keep .............................. 17-15
Start Phase .............................. 17-3
Static IP .................................. 19-3
Subnet mask ............................ 19-4
Sweep ......................... 17-14, 17-16
Sweep Trigger Source ... 17-16, 17-17
Symmetry ................................ 17-3
Sync ........................................ 5-15
To Create the Waveform ............ 17-9
Triangle ..................................... 6-8
Trigger Coupling ......................... 5-5
Trigger Holdoff ........................... 5-5
Trigger LEVEL/Threshold Level ..... 5-3
Trigger Mode .............................. 5-4
Trigger Position ......................... 5-24
tVmax ...................................... 6-27
tVmin ....................................... 6-27
Vamp .............................. 6-30, 17-2
Vavg ........................................ 6-31
Vbase ...................................... 6-30
Vector ...................................... 16-2
Vertical Offset ............................. 2-3
Vertical Scale .............................. 2-2
Video Polarity ........................... 5-14
Video Standard ......................... 5-14
Video Trigger ............................ 5-14
VISA ....................................... 19-5
Vlower ..................................... 6-30
Vmax ....................................... 6-30
Vmid ........................................ 6-30
Vmin ........................................ 6-30
Vpp ......................................... 6-30
Vrms ........................................ 6-31
Vtop ........................................ 6-30
Vupper ..................................... 6-30
Waveform Aliasing ....................... 4-8
Waveform Distortion .................... 4-8
Waveform Leakage ...................... 4-8
-Width ..................................... 6-27
Window trigger ......................... 5-24
Windows Type .......................... 5-24
XY ............................................. 4-2
YT ............................................. 4-2
